En35ser 2

QSS-35 PLUS series
LP7000/7100/7200
Service Manual
Issued in April, 2007
– for service personnel only –

CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
1.Cautions for Work
2.Replacement and adjustment of parts
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
7.Setup for service personnel
8.Appendix
Notes to service personnel
Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing this product.
The printer processor uses tapping truss head screws, spike truss head screws and Washer head screws (for ground). When
attaching the screws once removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where
grounding is required.
Tapping truss head screw
Spike truss head screw (green)
Washer head screw (for ground)
SCREW
System program:
• QSS-3501i PLUS series: Ver. 1
• QSS-3501 PLUS/3502 PLUS series: Ver. 1
• LP7000/7100/7200: Ver. 1
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to anyone other than service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may differ from your system, depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedures may vary depending on the specification or type of model.
Marks to indicate that procedure is different depending on each specification
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
F specification (CP49E) [F]
SM specification [SM]
J specification [J]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
About the chapters
" 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations.
Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
" 4. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the corrective action for trouble.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
For details of how to setup for service personnel, see the Installation Manual.
For confirmation and adjustment procedures during installation, see the Installation Manual.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.
Symbols used in this manual
This section explains the definitions of the symbols used in this manual.
This is called the alert symbol.

Text following this symbol contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This symbol is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the possible
degree of injury to people or damage to physical property.
The Important symbol indicates supplementary explanations, operations or procedures that require caution and instructions
that must be followed.
ii
The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.
The Note symbol indicates useful information on functions and instructions.
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual
The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations
Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB
iii
This page is intentionally blank.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
Explanation of manual ............................................................................................................................ii
Description for each specification ...................................................................................................ii
About the chapters ..........................................................................................................................ii
Symbols used in this manual ..........................................................................................................ii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ........................................................... iii
1. Cautions for Work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................... 10010
Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ...........................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list .............................................................................................................................. 20005
Model list [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................... 20020
Removing covers (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................20021
Adjusting belt tension ............................................................................................................. 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (Colorimeter) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (Processor section, dryer section and conveyor section) [LASER, iBeam] ...............20140
Table unit ............................................................................................................................... 21170
Opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................21170
Removing the engine cover [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................21180
Precautions for opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................21190
Magazine section ................................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the magazine [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ................................................................................................................ 25610
Removing paper supply unit A [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................25610
Removing and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................25620
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................25630
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................25640
Dual magazine unit ................................................................................................................ 25710
Removing paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and the position of paper magazine mount B [LASER, iBeam] .........................................25720
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................25730
v
Triple magazine unit ............................................................................................................... 25750
Removing paper supply unit B2 [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................25750
Removing the connecting unit [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................25755
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................25760
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B2 [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................25765
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................25770
Adjusting the paper zigzagging of paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B2) [LASER, iBeam] ................................25775
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................25810
Banding shooting [LASER] ..................................................................................................................................25820
Banding shooting [iBeam] ....................................................................................................................................25830
Paper Advance Section .......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the paper advance unit [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................26610
Removing the processor loading unit [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit .................................................................................................................... 26710
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [LASER] .....................................................................................26710
iBeam unit .............................................................................................................................. 26720
Replacing and adjusting the position of the iBeam unit [iBeam] .........................................................................26720
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................26810
Space dimension between units ............................................................................................ 26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [LASER] ..................................26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [iBeam] .....................................26920
Conveyor unit section ............................................................................................................. 27100
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................27100
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................27110
Replacing the print conveyor unit belt [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................27120
Dryer section .......................................................................................................................... 27220
Removing the dryer rack [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................27220
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................27225
Removing the dryer heater and dryer fan [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................27250
Print sorter unit section .......................................................................................................... 27420
Removing the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................27430
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................27440
Adjusting the chain tension of the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................27450
F replenishment unit [F] ......................................................................................................... 27500
Removing the F replenishment unit [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................27500
Removing the cartridge setting section [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] [LASER, iBeam] .......
27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................27550
vi
Tablet replenishment section [J] ............................................................................................ 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum motor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................27640
Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................27690
Replenishment package unit [SM] ......................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................27830
3. Mode
Password ............................................................................................................................... 30500
Password [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure table .............................................................................................................. 31000
Mode structure table [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................................31000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 31100
Status Display [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................................31100
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................31110
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................32510
iBeam Tuning [iBeam] .........................................................................................................................................32511
iBeam Engine Check [iBeam] ..............................................................................................................................32512
NCE Mode [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................................32513
Brightness of the Edge [LASER] .........................................................................................................................32514
Exposure Adjustment [LASER] ...........................................................................................................................32515
Magazine Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................................32520
Data Initialization [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................33001
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................................33070
vii
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM][J] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode [F] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................................33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................33505
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................33570
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35100
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) [Laser, iBeam] ...................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................................35400
System Version Check [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................35500
Upgrading the system for each control PCB (CPU) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................35600
Operation Information [LASER] ..........................................................................................................................35700
Operation Information [iBeam] ............................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000
Paper sensor adjustment [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction [LASER] .....................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment [LASER] .............................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [LASER] ...........................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................36081
Paper Pressure Operation Correction [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................36090
White Border Width Correction [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................36100
viii
Setting IP address and subnet mask ..................................................................................... 37610
Setting IP address and subnet mask [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................37610
Software ................................................................................................................................. 38000
Installing the system program [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................38000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................4001
Suffix number [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4252
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer ........................................... 4260
Check the connection of the PC and printer [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................4260
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from Temperature control started to Temperature
control completed. [LASER] ..................................................................................................................................4302
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual .............................................. 4390
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [LASER] ..............................................................................................4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual .............................................. 4470
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [iBeam] ................................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [iBeam] .............................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [iBeam] ...................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [iBeam] ................................................................................................................4470
Streaks appears on test prints of iBeam tuning. [iBeam] ........................................................................................4470
Check point for the iBeam Tuning .........................................................................................................................4480
Diagnosis appendix: [F] ............................................................................................................ 4600
Replenishment cartridge setting section troubleshooting flow [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................4620
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs ...............................................................4630
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500
No. 00500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ......................................................................................40500
No. 00501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ............................................................................................40500
No. 00502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ..............................................................40500
No. 00503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ...................................................................................................40500
No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ..................................................................................40500
No. 00507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ........................................................................................................40500
No. 00508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? .................................40500
No. 00518 Set the Dryer Cover. .........................................................................................................................40500
No. 00519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ............................................................................40500
No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. ........................................................................................................................40500
ix
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment ............................................................................ 40600
No. 00600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ..............................................................................................40600
No. 00601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF ...............................................................................................40600
No. 00602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB ..............................................................................................40600
No. 00603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ..........................................................................................40600
No. 00604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ..................................................................................................40600
No. 00605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ...................................................................................................40600
No. 00606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF ....................................................................................................40600
No. 00607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB ..................................................................................................40600
No. 00609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ................................................................................................................40600
No. 00610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### .......................................................................................................40600
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700
No. 00700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ........................................................40700
No. 00701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ....................................................................................40700
No. 00702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ......................................................................................40700
No. 00703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...............40700
No. 00704[SM] Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. 40700
No. 00705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ........................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 40900
No. 00900[F] PSR is running out. ......................................................................................................................40900
No. 00901[F] PSR is empty. ...............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ...................................................................................................40900
No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ..............................................................................................40900
No. 00904[F] Replenish PSR. ............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ...........................................................................................40900
No. 00906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ............................................................................40900
No. 00907[F] Collect the waste solution. ...........................................................................................................40900
No. 00908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. .......
40900
No. 00909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ..........................................................40900
No. 00910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . .................................................40900
No. 00912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. .40900
No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started. .........................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000
No. 01000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A .................................................................41000
No. 01001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B .................................................................41000
No. 01002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A ...........................................41000
No. 01003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ...........................................41000
No. 01004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................41000
No. 01005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ..............................................................................41000
No. - The measurement failed. Measure it again. ...............................................................................................41000
No. 01047 Close printer door. ............................................................................................................................41000
No. 01074 Sensors may be dirty. ........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01093 Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing? ...............................41000
No. 01094 Unit is not attached. ..........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01012-01120 Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual .....................................................41000
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ............................................................................. 41300
x
Attention message: Disk/Media .............................................................................................. 41500
No. 01501-01549 See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .......
41500
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550
No. 01552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ...................................................41550
No. 01555 The calibration plate data is out of range. .........................................................................................41550
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common ....................................................................... 41620
No. 01750 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable may not be
connected. .............................................................................................................................................................41620
No. 01751 There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and PC. The printer
clock was adjusted to match the PC clock. ...........................................................................................................41620
No. 01752 Printer is not ready. One moment please. . . ...................................................................................41620
No. 01753 Printer is not ready. Start the printer. ..............................................................................................41620
No. 01754 Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application. ........................41620
No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. Install the profile data that matches from the profile data CD.
41620
No. 01757 Execute the startup checks. ...............................................................................................................41620
41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................... 41800
No. 01801 Execute software upgrade. ................................................................................................................41800
No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software. .......................................................41800
No. 01805 The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software. .......................................................41800
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. .................................................................................................................................................................41821
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 01920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .......................................41900
No. - Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. ...................................................................................................................41900
No. - Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print. .......................................................................................41900
No. - Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. .....................................................................................41900
No. - Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass
surface or test print and measure again. ................................................................................................................41900
Attention message: Edit ......................................................................................................... 43370
43370
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4231 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. ....................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage) .... 44350
No. 4350-4360 For corrective action of the attention message, see the Bravo II Service Manual/d-Storage/ CD-R
external writing system Service Manual. ..............................................................................................................44350
xi
Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500
No. 05500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1 .................................................45500
No. 05501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2 .................................................45500
No. 05502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS .................................................45500
No. 05503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. .............................................................................45500
No. 05504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1 ..........................................45500
No. 05507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .....................................................................45500
No. 05508 The processing solution level is too low. ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05509 The circulation amount has decreased. .............................................................................................45500
No. 05510 Processor A/D conversion error. .......................................................................................................45500
No. 05511 The circulation pump has stopped. P1 ..............................................................................................45500
No. 05513 The circulation pump has stopped. P2 ..............................................................................................45500
No. 05515 The circulation pump has stopped. PS1 ............................................................................................45500
No. 05519 Thermosensor error. P1 .....................................................................................................................45500
No. 05522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ...............................................................................................................45500
No. 05524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W .............................................................................................45500
No. 05525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W .............................................................................................45500
No. 05526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .........................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 .................................................................................................................. 45530
No. 05530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ....................................................................................................45530
No. 05532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ..............................................................45530
No. 05533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .....................................................................................45530
No. 05534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .....................................................................................45530
No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor ...........................................................................................................45530
No. 05543 The dryer cover is removed. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ...................................................................................................................45530
No. 05546 Print Sensor error. .............................................................................................................................45530
No. 05547 Print Sensor (Right) error. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ..................................................................45530
No. 05550 Drive Motor has stopped. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 05552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. .........................................................................................45530
xii
Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600
No. 05600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD .................................................................................................45600
No. 05601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ..................................................................................................45600
No. 05602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ...............................................................................................45600
No. 05603[J] A tablet has jammed. ....................................................................................................................45600
No. 05609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ..................................................................45600
No. 05610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ...................................................................45600
No. 05611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB .................................................................45600
No. 05612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. ...........................................................................45600
No. 05613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 .........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700
No. 05700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ...........................................................................45700
No. 05701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ...........................................................................45700
No. 05702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ...........................................................................45700
No. 05703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ..........................................................................45700
No. 05704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ............................................................................45700
No. 05705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ............................................................................45700
No. 05706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ..............................................................................45700
No. 05708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ...................................................................45700
No. 05709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ...................................................................45700
No. 05710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ....................................................................................45700
No. 05711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .....................................................................................45700
No. 05712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .................................................................................45700
xiii
Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900
No. 05900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ......................................................................45900
No. 05901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R ..........................................................................45900
No. 05902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA .......................................................................45900
No. 05903F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB .........................................................................45900
No. 05904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR ..........................................................................45900
No. 05905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. ..
45900
No. 05906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
45900
No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ......................................................................................45900
No. 05909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R .........................................45900
No. 05910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ......................................................45900
No. 05911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB .......................................................45900
No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ............................................................................45900
No. 05913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ...............................................................................45900
No. 05914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ......................................................................................45900
No. 05916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ...............................45900
No. 05917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ...............................45900
No. 05918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 .............................45900
No. 05922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ................................................................................................45900
No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ................................................................................45900
xiv
Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46000
No. 06012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................................46000
No. 06013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................................46000
No. 06014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ........................................................................................46000
No. 06015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ........................................................................................46000
No. 06016 Paper Cutter operation error. ............................................................................................................46000
No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46000
No. 06075 G Laser control error. ........................................................................................................................46000
No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 06077 Interlock error. ..................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer ................................................................................................................46000
No. 06082 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06087 Laser Control PCB system error. ......................................................................................................46000
No. 06101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ...................................................................................................46000
No. 06104 Printer Door is open. .........................................................................................................................46000
No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. ......................................................................................................46000
No. 06107 R Laser temperature is out of range. .................................................................................................46000
No. 06135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ..............................................................................................................46000
No. 06136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ........................................................46000
No. 06137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. ........................................................46000
No. 06144 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. .................................................................46000
No. 06145 Lane Select Motor operation error. ...................................................................................................46000
No. 06146 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. .....................................................................................46000
No. 06147 Turn Motor operation error. ..............................................................................................................46000
No. 06148 Paper End Sensor A error. ................................................................................................................46000
No. 06149 Paper End Sensor B error. .................................................................................................................46000
No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ......................................................................................46000
No. 06153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ....................................................................................46000
xv
Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46100
No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06156 Exposure End Sensor error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 06173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .....................................................46100
No. 06177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ............................................................................................46100
No. 06179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 06182 iBeam Unit control error. ..................................................................................................................46100
No. 06183 iBeam Control PCB control error. ....................................................................................................46100
No. 06184 iBeam Control PCB system error. ....................................................................................................46100
No. 06185 Roller Move Motor operation error. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06187 Setup calculation error. .....................................................................................................................46100
No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error. ......................................................................................................46100
No. 06198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06203 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 06204 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 06205 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ....................................................................................46100
No. 06209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ...........................................................................46100
No. 06210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. ..........................................................................................46100
No. 06211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. .................................................................................46100
No. 06217 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B2 ...........................................................................................46100
No. 06218 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B2 ......................................................................................46100
No. 06219 Paper End Sensor B2 error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 06220 B Laser temperature is out of range. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06226 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ........................................................................................46100
No. 06227 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................................46100
No. 06232 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B2 ...........................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner ........................................................................................................ 46300
No. 06303-06337 For corrective actions, see the Scanner Service Manual. ......................................................46300
Error message: Film carrier .................................................................................................... 46400
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 06551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ......................................................................................46550
No. 06554 Calibration Plate advance error. ........................................................................................................46550
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing .................................................. 46620
No. 06621-06803 For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual ....................................................46620
No. 06680 Network communication error. .........................................................................................................46620
No. 06681 Network communication error. .........................................................................................................46620
Error message: Main .............................................................................................................. 46900
No. 06901 ARCNET communication error. .......................................................................................................46900
No. 06903 Serial communication error. .............................................................................................................46900
No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ...................................................................................................46900
No. 06921 PCB error. .........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB ........................................................................................46900
xvi
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
Error message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage) ....... 49350
No. 9350-9381 For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-Storage/ CD-R
external writing system Service Manual. ..............................................................................................................49350
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module .............................................................. 49450
No. 10000-010401 See the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..................49450
Attention message: Setting module/Main controller ............................................................... 49500
5. Operation sequence
Starting/ Closing sequence .................................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................50520
Dataflow ................................................................................................................................. 50700
Data flow in printing [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................................50700
Data flow [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................................................50710
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................................55000
Printer paper advance operation ............................................................................................ 55100
Paper loading operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................55100
Paper loading operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................55210
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam] 55300
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................55310
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................55400
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [LP7200/3502 PLUS] ..............................................................55420
Paper rewind operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................55500
Paper splicing processing operation [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................55600
Paper end processing operation [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................55700
Fogged paper operation [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................55800
iBeam Tuning operation ......................................................................................................... 55900
iBeam Tuning test print operation [iBeam] ..........................................................................................................55900
iBeam Tuning operation [iBeam] .........................................................................................................................55910
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................56100
Processor paper advance operation (setup print) [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................56200
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped system] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................56300
Print conveyor unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................56400
Print sorter unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................56500
xvii
Colorimeter unit operation ...................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................56600
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................56620
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ................................................................................. 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation [F] [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................................57020
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ............................................................................. 60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 61000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................61000
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................61050
Paper supply unit A/B (position of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................61200
Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2 (positions of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ......................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER] ..............................................61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [iBeam] ................................................61310
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................61400
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER] .......................................................................61450
Position of PCBs (processor section) ..................................................................................... 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................63200
Control strip auto loading unit (position of PCBs and electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ...................................63250
Communication unit (position of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................63260
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................... 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................63310
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................63312
Processor section (fan operation specification) ..................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................63321
Positions of PCBs and electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ......... 63510
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [LASER,
iBeam] ...................................................................................................................................................................63510
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................63520
xviii
Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 64101
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................64101
Capacity booster PCB (J391451) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................64102
Operation key PCB (J391400) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................64110
Printer control PCB (J391434) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................64140
Laser control PCB (J391435) [LASER] ...............................................................................................................64150
iBeam Control PCB (J391409) [iBeam] ...............................................................................................................64151
Dual magazine PCB (J391184) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................64190
Triple magazine PCB (J391399) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................64200
G laser driver (J391231) [LASER] .......................................................................................................................64210
G-AOM driver (Z025645) [LASER] ....................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J391182) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................................64240
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section) .................................................................. 64250
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section) [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................64250
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) .............................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB (J391437) [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................66200
Processor relay PCB (J391339) [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................66220
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................66400
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391378) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................66600
Control strip drive PCB (J391422) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................66710
Control strip communication PCB (J391404) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................66720
Infrared communication unit [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................................66730
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................66740
Cables .................................................................................................................................... 68100
Precautions in handling the cables [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................68100
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [LASER, iBeam] ............................................68550
7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................70010
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ..................................................................................................... 80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts [LASER, iBeam] ......................................80110
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................80310
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000
Wiring diagram table [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................89000
xix
xx
1000
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

Description of warnings (signal words) .............................................................................................................10010
1 Cautions for Work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ........................................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
1000 1/1
10010
Description of warning (signal words)
Description of warning (signal words)
Description of warnings (signal words)
• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the system that poses the indicated danger. Ignoring a warning may cause death or
serious injury, or system malfunction. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals and on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information on avoiding the danger.
• Carefully read and understand the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the system.
This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.
Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)
Symbol (warning indication)
Warning text (warning

indication)
SIGNALWORD
10010 1/1
10020
Location of warning labels
The following shows the locations, types of warning labels and the part numbers on this product. Follow the instructions on the labels
carefully in order to operate the product safely and avoid accidents. Do not peel the labels off. If a label becomes illegible or comes off
completely, contact your place of purchase for replacement label using the part number shown.
Though the system appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.

Only J specification Normal, SM and J specifications
17
9 14
4 3 12
2
19
10
16
*2
14
12*2
8 15
3
13 4
1
1 20
3
6 4
5
1*1 11*3
12 19
F specification
14
9
18
3
4
1 1 15
G087785
*1. Only for single magazine specification
*2. Only for systems equipped with the triple magazine unit (option)
*3. Only for the QSS-3502 PLUS and LP7200
10020 1/4
10020
Optional dual magazine unit

1
G088653
1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01
3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01
5 6
A023031-01 A022587-01
7
A234392-01
10020 2/4
10020
8
A234350-01

9 10
A022536-01 A023473-01
11 12
A515330-01 A227560-01
13
A089901-01
14
A045206-01
15
A063381-01
10020 3/4
10020
16 17
A022509-01 A031010-01

18 A087463-01 19
20
A023358-01
10020 4/4
10030
For safe operation
For safe operation
For safe operation
! General precautions

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure to turn off the power supply.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, the work such as mechanical operation
check requires particular attention.
IMPORTANT
• Ground wires and FG clamps are connected to the covers, units, PCBs, power supply, and cables provided with this
system.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires and FG clamps as they were.
• For the ground wire with the lock washer, be sure to attach the lock washer to its original position.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
NOTE
• The grounds positions are shown in the illustrations below as wiring diagrams.
G057008
! Precautions for processing solutions
• This system uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
10030 1/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions against electric shock
• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the system, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the system.

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.
! Precautions for operating rotary section
• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove covers other than those specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any operation.
Keep away your hands from the system during operation.
If your hands are caught and you cannot move, ask someone to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
! Precautions for operating heating section
• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. become very hot.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning off the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work states. Turn off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with running water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
10030 2/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions for movable units
• Hands can be caught by the opening and closing of covers and doors or by movable units.
Hold covers and doors firmly when opening or closing them.

When manually moving a unit, only hold the specified parts.
Turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply when working with or around a unit that moves automatically.
Immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker if your hand is caught and you cannot move.
! Precautions around cutting parts
• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts (paper cutters and the like).
Do not remove the covers from cutting parts. Keep your hands away from cutting parts.
When working near cutting parts, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.
• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts.

When replacing a cutting part, do not touch the edge.
10030 3/3
10040
For safe operation
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electrical parts
Static electricity from your body may damage electronic components such as PCBs, if you touch them when charged.
When handling electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools as below to prevent parts from being damaged by static electricity.

In addition, use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital units or engines.
Static-dissipative tools
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing electronic parts from the system.
This kit consists of four items: Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist Strap, Ground
Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use these to prevent oil from your hands adhering when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking electronic parts.
• When using the static-dissipative tools, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more before carrying out the operation.
10040 1/1
10050
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
NOTE
• The system of LP7000/QSS-3501i series is not equipped with laser engine.

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels
Labels containing laser precautions are affixed to this system.
Do not remove these labels.
2 3
5
G087990
1 2
3 4
5 QSS-3501 PLUS/3502 PLUS series LP7100 / 7200
10050 1/2
10050
For safe operation

10050 2/2
2000
System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005

Model list [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................. 20020
Removing covers (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................20021
Adjusting belt tension .......................................................................................................... 20110
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting the belt tension (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (Colorimeter) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (Processor section, dryer section and conveyor section) [LASER, iBeam] ............20140
Table unit ............................................................................................................................. 21170
Opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................21170
Removing the engine cover [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................21180
Precautions for opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................21190
Magazine section ................................................................................................................. 22000
Checking the magazine [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ............................................................................................................. 25610
Removing paper supply unit A [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................25610
Removing and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit [LASER, iBeam] .................................................25620
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................25630
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................25640
Dual magazine unit .............................................................................................................. 25710
Removing paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and the position of paper magazine mount B [LASER, iBeam] ......................................25720
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................25730
Triple magazine unit ............................................................................................................ 25750
Removing paper supply unit B2 [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................25750
Removing the connecting unit [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................25755
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................25760
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B2 [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................25765
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B) [LASER, iBeam] ...............................25770
Adjusting the paper zigzagging of paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B2) [LASER, iBeam] ............................25775
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................25810
Banding shooting [LASER] ...............................................................................................................................25820
Banding shooting [iBeam] .................................................................................................................................25830
Paper Advance Section ....................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the paper advance unit [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................26610
Removing the processor loading unit [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit ................................................................................................................. 26710
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [LASER] ..................................................................................26710
iBeam unit ............................................................................................................................ 26720
Replacing and adjusting the position of the iBeam unit [iBeam] ......................................................................26720
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................26810
2000 1/2
2000
Space dimension between units .......................................................................................... 26910

Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [LASER] ...............................26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [iBeam] .................................26920
Conveyor unit section .......................................................................................................... 27100
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................27100
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................27110
Replacing the print conveyor unit belt [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................27120
Dryer section ....................................................................................................................... 27220
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing the dryer rack [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................................27220
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................27225
Removing the dryer heater and dryer fan [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................27250
Print sorter unit section ........................................................................................................ 27420
Removing the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................27430
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................27440
Adjusting the chain tension of the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................27450
F replenishment unit [F] ....................................................................................................... 27500
Removing the F replenishment unit [F] [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................27500
Removing the cartridge setting section [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] [LASER, iBeam] ....
27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................27550
Tablet replenishment section [J] .......................................................................................... 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum motor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................27640
Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................27690
Replenishment package unit [SM] ....................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................27830
2000 2/2
20005
System list
System list
Model list [LASER, iBeam]
*1. In the Service Manual, some sections describe as (LASER, iBeam).

System name is expressed by the name shown in Remarks 2 in service manual. (Some files are not always applicable.)
*2. For F specification, Auto cleaning is a standard setup.
Model Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar

Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
QSS-3501 PLUS F LS-600 • Equipped with Auto Setup function, LASER
Normal Automatic Water Refilling and Auto

SM cleaning as standard.
• Processing the image with PC.
J
• Paper advance unit (only for one-
lane advance: common for 3501
PLUS and 3501i PLUS)
• For QSS-3501 PLUS, print sorter
unit is optional.
• Scanner is selectable part.
QSS Printer
LS-600
LS-1100 LH-1800
QSS-3502 PLUS • Capacity booster E is necessary.

• Equipped with Auto Setup function,
Automatic Water Refilling and Auto
cleaning as standard.
• Paper advance unit (only for two-
lane advance)
• For QSS-3502 PLUS, print sorter
unit is included as standard.
LS-600
LS-1100 LH-1800
QSS-3501i PLUS • Auto Setup function, Automatic iBeam

Water Refilling and Auto cleaning
are optional.*2
lane advance)
• iBeam engine loading
• Paper supply unit A and exposure
advance unit are only for iBeam.
lane advance: common for 3501
PLUS and 3501i PLUS)
• For QSS-3501i PLUS, print sorter
unit is optional.
LS-600
LS-1100 LH-1800
20005 1/2
20005
System list
Model Process Illustration System Remarks 1 Remar

Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
LP7100 F • Equipped with Auto Setup function, Automatic LASER
Water Refilling and Auto cleaning as standard.
• Paper advance unit (only for one-lane advance:
common for LP7000 and LP7100)
• For LP7100, print sorter unit is optional.

FRONTIER
Printer
LP7200 • Capacity booster E is necessary.

• Equipped with Auto Setup function, Automatic
Water Refilling and Auto cleaning as standard.
• Paper advance unit (only for two-lane advance)
• For LP7200, print sorter unit is included as
standard.
LP7000 • Equipped with Auto Setup function, Automatic iBeam

Water Refilling and Auto cleaning as standard*2.
• Paper advance unit (only for one-lane advance)
• iBeam engine loading
• Paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit
are only for iBeam.
• Paper advance unit (only for one-lane advance:
common for LP7000 and LP7100)
• For LP7000, print sorter unit is optional.
20005 2/2
20020
Removing covers
Removing covers
Removing covers (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam]
! Printer section
The number in the parentheses represents the number of screws for covers.
PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.)

Printer rear cover (15 pcs.) PCB cover 2 (3 pcs.)
Guide (2 pcs.)
G085171
• To remove PCB cover 1, remove the guide.

• To remove PCB cover 2, remove the guide and PCB cover 1.
! Triple magazine unit

Triple magazine unit rear cover (12)
G085078
20020 1/1
20021
Removing covers
Removing covers (Processor section) [LASER, iBeam]
! Processor section
N, SM specifications
Sub-tank top cover PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.) Processor rear cover (9 pcs.)

Processor cover 1 (4 pcs.)
F specification

PCB cover 2 (2 pcs.)
J specification

G085158
20021 1/2
20021
Removing covers
[F], [N], [SM] and [J] specifications
Processor side cover 1 (11 pcs.) Dryer cover (1 pc.) Air duct (1 pc.)

Processor side cover 2 (2 pcs.)
G085888
! Tablet replenishment section

Tablet replenishment unit section cover 1 (4

pcs.)
Tablet replenishment unit section cover 2 (7

pcs.)
G084432
20021 2/2
20110
Adjusting belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension (Printer section) [LASER, iBeam]
Reference
☞ Paper supply unit A, B (LASER and iBeam) ☞ Exposure advance unit (LASER)
☞ Exposure advance unit (iBeam) ☞ Paper advance unit (LASER and iBeam)
! Paper supply unit A, B (LASER and iBeam)

Paper supply unit B Paper supply unit A
2 3
4,5
G083240
Paper supply unit A, B (LASER and iBeam)

No. Name Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper supply motor B belt 1 mm 190±35 g Paper Supply Motor B
(1.9±0.3 N)
2 Paper advance motor 1 belt 1 mm 220±30 g Paper advance motor 1

(2.2±0.3 N)
20110 1/7
20110

3 Paper advance motor 2 belt 1 mm 164±26 g Paper advance motor 2
(1.6±0.3 N)
(LASER)
197±24 g
(1.9±0.2 N)
(iBeam)

4 Arm move motor (left) belt 4.5 mm 127±21 g Arm move motor (left)
5 Arm move motor (right) belt (1.2±0.2 N) Arm move motor (right)
! Triple magazine unit (connecting unit, paper supply unit B2) (LASER, iBeam)
1
3
G085146
Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2 (LASER and iBeam)

1 Guide roller motor belt 1 mm From 180 to 220 g Guide roller motor
(1.8 to 2.2 N)
20110 2/7
20110

2 Paper supply motor B belt 1 mm From 180 to 220 g Paper Supply Motor B
(1.8 to 2.2 N)

! Exposure advance unit (LASER)
1 3
G083239
Exposure advance unit (LASER)

No. Name Belt width Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
1 Exposure advance motor 1 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 220±30 g Exposure advance
belt (2.2±0.3 N) motor 1
2 Pressure change motor 1 belt 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 194±20 g Pressure change motor
(1.9±0.2 N) 1
3 Exposure advance drive belt 10.0 mm 1.0 mm 1100±50 g Exposure advance

(10.8±0.5 N) motor 1
20110 3/7
20110

4 Exposure advance motor 2 10.0 mm 2.0 mm 950±50 g Tension pulley
belt (9.3±0.5 N)

(2.5±0.3 N) 2
! Exposure advance unit (iBeam)
G085202
Exposure advance unit (iBeam)

belt (2.2±0.2 N) motor 1
(2.5±0.4 N) 1
20110 4/7
20110

3 Exposure advance drive belt 10.0 mm 1.0 mm 700±50 g Idle pulley
(6.9±0.5 N)
(3.0±0.5 N) 2

belt (7±0.5 N) motor 2
! Paper advance unit (LASER and iBeam)
5 6
1
3
G083241
20110 5/7
20110
Paper advance unit (LASER and iBeam)

1 Paper advance motor 3 belt 6.0 mm 1.0 mm From 100 to 150 g Paper advance motor
(From 1.0 to 1.5 3
N)

2 Pressure change motor belt 5.0 mm 4.0 mm From 80 to 130 g Paper advance
(From 0.8 to 1.3 pressure change
N) motor
3 Turn motor belt 5.0 mm 2.0 mm From 130 to 200 g Turn motor
(From 1.3 to 2.0
N)
4 Lane select motor belt 4.0 mm 5.0 mm From 50 to 70 g Lane select motor
(From 0.5 to 0.7
N)
(LP7200/3502
PLUS)
20110 6/7
20110

5 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm From 560 to 630 g Paper advance arm
(left) belt (From 5.6 to 6.3 motor
N)
(LP7200/3502
PLUS)
6.0 mm 5.0 mm From 140 to 190 g
(From 1.4 to 1.9
N)
(LP7000,

LP7100/3501i
PLUS, 3501
PLUS)
6 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm From 560 to 630 g Tension plate (right)
(right) belt (From 5.6 to 6.3
N)
(LP7200/3502
PLUS)
6.0 mm 5.0 mm From 140 to 190 g
(From 1.4 to 1.9
N)
(LP7000,
LP7100/3501i
PLUS, 3501
PLUS)
20110 7/7
20125
Adjusting the belt tension (Colorimeter) [LASER, iBeam]
1
2

G085125
Colorimeter
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper advance motor belt 1 From 250 g to 300 g 2.0 mm Attaching position of the
(From 2.4 N to 3.0 N) tension pulley
2 Paper advance motor belt 2 From 340 g to 400 g 2.0 mm Attaching position of the
(From 3.3 N to 4.0 N) calibration plate advance
motor
20125 1/1
20140
Adjusting the belt tension (Processor section, dryer section and conveyor
section) [LASER, iBeam]

6 5
3
1, 2
4
G083194
NOTE
• For adjustment, refer to the reference listed in the following table.
Reference
No. Name Reference
1 Replacing the print conveyor unit belt [LASER, iBeam] ☞ 27120
4 Adjusting the chain tension of the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam] ☞ 27450
− Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] [LASER, iBeam] ☞ 27650
Adjusting each belt tension

2 Conveyor drive belt 100 to 150 g 2.5 mm Position of tension pulley
0.98 to 1.47N
20140 1/2
20140

3 Sorter drive belt 330±10 g 2.5 mm Position of sorter motor
(3.2±0.1 N) holder
5 Paper advance motor belt From 265 to 296 g 1.6 mm Position of drive motor
(2.6 to 2.9 N)

Adjusting each belt tension
No. Name Adjusting point
6 Adjusting the position of the dryer rack It is automatically tensed. No adjustment is needed.
20140 2/2
21170
Table unit
Table unit
Opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam]
For details about the precautions for opening/closing the table unit, see ☞ 21190.
! Procedure
1. Remove the scanner unit.

2. Remove the PC, display monitor, keyboard, operation keyboard, mouse and the MD-2 from the table.
3. Remove engine cover screws.

IMPORTANT
• Confirm that there is no one behind the system before opening the table unit.
Table unit
G085065
4. Open the table unit, raise the stopper and attach it to the table unit for support.
IMPORTANT
• Do not open the table unit further than is necessary. If the unit is opened nearly perpendicular, there is a danger
of it falling backwards.
Table unit
Stopper
G085066
21170 1/1
21180
Table unit
Removing the engine cover [LASER, iBeam]
For details about removing the engine cover, see ☞ 21190.
! Procedure
1. Remove the scanner unit.

2. Remove the display monitor, keyboard, operation keyboard, mouse, MD-2, monitor table and display
module from table.

3. Remove engine cover screws.
G085065
4. Remove the table.

Slide the table back to lift it.
Loosen the screw. Loosen the screw.
G088063
5. Remove the PC.

6. Remove the control box cover.
Control box cover
G085140
21180 1/2
21180
Table unit
7. Disconnect the connector(s).

• J/P430, 436 (Relay connector)
J/P430, J/P436

G085128
8. Loosen the screws of the engine cover. (two places)

Pull the table to lift it up.
G085141
21180 2/2
21190
Table unit
Precautions for opening and closing the table unit [LASER, iBeam]
The required back space of the system Item Reference

From 90 mm to 179 mm or less Removing the engine cover ☞ 21180
*1
From 180 mm to 204 mm or less Removing the table and mounting plate of the table -
205 mm or more Opening the table unit. ☞ 21170
*1. Remove two mounting plates in the back of the printer.

Table mounting plate
G085128
! Precautions when opening and closing the table unit
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when handling the table unit since it is very heavy.
• The printer becomes unstable if the table unit is opened. Be sure not to open the table unit when the jack bolts do not
touch the ground.
• If the table unit is opened fully, the cables between units may get damaged or the unit may get fallen backward.
• Confirm that there is no one behind the system before opening the table unit.
! The required back space of the system

Position of the table Image The required back space of the system
When the table is When the table and When the engine
attached table mounting cover is removed
plate are
removed*1
Table mounting plate is Table 205 mm 180 mm 90 mm
the standard position
Lift the table mounting 250 mm 180 mm 90 mm

plate 50 mm from the
standard position

standard position
21190 1/2
21190
Table unit
Position of the table Image The required back space of the system
When the table is When the table and When the engine
attached table mounting cover is removed
plate are
removed*1
standard position

standard position
*1. Remove two mounting plates in the back of the printer.
21190 2/2
22000
Magazine section
Magazine section
Checking the magazine [LASER, iBeam]
Items to confirm
Paper magazine Check that paper roll is straight.
Check that paper guides are attached securely.
! Procedure
1. Check that the width regulation guide and the roller guide are securely attached.

IMPORTANT
• For the paper width of 117 mm and 127 mm, set the width regulation guide inside the groove. For 120 mm and
130 mm, set it outside the groove.
Width regulation guides
Roller guides
G059817
Position of the width regulation guide for each paper width
* shows a width unused.
G074538
22000 1/2
22000
Magazine section
2. Check that the paper guides are securely attached.

Paper guides

Screws
G074539
Groove Paper width

A Unused
B 210 mm (iBeam is not supported.)
C 203 mm
D Unused
E 178 mm
F Unused
G 165 mm
H Unused
I 152 mm
J Unused
K 130 mm
L 127 mm
M Unused
N 120 mm
O 117 mm
P 114 mm
Q Unused
R 102 mm
S Unused
T 89 mm
U 82.5 mm
22000 2/2
25610
Paper supply unit A
Paper supply unit A
Removing paper supply unit A [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Paper supply unit A
G074446
! Adjustment after reattaching

When the original paper supply unit A is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.
When the new paper supply unit A is attached

1. Perform paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Carry out the paper advance length correction.
☞ 36050
3. Check the right angle adjustment of the paper cutter unit.
☞ 25620
4. Confirm the zigzag adjustment for paper supply unit B or paper supply unit B2.
Paper magazine Item Reference
Dual magazine • Confirm the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B. ☞ 25730
Triple magazine • Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B) for paper supply unit ☞ 25770
B2.
• Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B2) for paper supply unit ☞ 25755
B2.
5. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B and B2.
6. Check the paper hold timing adjustment of the arm.
☞ 25630
7. If the CVP unit is to be attached, replace paper advance unit A and carry out the CVP imprint pressure
adjustment.
☞ 25640
25610 1/1
25620
Paper supply unit A
Removing and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Removing the cutter unit
1. Pull out paper supply unit A.

• J/P422 (Cut motor)
• J/P424 (Cut home sensor)

• J/P425 (Cut end sensor)
J/P424 J/P425
Bottom view of paper supply unit A
J/P422
G084908
3. Remove the loading sensor. (two screws).

IMPORTANT
• When replacing the loading sensor, in order to remove the wiring of loading sensor, it is necessary to cut the
mini band.
Loading sensor
Mini band
G078404
25620 1/3
25620
Paper supply unit A
4. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws).

" Point
When removing the cutter unit, be careful not to remove the positioning plate for the cutter unit. If the positioning plate is
removed, right angle adjustment of the cutter unit must be carried out again.
Cutter unit

Positioning plate
Loading sensor unit
G078405
! Precautions when reattaching

• When attaching the cutter unit, tighten the screws by pushing them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
• Check that the paper has been cut vertically. If not, carry out the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit.
! The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit
1. Loosen two screws for each cutter unit and positioning plate to adjust the right angle of the cutter unit.
Loosen these screws.
Positioning plate
Loosen these
screws.
G057512
25620 2/3
25620
Paper supply unit A
" Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by matching up with cut edges as shown illustration below.
Second one
A B
Paper
advance
direction

First one
G051111
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in the direction indicated by the
arrow A as shown in the previous figure.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B adjust the cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in the direction indicated by the
arrow B as shown in the previous figure.
25620 3/3
25630
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

2. Remove the mounting plate of the paper hold motor. (Loosen one of the two screws.)
Paper hold motor
Arm

Screw
Loosen the Paper hold motor mounting Paper hold sensor

screw. plate
G057638
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper hold motor.
(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated by arrow.
View from this side.
G074454
(2) Rotate the detecting plate using a hexagonal screwdriver to the right so that the bulge of the cam faces below.
NOTE
• Set-screws (A) and (B) need not be loosened. If it is loosened, attach it as it was.
• Set-screws (A) and (B) fix the cam to the paper hold motor.
25630 1/2
25630
Paper supply unit A
(3) Adjust the position of the detection plate so that the plate protrudes from the paper hold sensor by 1.8±0.5 mm.
(Loosen two set-screws.)
Cam Detection
plate
Paper hold motor
Set-screw (B) Detection plate Hexagonal screwdriver
View from this side.

Set-screw (A) Set-screws of the Paper hold sensor
Cam detection plate
Paper hold sensor 1.8±0.2 mm
Viewed from the arrow
G084909
(4) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold motor. (Two set-screws)
4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output check to check that the pressure pin is align with the guide
when the paper hold sensor is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
Guide
0.0 mm
Pressure pin
Paper hold motor
G074455
25630 2/2
25640
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

2. Loosen the two screws fixing the CVP unit.

CVP unit
G074452
3. Set the head adjustment jig to the guide of paper supply unit A.
IMPORTANT
• The head adjusting jig is a service personnel tool. See the Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
4. Loosen two lock nuts and turn two adjusting screws so that the thickness of the attaching position of the
CVP unit is the same as that of the head adjustment jig.
Head adjusting jig
Lock nuts
Adjusting screws
G074453
5. Tighten the two CVP unit screws.

6. Make actual prints, then check the printing density of the CVP unit.
25640 1/1
25710
Dual magazine unit
Dual magazine unit
Removing paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure for removing paper supply unit B
1. Remove the PCB cover. (Loosen two screws.)

• J/P281 (Paper supply motor A)
• J/P282 (Paper supply motor B)

• J/P279 (Paper end sensor B)
J/P281, J/P282, J/P289
PCB cover
G084595
3. Remove two screws from mounting angle bracket 1.

Mounting angle bracket 2
G084596
25710 1/4
25710
Dual magazine unit
4. Remove screw(s) from paper supply unit B. (Loosen two of the four screws.)
Paper supply unit B

G084597
When reattaching the original paper supply unit B

1. Attach paper supply unit B while pushing it in the arrow direction. (six screws)
Paper supply unit B
G084598
25710 2/4
25710
Dual magazine unit
When attaching new paper supply unit B

1. Temporarily tighten mounting angle bracket 2 and mounting angle bracket 1. (two screws).
2. Attach paper supply unit B while pushing it in the arrow direction. (two screws).

G084599
3. Loosen screw B. Press the angle bracket against the direction of the arrow and fix screws A and B. (four
screws)
Screws B Mounting angle bracket 2
Screws A
G084600
25710 3/4
25710
Dual magazine unit
4. Attach mounting angle bracket 2 by pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrows 1 and 2. (five
screws).

Mounting angle
bracket 2
G074547
25710 4/4
25720
Dual magazine unit
Adjusting the height and the position of paper magazine mount B [LASER,
iBeam]
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the height and position of paper magazine mount B if paper magazine B is not inserted to paper supply unit B
smoothly.
• Check if paper magazine mount B is set to the positioning pin of paper supply unit B smoothly.
Positioning pin

G074552
! Adjusting the position of the paper magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws of the magazine slide frame. (four screws)

Magazine slide frame
G074553
2. After returning paper magazine mount B to the original position, change its position and set the
magazine. And continue working to confirm the storage condition to adjust them. (Two adjusting screws)
3. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide frame. (four screws)
4. Check the detection status of magazine sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210
If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the position of paper magazine code sensor B. ☞ Adjusting the position of paper
magazine code sensor B
5. After the adjustment, check that the paper does not zigzag.
☞ 25730
25720 1/4
25720
Dual magazine unit
! Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws fixing magazine slide rails 1 and 2. (three screws each)
Loosen the screw.
Magazine slide rail 1

Magazine slide rail 2
G059255
25720 2/4
25720
Dual magazine unit
2. Change the height of paper magazine mount B and set the magazine. And continue the confirmation
work of storage condition to adjust them. (Two adjusting screws each left and right)
Adjusting screws

Adjusting screws
G059256
3. After the height adjustment, loosen six screws of the magazine slide rail.
Adjust the position continuously.
☞ 25730
25720 3/4
25720
Dual magazine unit
! Adjusting the position of paper magazine code sensor B
1. Loosen four screws of paper magazine sensor B, and adjust holders 1 and 2 so that the magazine code
can be detected with paper magazine B inserted.
Holder 1
Holder 2

Paper magazine code sensor B
G059258
25720 4/4
25730
Dual magazine unit
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit B, make a test print using the maximum size of paper which is in
use.
1. Make a test print from magazine B in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard. Check that the difference between lines A on the first and
second test prints is within 0.5 mm.
Example: If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Example: If the first test print is misaligned in the left.
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
A
A
A
Paper advance direction Paper advance

direction
3. If difference between lines A on first test print and second test print is not within 0.5 mm, carry out
zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B.
4. Loosen the screws for the positioning pin of paper supply unit B, and adjust the pin. (Loosen two fixing
screws.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin leftward.
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin rightward.
25730 1/2
25730
Dual magazine unit
Positioning pin
Right
Left

Loosen the fixing screws.
G074554
5. After the adjustment of the positioning pin, check that the positioning pin goes into the positioning hole
of the magazine B smoothly when the magazine is taken in and out.
6. If the positioning pin does not go into the positioning hole smoothly, adjust the position of magazine B to
the right and left.
☞ 25720
7. Test prints are made in the maximum paper size via the paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of paper supply unit B, repeat Step 7 via Step 4.
9. Carry out the zigzagging adjustment for each magazine of paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
25730 2/2
25750
Triple magazine unit
Removing paper supply unit B2 [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure for removing paper supply unit B2
1. Remove the triple magazine upper cover. (Loosen four screws.)

G085100
2. Remove the triple magazine upper internal cover. (four mounting nuts)
G085101

• J/P331 (Paper supply motor B)
• J/P352 (Paper end sensor B, paper end sensor B2)
• J/P378 (Paper supply motor B2)
25750 1/4
25750
4. Remove the light-tight cover. (Loosen one of the three screws)

J/P331, J/P352, J/P378

Light-tight cover
G085102
5. Remove paper supply unit B2 in the arrow direction. (eight screws)

Remove paper supply unit B2 from the upper hole of triple magazine unit.
Paper supply unit B2
G085103
25750 2/4
25750
IMPORTANT
• Remove paper supply unit B2 so that the paper end sensor B does not contact with the paper supply unit B2
mount.
Mount

Paper end sensor B
G085105

Attach paper supply unit B2 while pushing it in the arrow direction. (eight screws)
G085104
IMPORTANT
• Remove paper supply unit B2 so that the paper end sensor B does not contact with the paper supply unit B2 mount.

When the original paper supply unit B2 is reattached
25750 3/4
25750
When the new paper supply unit B2 is attached

☞ 36000
2. Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B/magazine B2) for paper supply unit B2.
☞ 25770
☞ 25775
☞ 36060

IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine B, B2.
25750 4/4
25755
Removing the connecting unit [LASER, iBeam]
There are two methods to remove the connecting unit.
☞ When removing paper supply unit B2 ☞ When removing the triple magazine unit
! When removing paper supply unit B2
1. Remove the paper supply unit B2. ☞ 25750

2. Remove the light-tight cover. (two screws).

Light-tight cover
G085106

• J/P356 (Paper supply motor A)
• J/P377 (Guide motor)
4. Remove the connecting unit. (Loosen two of the six screws)
Connecting unit
J/P356, J/P377
G085107
25755 1/3
25755
! When removing the triple magazine unit
1. Remove the PCB protection cover.
Loosen the screw.

G088026

• J/P825, J/P829, J/P833, J/P278 (Triple magazine PCB)
G088027
3. Remove the triple magazine unit. (seven screws)
G085130
25755 2/3
25755
4. Remove the light-tight cover. (two screws)

Light-tight cover

G085108
5. Remove the connecting unit. (Loosen two of the six screws.)
G085109
! Precaution when attaching the connection unit

Attach the connection unit while pushing it to the printer.

When the original paper supply unit B2 is reattached
When the new paper supply unit B2 is attached

☞ 36000
2. Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B/magazine B2) for paper supply unit B2.
☞ 25770
☞ 25775
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine B, B2.
25755 3/3
25760
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B [LASER, iBeam]
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the height and position if paper magazine B is not inserted to paper supply unit B2 smoothly.
• Check if paper magazine mount B is set to the positioning pin of paper supply unit B2 smoothly.
Positioning pin

G085115
! Adjusting the position of the paper magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws of the magazine slide frame. (four screws)

Loosen these screws. Magazine slide frame

G085116
25760 1/3
25760
2. After returning paper magazine mount B to the original position, change its position and set the
magazine. And continue working to confirm the storage condition to adjust them. (Two adjusting screws)

Adjusting screws
G085169
3. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide frame. (four screws)

If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the position of paper magazine code sensor B.
☞ Adjusting the position of paper magazine code sensor B
☞ 25770
! Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws fixing magazine slide rails 1 and 2. (three screws each)
G085117
25760 2/3
25760
2. Change the height of paper magazine mount B and set the magazine. And continue the confirmation
work of storage condition to adjust them. (Two adjusting screws each left and right)
Adjusting screws Adjusting screws

G085118
3. After the height adjustment, loosen six screws of the magazine slide rail.
Adjust the position continuously.
☞ 25730
! Adjusting the position of paper magazine code sensor B
1. Loosen four screws of paper magazine sensor B, and adjust holders 1 and 2 so that the magazine code
can be detected with paper magazine B inserted.
Holder 1
Holder 2
Paper magazine code sensor B
G085119
25760 3/3
25765
Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B2 [LASER, iBeam]
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the height and position if paper magazine B2 is not inserted to paper supply unit B2 smoothly.
• Check if paper magazine mount B2 is set to the positioning pin of paper supply unit B2 smoothly.
Positioning pin

G085110
! Adjusting the height of paper magazine mount B2
G085100
25765 1/4
25765

G085101
3. Pull paper magazine mount B2 and loosen the screws of the magazine slide frame. (eight screws)
Viewed from the top
Bottom view of paper magazine B2
G085111
25765 2/4
25765
4. Adjust the position so that the magazine is inserted to the paper magazine mount B2 smoothly. (four
adjusting screws)

Underside of paper magazine mount B2
G085112
5. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide frame. (eight screws)

6. Confirm the detection status of magazine sensor B2 in input check. ☞ 35210
If magazine B2 is not detected correctly, adjust the position of paper magazine code sensor B2. ☞ Adjusting the position of
paper magazine code sensor B2
☞ 25775
! Adjusting the position of paper magazine code sensor B2
G085100
25765 3/4
25765

G085101
3. Loosen four screws of paper magazine code sensor B2, and adjust holders 1 and 2 so that the
magazine code can be detected when inserting paper magazine B2.
Holder 2
Holder 1
paper magazine code sensor B2
G085113
4. Confirm the detection status of magazine sensor B2 in input check. ☞ 35210
25765 4/4
25770
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B)

[LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit B2, make a test print using the maximum size of paper which is in
use.

1. Make a test print from magazine B in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
A
A
A

direction
4. Loosen the screws for the positioning pin of paper supply unit B, and adjust the pin. (Loosen two fixing
screws.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin leftward.
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin rightward.
25770 1/2
25770
Right
Left
Positioning pin

G085160
of the magazine B smoothly when the magazine is taken in and out.
6. If the positioning pin does not go into the positioning hole smoothly, adjust the position of magazine B to
the right and left.
☞ 25760
7. Test prints are made in the maximum paper size via the paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment, repeat Step 4 to Step 7.
9. Adjust the zigzagging for each magazine.
☞ 36060
25770 2/2
25775
Adjusting the paper zigzagging of paper supply unit B2 (Magazine B2)

[LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit B2, make a test print using the maximum size of paper which is in
use.

1. Make a test print from magazine B2 in Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
A
A
A

direction
4. Loosen the screws for the positioning pin of paper supply unit B2, and adjust the pin. (Loosen two fixing
screws.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin upward.
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin downward.
25775 1/2
25775
Positioning pin

G085114
of the magazine B2 smoothly when the magazine is taken in and out.
6. If the positioning pin does not go into the positioning hole smoothly, adjust the position of magazine B2
to the up and down.
☞ 25765
7. Test prints are made in the maximum paper size via the paper supply unit B2.
☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment, repeat Step 4 to Step 7.
9. Adjust the zigzagging for each magazine.
☞ 36060
25775 2/2
25810
Exposure advance unit
Removing the exposure advance unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove paper supply unit A.

☞ 25610
• J/P399, 400 (Relay connector)

J/P399, J/P400
G083247
3. Open the exposure advance unit.

4. For LASER, move the stopper of the exposure advance unit in the direction of the arrow and fix the unit.
(one screw)
Stopper
G083246
25810 1/2
25810
5. Lift the exposure advance unit to arrow direction holding the part of A and B, and then remove it.
Part A Exposure advance unit

Part B
G083248
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when handling the exposure advance unit since it is very heavy.

• Confirm that the focal plane regulating guide is correctly attached, and install the exposure advance unit.
! Adjusting the attaching position
1. The exposure advance unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
exposure advance unit.
! Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original exposure advance unit is reattached
When the new exposure advance unit is attached
Item Reference
Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Check the Exposure Center Correction. ☞ 36070
Check the Exposure Advance Adjustment 1. ☞ 36080
Check the Exposure Advance Adjustment 2. ☞ 36081
Check the Paper Pressure Operation Correction. ☞ 36090
25810 2/2
25820
Banding shooting [LASER]
The method of banding shooting varies between LASER and iBeam.
Reference
For details about iBeam, see ☞ Banding shooting [iBeam].
! Paper Advance Section

Exposure position
156mm
Paper advance direction
93mm
80mm
86mm
Paper guide
74mm 74mm
Arm unit 2
17mm 17mm
Turn unit
Pressure roller 2
Pressure roller at the inlet side
Pressure roller at the exit side
G074561
! Banding shooting (Print condition: All)

Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to
At the area 3 mm from the paper The pressure of pressure roller 2 is • Replace the arm of pressure roller ☞ Exposure
leading end not released. 2. advance unit 1
• Replace pressure roller 2.
• Failure of arm pressure roller 2
At the area 17 mm from the paper The exit pressure roller is not • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
leading end released or release amount of the • Failure of pressure roller holder 3 advance unit 1
roller is too small.
At the area 10 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
leading end roller starts. • Failure of pressure roller holder 3 advance unit 1
At the area 19 mm from the paper Paper is pressed by the exit pressure • Failure of the adjustment of
leading end roller. exposure advance pressure change
At the area 39 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure motor 2 and pressure change motor ☞ Exposure
leading end roller ends. 2 belt, and replacing the exposure advance unit 2
advance unit
25820 1/4
25820

leading end released or release amount of the • Failure of pressure roller holder 3 advance unit 1
roller is too small.
• Failure of the exit arm
At the area 28 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure
leading end roller starts.
At the area 33 mm from the paper Paper is pressed by the exit pressure
leading end roller.
At the area 36 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure
leading end roller ends.

At the area 73 mm from the paper Adjustment fault of Exposure • Measure the distance between 0 ☞ 36080
leading end Advance Adjustment 1 or Exposure mm∼254 mm line for test print of ☞ 36081
Advance Adjustment 2 Exposure Advance Adjustment 1
or Exposure Advance
Adjustment 2 again. Then, input
the value to Test Paper
Measurement Value.
At the area 74 to 93 mm from the The paper touches the turn unit roller. • Replace the pressure release arm of ☞ Paper advance
paper leading end the paper advance unit. unit
• Perform Paper Advance Unit ☞ 36010
Correction → Turn Unit Stop
Position Correction.
• Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 26910
exposure advance unit
• Replacing the exposure advance ☞ 25810
unit ☞ 26610
• Replacing the paper advance unit
At the area 175 mm from the The turn unit of the paper advance - -
paper leading end unit is in contact with the exposure
advance unit.
At the area 17 mm from the paper The inlet side pressure roller release • Carry out the paper pressure • ☞ 36090
rear end amount of the exposure advance unit operation correction. • ☞ Exposure
is too small. • Failure of the inlet side pressure advance unit 1
At the area 26 mm from the paper The inlet side pressure roller release roller
rear end amount of the exposure advance unit • Failure of pressure roller holder (2)
At the area 33 mm from the paper is too big. • Failure of the inlet arm
rear end
At the area 27.5 mm from the When the inlet side pressure roller is • Failure of the inlet side pressure • ☞ Exposure
paper rear end releasing the pressure roller advance unit 1
• Failure of pressure roller holder (2)
• Failure of the inlet arm
• Replacing the exposure advance
unit
At the area 86 mm from the paper When the paper rear end removes • Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 26910
rear end from the guide in paper supply unit A exposure advance unit
Whole part of the print (47.1 mm Dust stuck on the inlet side pressure • Confirm the status of the inlet side -
cycle) roller or the exit pressure roller of the pressure roller or the exit pressure
exposure advance unit roller of the exposure advance unit.
Whole part of the print (9.5 mm The screws of the exposure advance • Confirm the status of the inlet side -
cycle) unit are loose. pressure roller or the exit pressure
roller of the exposure advance unit.
Whole part of the print (no cycle) The screws of the exposure advance • Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 25810
unit are loose. exposure advance unit
It is given a vibration from outside. - -
All jack bolts are effective or not. - -
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.
25820 2/4
25820
! Exposure advance unit 1

Pressure roller holder (2)

Exit arm
Pressure roller 2
Arm of pressure roller 2 Inlet arm
G084601
! Paper advance unit
Pressure release arm
G083106
25820 3/4
25820
Advance drive pulley
Exposure advance drive belt Exposure advance motor 1 belt
Tension roller
Drive roller (2)

Pressure change motor 2 belt Idle pulley
G077143

Banding position Status Corrective action
5.45 mm cycle Dust stuck on the advance drive pulley • Refer to ☞ Exposure advance unit 2 for the
7.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on the tension roller arrangement of each part.
43.7 mm cycle Dust stuck on the idle pulley • Check each part if there are any problems.
If dust or dirt is on the belt, roller and pulley, clean
55.5 mm cycle Dust caught at exposure advance motor 1
them.
belt.
The belt tension of exposure advance motor • Adjust the tension of each belt when it is not
1 belt is maladjusted. appropriate. ☞ 20110
92.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on drive roller (2) • If rollers or pulleys shake, it is necessary to replace
the exposure advance unit. ☞ 25810
202 mm cycle Dust caught at the exposure advance drive
belt.
Adjusting failure of the belt tension of the
exposure advance drive belt
belt.
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25820 4/4
25830
Banding shooting [iBeam]
The method of banding shooting varies between LASER and iBeam.
Reference
For details about LASER, see ☞ Banding shooting [LASER].
! Paper Advance Section

Exposure position
156mm
93mm
80mm
86mm
Pressure roller 2 74mm 74mm
Arm unit 2
17mm 27mm
Paper guide
Turn unit
Pressure roller at the inlet side Pressure roller at the exit side
G083104

At the area 3 mm from the paper The pressure of pressure roller 2 is • Replace the arm of pressure ☞ Exposure
leading end not released. roller 2. advance unit 1
• Replace pressure roller 2.
• Failure of arm pressure roller 2
leading end released or release amount of the • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
roller is too small. 3
25830 1/5
25830

leading end roller starts. • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
At the area 19 mm from the paper Paper is pressed by the exit pressure 3
leading end roller. • Failure of the adjustment of
At the area 39 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure exposure advance pressure ☞ Exposure
leading end roller ends. change motor 2 and pressure advance unit 2
change motor 2 belt, and
replacing the exposure advance
unit

leading end released or release amount of the • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
roller is too small. 3
• Failure of the exit arm
leading end roller starts. • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
At the area 33 mm from the paper Paper is pressed by the exit pressure 3
leading end roller. • Failure of the adjustment of
At the area 36 mm from the paper The pressure of the exit pressure exposure advance pressure ☞ Exposure
leading end roller ends. change motor 2 and pressure advance unit 2
change motor 2 belt, and
replacing the exposure advance
unit
At the area 73 mm from the paper Adjustment fault of Exposure • Measure the distance between 0 • ☞ 36080
leading end Advance Adjustment 1 or Exposure mm∼254 mm line for test print • ☞ 36081
Advance Adjustment 2 of Exposure Advance
Adjustment 1 or Exposure
Advance Adjustment 2 again.
Then, input the value to Test
Paper Measurement Value.
At the area 74 to 93 mm from the The paper touches the turn unit roller. • Replace the pressure release ☞ Paper advance
paper leading end arm of the paper advance unit. unit
• Perform Turn Unit Stop ☞ 36010
Position Correction of Paper
Advance Unit Correction.
• Adjusting the attaching position ☞ 26920
of exposure advance unit
• Replacing the exposure advance • ☞ 25810
unit • ☞ 26610
• Replacing the paper advance
unit
At the area 175 mm from the paper The turn unit of the paper advance - -
leading end unit is in contact with the exposure
advance unit.
At the area 17 mm from the paper The inlet side pressure roller release • Carry out the paper pressure • ☞ 36090
rear end amount of the exposure advance unit operation correction. • ☞ Exposure
is too small. • Failure of the inlet side pressure advance unit 1
roller
• Failure of pressure roller holder
(2)
25830 2/5
25830

At the area 26 mm from the paper The inlet side pressure roller release • Failure of the exit arm • ☞ Exposure
rear end amount of the exposure advance unit • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
At the area 33 mm from the paper is too big. 3 • ☞ Exposure
rear end • Failure of exposure advance advance unit 2
pressure change motor 2 • ☞ 25810
3
• Adjusting failure of the pressure

change motor 2 belt
unit
At the area 27.5 mm from the paper When the inlet side pressure roller is • Failure of the inlet side pressure • ☞ Exposure
rear end releasing the pressure roller advance unit 1
(2)
unit
At the area 86 mm from the paper When the paper rear end removes • Adjusting the attaching position ☞ 26920
rear end from the guide in paper supply unit A of exposure advance unit
Whole part of the print (no cycle) It is given a vibration from outside. - -
All jack bolts are effective or not. - -
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.

Exit arm
Pressure roller 2
Arm of pressure roller 2 Inlet arm
G083105
25830 3/5
25830
! Paper advance unit

G083106
Exposure advance motor 1 belt Drive roller (2)
Exposure advance drive belt
Pressure change motor 2 belt
Idle pulley
Advance drive pulley
G085172
25830 4/5
25830

Banding position Status Corrective action
5.45 mm cycle Dust stuck on the advance drive pulley • Refer to ☞ Exposure advance unit 2 for the
55.5 mm cycle Dust caught at exposure advance motor 1 belt. arrangement of each part.
The belt tension of exposure advance motor 1 • Check each part if there are any problems.
belt is maladjusted. If dust or dirt is on the belt, roller and pulley, clean
43.7 mm cycle Dust stuck on the idle pulley them.
202 mm cycle Dust caught at the exposure advance drive • Adjust the tension of each belt when it is not
belt. appropriate. ☞ 20110

Adjusting failure of the belt tension of the • If rollers or pulleys shake, it is necessary to
exposure advance drive belt replace the exposure advance unit. ☞ 25810
belt.
92.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on drive roller (2)
47.1 mm cycle Dust stuck on the inlet side pressure roller and
exit side pressure roller
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25830 5/5
26610
Paper Advance Section
Removing the paper advance unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Pull out the paper advance unit.

2. Remove the paper advance unit. (one screw)
• When removing the screw, be careful not to lose the spacer.

Pin Spacer
G084448

1. Hang the paper advance unit and attach it to the pin.
2. Move the paper advance unit in the direction of the arrow.
26610 1/2
26610
3. Slightly lift up the paper advance unit. Attach the pin to the position shown in the figure not to touch the
stopper and fix a screw.
Pin Screw

Pins Stopper
G084449
• The paper advance unit is regulated with the positioning pin. No need for adjusting when attaching.

When the original paper advance unit is reattached
When the new paper advance unit is attached

1. Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction.
☞ 36010
26610 2/2
26630
Removing the processor loading unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Open the processor upper cover.

2. Remove the rack stopper.
3. Remove the sprocket unit. (three screws)

Sprocket unit
G058399
4. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)

5. Remove the processor loading unit. (three screws)
Ground wire
Processor loading unit
G084411

• Do not touch the screws marked in blue. The position of the processor loading unit is adjusted with these screws by using a jig in
factory.
• However, the position of processor loading unit should be adjusted with the screws marked in blue only when the processor
loading unit is replaced with the new one.

When the original processor loading unit is reattached
• The position of the processor loading unit and the sprocket unit is adjusted with the positioning pins. No need for adjusting when
attaching.
When the new processor loading unit is attached

1. Raise the paper advance arm by Output Check.
26630 1/2
26630
2. Adjust the position of processor loading unit as below. (screws marked in blue)
Paper advance arm Paper advance arm
2.2 mm 2.2 mm

1.3 mm
Processor loading unit

G085972
26630 2/2
26710
Laser engine unit
Laser engine unit
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [LASER]
! Precautions for laser unit replacement
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.
Laser unit Defective laser unit

Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be checked

Backup data All of the backup data when the problem occurs
Make a backup copy of all the data in Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
! Procedure for removing the laser unit
1. Open the table unit or remove the engine cover.

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove the exposure advance unit.
☞ 25810
3. Remove the shield plate. (four screws)
4. Remove cover 1. (Loosen two of the six screws.)
Shield plate
Cover 1
G085060

• Be informed that the number of connectors and connector No. may change depending on the laser unit type that is connected to.
Connector Connect to Connector Connect to

J/P1501, J/P1503, Laser control PCB J/P1526 Relay connector
1504, 1505, 1509, J/P855 Laser unit heater
1513, 1515, 1532
J/P1637 G AOM driver
J/P1663 G laser driver 855 Laser unit heater (connector)
26710 1/5
26710
Laser engine unit
6. Disconnect the ground wire. (Four wires) (One screw for each)
Disconnect the cable clamp to remove the PCB plate.
J/P1515
J/P1503 (R), J/P1501 (B)
J/P855
J/P1663
J/P1504, J/P1505, J/P1526, J/P1532

J/P1637(G)
Cable clamp
J/P1509
J/P1513
Cable clamp
G085061
7. Remove laser control box cooling fan 2. (two screws).

8. Remove exposure advance unit lock holder (1). (two screws).
9. Remove light-tight cover 2. (Loosen two screws.)
Laser control box cooling fan 2
Light-tight cover 2
Lock holder (1)
G085062
26710 2/5
26710
Laser engine unit
10. Remove the PCB plate and stand it against table cover 2.
Table cover 2

PCB plate
G085063
Take care for the wiring connected to the laser control PCB and carry out the operation.
11. Remove the laser unit. (Four fixing nuts and four washers)
Nuts and washers
Nuts and washers

Laser unit
G085813
12. When replacing the laser unit, remove lock holder (2) and attach lock holder (2) to a new laser unit. (two
screws).
26710 3/5
26710
Laser engine unit
! Precautions when installing the laser unit
1. When removing lock holder (2) to replace the laser unit, attach lock holder (2) to the holes in the
direction of the arrows and tighten the two screws. (two screws).

Lock holder (2) Stopper
G085816
If lock holder (2) is attached in a wrong direction, the laser unit cannot be installed correctly in the printer.
2. Attach the light-tight cover by pushing it in the direction of the arrows. (two screws).
3. Install laser control box cooling fan 2 with the label facing in the direction of the arrows. (two screws).
Laser control box cooling fan 2
Light-tight cover 2
G085064
! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position
1. Set the positioning pins to the laser unit.
26710 4/5
26710
Laser engine unit
2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (four nuts
and four washers)
Nuts and washers

Positioning pins
Laser unit
Nuts and washers
G085814
! Adjustment after the replacement

When the original laser unit is reattached
Carry out the daily setup.
When a new laser unit is attached
Item Reference
Perform Exposure Magnification Correction. ☞ 36020
Perform Exposure Position Adjustment. ☞ 36030
Perform Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment. ☞ 36040
Perform initial setup. -
Perform Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup. -
Perform Letter blur check with NCE Mode. ☞ 32513
Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
Perform Brightness of the Edge. ☞ 32514
Perform Exposure Adjustment. ☞ 32515
Backup the data. -
26710 5/5
26720
iBeam unit
iBeam unit
Replacing and adjusting the position of the iBeam unit [iBeam]
! Precautions for replacement of iBeam unit
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the iBeam unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.
iBeam unit The defective iBeam unit

iBeam data iBeam unit data that the problem occurs (iBeam Tuning and iBeam)

Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be checked, Sample 4 of Paper Specification
Registration/Setup and Sample 5 ☞ 32510
Memory data and Logdata Memory data when the problem occurs and data of Logdata at the same time
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem occurs
! Procedure for removing the iBeam unit

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove light-tight cover 1. (four screws)
Light-tight cover 1
G085069
3. Remove one ground wire.

Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
26720 1/4
26720
iBeam unit
5. Remove two ground wires.

Light-tight cover 2

Wiring cover
G083179

• J/P900, 901 (iBeam unit)
7. Open the exposure advance unit.
8. Remove the iBeam unit. (two screws).
J/P901 J/P900
G083180
26720 2/4
26720
iBeam unit
! How to adjust the iBeam unit position
1. Attach the iBeam unit pushing the unit in the direction of the arrow (contact face). (two screws).
NOTE
• If the iBeam unit contacts with the contact face and pins after tightening the attaching screws, the unit is correctly installed
in the system.
Contact face

Pins
G083181
If the original iBeam unit is reattached

1. Carry out the daily setup.
When the new iBeam unit is attached
1. Perform Paper Specification Registration/Setup→Forced Pre-Emission.
NOTE
• If the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more, Forced Pre-Emission operates automatically.
For details, refer to ☞ 32510.
2. Read the CD supplied with new iBeam unit in Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
• Ver. 1.0
Configure pass setting, then access Reading and Writing Data → Reading Data (Media -> CPU) → Read individual data.
Select (#) Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of Image Field there, then read the CD that is supplied with the iBeam
unit.
• Ver. 2.0 or later
Configure pass setting, then access Reading and Writing Data → Reading Data (Media -> CPU) → Read individual data.
Select (#) iBeam Tuning Data there, then read the CD that is supplied with the iBeam unit.
3. Confirm the exposure center correction.

☞ 36070
26720 3/4
26720
iBeam unit
4. Carry out the initial setup.
26720 4/4
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section [LASER, iBeam]
Items to confirm
All Check if leveling of the system is completed correctly.
Magazine mount Check that the shutter open/close arm works properly. (If the printer door is closed, the shutter open/close arm moves
10 mm and more at the outlet section of the magazine.)
! Procedure

1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.
☞ 22000
2. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B/B2.
Magazine B ☞ 25730 Magazine B2 ☞ 25770

NOTE
• If difference between part A on the first test print and the second test print is within 0.5 mm, the adjustment is not
necessary.
Example: If the first test print skews to the right
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print

A
A
G074555

☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
• Make test prints via Test Print Confirmation (magazine A/B) to check the zigzagging amounts (A - B) of two
prints are within the tolerance level in the following table.
26810 1/3
26810
Zigzag adjustment
If they are within the tolerance level, the adjustment is not necessary.
NOTE
• For example, if the measurement values of the second test print is 120 mm for both lines A and B
Check that the difference of dimension between lines A and B on the first test print is within the tolerance level in the
following table.
Test Print Tolerance range

355.6 mm A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and B are between 119.5 mm and 120.5
mm.
610.0 mm A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and C are between 119 mm or more and

121 mm or less.
Test print (first) Test print (second)
Line A Line A (120 mm)

A
A
B
B
C
Line B Line B (120 mm)
Line C
G078473
4. Carry out the master correction of the exposure center correction.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, B.
26810 2/3
26810
Zigzag adjustment
• Make a test print via Test Print Confirmation with Master Value to check the misalignment of the test print.
If it is within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line

G068463
NOTE
• After master correction of the exposure center correction, carry out Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) again if you are also using another paper magazine.
26810 3/3
26910
Space dimension between units
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance
unit [LASER]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between LASER and iBeam.
For details about iBeam, see ☞ 26920.
• Normally, it is not necessary to adjust or check the space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit.
However, if the space dimension between the units gets different, ☞ No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
may occur when printing with the paper advance length between 320.1 mm and 324.0 mm.

! Space dimension between the units (front side)
Top view
Paper supply arm motor (right)
Paper supply unit A (3) 4.0±0.5 mm
Front view
Paper supply unit A
(2) 0 + 0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G084415
26910 1/4
26910

No. Illustration Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 See the front Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A See ☞ Adjusting the
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is position between paper
15.5±0.5 mm. supply unit A and the
2 Confirm that the height of the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) exposure advance unit.
is 0 to + 0.5 mm based on the plate of paper supply unit A (front side).
3 See the the top Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A See ☞ Procedure for
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 4.0±0.5 adjusting the laser unit

mm. position.
! Space dimension between the units (back)

Paper supply unit A
(2) 0 + 0.5 mm (1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G084414

No. Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Confirm that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (back) and the plate of the See ☞ Adjusting the
exposure advance unit (back) is 15.5±0.5 mm. position between paper
2 Confirm that the height of the cutout of the exposure advance unit (back) is 0+0.5 mm based on supply unit A and the
the plate of paper supply unit A (back). exposure advance unit.
26910 2/4
26910
! Adjusting the position between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
Positioning pins

Laser unit
G085067
3. Loosen the screw of the shim beneath the laser unit, then insert and remove the shim. (Loosen two
screws each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear), remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
Shim (rear)
Laser unit
Shim
G085068
26910 3/4
26910
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
4. Confirm if the laser unit positioning pin is in the position where it moves up and down smoothly.
If necessary, adjust the position of the laser unit. See ☞ Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position.

5. Confirm the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit again.
6. Confirm the Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
See ☞ 36010.
! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position

2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (four nuts
and four washers)
Nuts and washers
Positioning pins
Laser unit Nuts and washers G085067
26910 4/4
26920
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance
unit [iBeam]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between LASER and iBeam.
For details about LASER, see ☞ 26910.
26920 1/6
26920
! Space dimension between the units (front side) [iBeam]
Top view

Paper supply unit A (3) 12.9±0.5 mm
Front view
Paper supply unit A
(2) 4.8+0.5 mm (1) 8.5+0.5 mm
G082043
26920 2/6
26920

No. Illustration Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 See the front Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A See ☞ Adjusting the
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is position between paper
11.6±0.5 mm. supply unit A and the
2 Confirm that the height of the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) exposure advance unit
is 4.8 + 0.5 mm based on the plate of paper supply unit A (front side). [iBeam].
3 See the the top Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A See ☞ Procedure for
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 8.5±0.5 adjusting position of

mm. iBeam unit mount
[iBeam].
! Space dimension between the units (back) [iBeam]
Paper supply unit A

(2) 0 + 0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G082042
26920 3/6
26920

No. Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Confirm that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (back) and the plate of the See ☞ Adjusting the
exposure advance unit (back) is 15.5±0.5 mm. position between paper
2 Confirm that the height of the cutout of the exposure advance unit (back) is 0+0.5 mm based on supply unit A and the
the plate of paper supply unit A (back). exposure advance unit
[iBeam].
! Adjusting the position between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit

[iBeam]

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove light-tight cover 1. (four screws)
Light-tight cover 1
G085069

Light-tight cover 2
G084445
4. Remove cover 3. (three screws)
26920 4/6
26920
5. Remove cover 1. (eight screws)

Cover 3
Cover 1

G084446
6. Install the positioning pin in the iBeam unit mount.

Positioning pin
Positioning pin
G084438
7. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (front), and insert and remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
Front
Shim
G082089
8. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (rear), and insert and remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear) in the iBeam unit, remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
26920 5/6
26920
Rear

Shim
G082090
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
9. Confirm if the positioning pin of the iBeam unit mount is in the position where it moves up and down
smoothly.
11. Confirm the Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
See ☞ 36010.
! Procedure for adjusting position of iBeam unit mount [iBeam]
1. Install the positioning pin in the iBeam unit mount.

2. Adjust the position of the iBeam unit mount so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly.
(Loosen four nuts.)
Positioning pin
Positioning pin
Nuts
Nuts
G084438
26920 6/6
27100
Conveyor unit section
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate [LASER, iBeam]
The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here.
$ ☞ Replacing the colorimeter unit

$ ☞ Replacing the colorimeter
$ ☞ Replacing the calibration plate

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit
Calibration plate
Calibration data CD
Colorimeter
G085050
• When replacing the colorimeter, replacing the calibration plate and calibration data CD is also necessary. Replace them
as one set.
• When replacing the calibration plate, replacing the calibration data CD is also necessary. Replace them as one set.
! Replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Remove the conveyor unit.
Conveyor unit
G084909
27100 1/6
27100
2. Pull the lever and slowly pull the dryer section.

G087885

J/P803 (Fan unit)
4. Remove the fan unit.
(Loosen two screws.)
Fan unit
J/P803
G085051

J/P805 (Paper sensors 1 and 2)
6. Remove the colorimeter unit top.
(four screws and a washer)
27100 2/6
27100
Screw A: 4 mm, B: 6 mm
A A
Colorimeter unit top

A B
J/P805
G085052
7. Remove the plate bottom.

(four screws and two washers)
Screw A: 10 mm, B: 6 mm, C: 4mm
A C
Plate bottom
A B
G085053
8. Disconnect the connectors and ground wire.

J/P802, 804 (Relay connector)
J/P801 (Paper advance motor), J/P808 (Calibration plate advance motor)
27100 3/6
27100
9. Remove the advance unit from the colorimeter unit bottom.

(six screws and two washers)
J/P808
J/P802, 804

Colorimeter unit bottom
J/P801
Ground wire
G085054
! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
1. There is no need to adjust the colorimeter unit position.

! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.

☞ Replacing the calibration plate
2. Adjust the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35100
! Replacing the colorimeter

Conveyor unit
G084909

J/P803 (Fan unit)
27100 4/6
27100

Fan unit

J/P803
G085051
4. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter.

(Loosen two mounting nuts.)
5. Remove the connector of the colorimeter and replace the colorimeter.
Fixing plate Fixing nuts
Connector
G085055
! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Adjust the height of the colorimeter.

☞ 27110
2. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
27100 5/6
27100
! Replacing the calibration plate
1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the system.
Bringing up the display
Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration
(1) Replace the calibration plate stored in the colorimeter unit with new one.

(2) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
(3) Insert the calibration data CD into the drive.
(4) Click Path Setting to configure the CD drive setting of calibration data.
(5) Click OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration data CD are shown.
(6) When Click [OK] button to register the data. is shown, click OK.
(7) When Are you sure you want to register? is shown, click OK.
(8) When After changing the Calibration Plate, perform the calibration. Would you like to perform the
calibration? is shown, click OK.
Register the data in the CD to the colorimeter.
Data is updated.
(9) When The data has been upgraded. is shown, click OK.
Confirm the registration.
(10) The screen returns to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
2. Check whether updating was performed normally.
NOTE
• Confirm that the colorimeter data and the calibration plate data are the same.
(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Confirming the Colorimeter and
Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Click Path Setting to configure the CD drive setting of calibration data.
(3) Click OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration data CD are shown.
(4) It matches the Colorimeter Data or It does not match the Colorimeter Data. is shown.
(5) Click Cancel to return to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
27100 6/6
27110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam]
IMPORTANT
• When replacing the colorimeter of the colorimeter unit, be sure to adjust the height.
! Procedure

Conveyor unit
G084909
2. Pull the lever and slowly pull the dryer section.
G087885

J/P803 (Fan unit)
Fan unit
J/P803
G085051

J/P805 (Paper sensors 1 and 2)
27110 1/4
27110
6. Remove the colorimeter unit top.

(four screws and a washer)
Screw A: 4 mm, B: 6 mm
A A
Colorimeter unit top

A B
J/P805
G085052
7. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Leading end control holder
Lock screw
G083226
8. Turn over the colorimeter unit top.
27110 2/4
27110
9. Turn the leading end control holder so that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back
face of the colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter height adjustment jig.
Leading end of the measurement part
Colorimeter height adjustment jig

Colorimeter unit top Groove of the leading end control
holder
G083230
NOTE
• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter leading end.
Use the handle side of the jig.

G072364
10. Confirm that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back face of the colorimeter mount,
and then turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree clockwise to lower it.
NOTE
• This operation is to adjust the height of colorimeter leading end from the base of the colorimeter mount to 0 to -0.1 mm.
One revolution (360 degree) of the leading end control holder makes 1 mm movement.
IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage the calibration plate
or test prints.
27110 3/4
27110
Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree

clockwise to lower it.

Colorimeter leading end

G072365
11. Reassemble the parts.

! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Lock screw
G083226
27110 4/4
27120
Replacing the print conveyor unit belt [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the print conveyor unit.

2. Press circle parts of the print conveyor unit and remove the cover.

G083243
3. Pull the rollers of the print conveyor unit in the direction of the arrow and remove the belt.
Roller
G083245

! Checking after replacement
1. Check that the belt works normally by driving the conveyor motor in the Output Check.
☞ 35320
27120 1/1
27220
Dryer section
Dryer section
Removing the dryer rack [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer guide. (Loosen two screws.)

Dryer guide
G084417
2. Remove the dryer cover.

☞ 20021
3. Remove the air duct and dryer cover 1. (Loosen one screw.)
Dryer cover 1
Air duct (knob screw)
G085085

J/P722, J/P796, J/P717, J/P760
27220 1/3
27220
Dryer section
5. Remove the dryer rack in the arrow direction. (four screws)

J/P717, J/P796, J/P760

J/P722
(A)
(B)
The leg (A) of back of the dryer rack is fit in the hole of frame (B).
G085086
27220 2/3
27220
Dryer section
1. Attach it by pushing the gear side of dryer rack to the stopper. (four screws)
Gear side of dryer rack

Stopper
G085087
2. Attach the dryer rack by pushing it in the arrow direction. (two screws).
Dryer guide
G084610

When the original dryer rack is reattached
When a new dryer rack is attached

1. Perform Print Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 33001
27220 3/3
27225
Dryer section
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [LASER, iBeam]
• Adjust the position of the upper turn guides when it was removed.
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer rack.

☞ 27220
2. Adjust the upper turn guide by pressing the guides to the roller face so that the space between the guide

and the dryer rack roller is even. (two screws each).
Upper turn guide
Roller
Roller
Upper turn guide
Roller faces Roller faces
G085819
! Checking after adjustment
1. Confirm that there is no paper jam or flow after performing the test print.
27225 1/1
27250
Dryer section
Removing the dryer heater and dryer fan [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer rack.

☞ 27220
J/P718, J/P768
3. Remove the dryer heater and dryer fan. (two screws).

Dryer heater, dryer fan
J/P718, J/P768
G084421
4. Remove the heater cover. (one screw)

5. Remove the dryer heater. (six screws)
NOTE
• Replace the dryer heater together with the dryer safety thermostat.
Heater cover
Dryer heater
G084422
27250 1/2
27250
Dryer section
1. Process some prints to confirm that there is no problem.
27250 2/2
27420
Print sorter unit section
Removing the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the processor rear cover.

☞ 20021
J/P713, J/P867: Relay Connectors
3. Remove the print sorter unit in the direction indicated by the arrow. (Loosen three screws.)

Print sorter unit
J/P713
G084429

None
27420 1/1
27430
Replacing the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
Replacing print receiving tray (1)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at the print receiving position.
2. Push the pawl of the print receiving tray (2) in the direction indicated by arrow A, then remove the print
receiving tray (1) in the direction indicated by arrow B.

Print receiving tray (1)
Pawl

G050796
Replacing print receiving tray (2)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at the print receiving position.
2. Press part C of receiving tray (3), and remove receiving tray (2) in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Part C of print receiving tray (3)

G074559
1. Check the stop position of the print receiving tray.

☞ 27440
27430 1/1
27440
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover. (one screw)

Sorter cover

G074556
2. Adjust the sorter home sensor holder stop position so that the print receiving tray stops at 2.5 mm away
from the fulcrum spacer. (one screw)
Print receiving tray
Fulcrum spacer
2.5 mm
Sorter home sensor holder
G074557
3. Check if the print receiving tray stop position is within the range of 2.5±1.5 by pressing the manual sorter
switch continuously.
IMPORTANT
• If the stop position of the print receiving tray is not stable, check the timing belt tension and the chain tension of
the sorter drive belt and adjust them correctly.
• Adjusting the sorter drive belt tension
☞ 20140
• Adjusting the chain tension
☞ 27450
27440 1/1
27450
Adjusting the chain tension of the print sorter unit [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover. (one screw)

Sorter cover

G074556
2. Adjust the position of tension plate 1 and 2 to fix the chain so that it bends 10 mm when pressing it by
270±25 g (2.6±0.2N). (two screws each).
Chain
G074639
3. Adjust tension plate 1, 2 so that measurement A becomes the followings. (two screws each).
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the tension plates so that the difference between the measurement A of tension plate 1 and that of
tension plate 2 is within 0.5 mm.
27450 1/2
27450
Tension plate 1

Tension plate 2
G074558
27450 2/2
27500
F replenishment unit [F]
Removing the F replenishment unit [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge.

2. Remove the processor rear cover.
☞ 20021

J/P632: Replenishment cartridge opening motor
J/P637: Relay connector
4. Remove the interlock switch (replenisher section door). (two screws).
5. Remove the F replenishment unit. (eight screws)
J/P632
Interlock switch (replenisher section door)
F replenishment unit
J/P637
G085856
27500 1/2
27500
6. When removing the F replenishment unit, pull out the upper surface of the F replenishment unit in the
direction of the arrow.
F replenishment unit

G085857
When the original F replenishment unit is reattached

1. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.
When the new F replenishment unit is attached
27500 2/2
27510
Removing the cartridge setting section [F] [LASER, iBeam]
• Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section when replacing or checking the replenishment cartridge opening motor,
replenishment cartridge position sensor (upper) or replenishment cartridge position sensor (lower).
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500

2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section. (four screws)
Replenishment cartridge setting section
G085882
1. Set the cam into the square hole in the replenishment cartridge setting section to attach it.
Cam
Square hole
G085883
27510 1/1
27520
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500
2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section.
☞ 27510
3. Remove the replenishment cartridge opening motor. (three screws)

Replenishment cartridge opening
motor
G085858
4. Remove the plate (three screws) on the replenishment cartridge opening motor and gear (one screw).
Plate
Gear

motor
G085859
27520 1/2
27520
1. Install the gear of the replenishment cartridge opening motor so that the space between the outer
surface of the gear and the edge of the motor axis is 3 mm. (one screw)
Plate
Gear

3 mm
G085881
2. Install the replenishment cartridge opening motor with the cam remaining at the upper start point. (three
screws)
• If the cam is not adjusted to the upper start point during the replenishment cartridge opening motor, the F replenishment unit may not
be correctly attached to the system.

motor
Cam (upper start

point)
G085880
3. After placing the replenishment cartridge setting section and the F replenishment unit to the original
positions, confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.
27520 2/2
27530
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] [LASER, iBeam]
NOTE
• The sensors used may differ depending on the model.
Type 1 Type 2
Assembly type Plastic molding type

! Procedure
1. Remove processor cover 1.

☞ 20021
Refer to ☞ 63280 for the locations of each replenishment solution level sensor.
J/P611, 612:P1R
J/P613, 614:P2RA
J/P615, 616:P2RB
3. Remove the rubber plug from the flange section in the direction of arrow 1.
Remove the replenishment solution level sensor wiring from the rubber plug, and remove the replenishment solution level
sensor connector in the direction of the arrow 2. (two screws each).
NOTE
• Replenishment solution level sensor type 2 (plastic molding type) does not have screws.
• Regarding the replenishment solution level sensor, replace # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor, # # #(lower)
replenishment solution level sensor and HL−F−001 as a set.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
(1) (2)
HL−F−001
Rubber plug Flange section
G085895
27530 1/2
27530
! Checking after replacement
1. Confirm that the replenishment solution level sensors are securely attached as shown below. (two set-
screws each)
NOTE
• Replenishment solution level sensor type 2 (plastic molding type) does not have set-screws.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor

P1R P2RA P2RB
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085180
27530 2/2
27540
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge
cleaning pump [F] [LASER, iBeam]
• Perform the output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump following the procedure with
attaching a hose. Or, water may come into a replenishment tank and it may adversely affect the replenishment solution.
! Procedure
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge.

2. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from upper point to lower point.
☞ 35320
3. Turn on Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door).
4. Insert a hose of 13 mm diameter into the cleaning nozzle to be checked and fix it with adhesive tape.
• The hose is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list ☞ 80310.
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
Hose
Cleaning nozzle
G085904
5. By the output check, operate P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning
Pump, P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and P2RB
Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, which are to be checked.
• The replenishment cartridge cleaning pump stops after operating for 10 seconds.
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge cleaning pump is about 205 ml per 10 seconds.
6. Remove the hose. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from lower point
to upper point.
27540 1/1
27550
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] [LASER, iBeam]
• Indicates position of the hoses to drain the replenishment solutions after an attention or error message is shown for the F
specification.
Hoses to drain working solutions

Hoses to drain replenishment solutions
To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.
G085976
27550 1/1
27610
Tablet replenishment section [J]
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove all the tablet cartridges and chutes.

2. Remove tablet replenishment unit section cover 1 and 2. ☞ 20021
J/P539, J/P541: tablet replenishment driver PCB

4. Remove the tablet replenishment unit. (loosen four or five screws)
• Depending on the type of the tablet replenishment unit, screw A may not be attached.
NOTE
• After operating, confirm that the tablet replenishment units were properly installed.
A J/P539, J/P541
G084431

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27610 1/1
27620
Replacing the module [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove tablet replenishment unit section cover 2. ☞ 20021
J/P571, J/P572, J/P575, J/P588: CD module

J/P576, J/P577, J/P580, J/P589: BF module
J/P581, J/P582, J/P585, J/P590: STB module
4. Replace the module. (Loosen two of the four screws.)
Module
Loosen this screw.

G050711

☞ 35220
☞ 35320
27620 1/1
27630
Replacing the drum motor [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the gear (32T).

Gear (32T)
G050712
3. Remove the drive gear. (two screws).
Drive gear
Screws
G050713
4. Remove the drum drive motor. (three screws)
Screw
Drum motor
Screws
G050732
27630 1/2
27630
5. Replace the drive motor and reassemble the parts.

NOTE
• When attaching the gear (32T), adjust the backlash by adjusting the attaching position of the gear (32T). (three screws)

Gear (32T)
G052554

☞ 35220
☞ 35320
27630 2/2
27640
Replacing the elevator motor [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the tablet replenishment unit.

☞ 27610
2. Remove drum section. (four screws)

Drum section
G085889

J/P540: Elevator motor
4. Remove the wiring cover. (two screws).
5. Remove the elevator motor unit as in the direction of arrow 1 shown below. (three screws)
(1)
Wiring cover
Elevator motor unit
G085849
6. Remove gear (12T) and motor mounting plate and replace the elevator motor.
! Adjustment after installing the elevator motor
1. Attach gear (12T) and motor mounting plate.
27640 1/3
27640
2. Adjust the backlash of gear (12T) and upper idle gear.
Gear (12T) Upper idle gear

0.2 mm
G050736

4. Adjust the elevator motor unit position and also the backlash of the friction roller gear and gear (12T).
(three screws)
• Check the backlash of the friction roller gear and gear (12T) from part A.
Friction roller gear
Gear (12T)
Upper idle gear
0.2 mm
Part A
Elevator motor unit

G085891
27640 2/3
27640
5. Attach the drum section by pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrow shown below. (four screws)
Drum section

G085890
6. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27640 3/3
27650
Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

☞ 27610
2. Loosen the screws (two for each) of the tension plate.

G085843
3. Adjust the tension of the elevator belt.

" Point
Adjust the tension plate position so that the elevator belt deflects by 14 mm when pushing 500 mm position of the belt by the
force of 100 g to 150 g (1 N to 1.5 N). (Adjust the tension of the elevator belt for both right and left.)
500 mm position
G085886
4. Lower the elevator until the elevator lower sensor turns DARK.
27650 1/2
27650
5. Measure A, B and C as shown in the illustration to confirm that the bucket platform is parallel to the
tablet replenishment unit.
Tablet replenishment unit
Square holes

C
B
A
Bucket platforms
G050740
NOTE
• Remove the tablet replenishment unit to confirm that the bucket platforms are parallel to the unit.
☞ 27610
6. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27650 2/2
27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

☞ 27610
2. Leave the tablet replenishment unit connectors connected and place the unit in front of the processor.
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.

" Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, remove the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (two screws each).
Oval hole
Stopper
G085846
4. Adjust the position of the elevator upper sensor so that the clearance between the lowest bottom of
bucket platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the elevator at the position where the
elevator upper sensor is closed at the Output Check. (two screws).
Bottom of the 1.5±0.5 mm

bucket platform
(lower)
Upper sensor for elevator
Tablet gate Tablet replenishment

unit frame
Bucket platform
Tablet gate
G085844
27660 1/2
27660
IMPORTANT
• How to stop the elevator at the elevator upper sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section 1 on the Output Check.
2. When Elevator Motor (Up) is selected and Execute is clicked, the elevator lifts up and stops for 2 seconds at the
position where the elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
5. Turn OFF the system power supply and reassemble the parts.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27660 2/2
27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

☞ 27610
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.

" Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, remove the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (two screws each).
Oval hole
Stopper
G085846
4. Adjust the position of the elevator middle sensor so that the clearance between the highest bottom of
bucket platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the elevator at the position where the
elevator middle sensor is closed at the Output Check. (two screws).
Bucket platform
1.5±0.5 mm
Middle sensor for elevator
Bucket
Higher bottom of
the bucket
platform
Chute inlet Chute inlet
Tablet gate
Tablet gate
G085845
27670 1/2
27670
IMPORTANT
• How to stop the elevator at the elevator middle sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section 1 on the Output Check.
2. When Elevator Motor (Up) is selected and Execute is clicked, the elevator lifts up and stops for 2 seconds at the
position where the elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27670 2/2
27680
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure

☞ 27610
3. Stop the elevator at the position where the elevator lower sensor detects dark in the Output Check.

• ☞ 35320
4. Adjust the position of the elevator lower sensor so that the space between the lower bottom of the
bucket platform and the lower side of the hole of the frame is 0 to -2.0 mm. (two screws).
Tablet replenishment unit rear side

Lower bottom of the bucket platform
Tablet gate
Lower bottom of the bucket

platform
0 to -2.0 mm
Hole of the tablet replenishment

unit frame
Elevator lower sensor
Tablet replenishment unit front side
Screw
G085847
5. Check if the tablet falls from the drum via Output Check.
• ☞ 35320
27680 1/1
27690
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the cartridge guide.
Cartridge guide

Cartridge guide
G050745
3. Remove the drum case. (six screws)

Drum case
G050746
4. Remove the gear (64T). (one mount ring)

Mount ring
Gear (64T)
G050747
27690 1/2
27690
5. Face the right narrow notch of the drum to you and align the center of drum unit's opening with the
center of notch, and pull out the drum to the arrow direction.
Narrow Wide

G050748
6. Clean the space between the tablet drop section and vapor proof blocks.
Vapor proof block
Space
Tablet drop section
Vapor proof block

G050749
IMPORTANT
• There is a spring in the space of vapor proof block. Be careful not to damage it when cleaning.
• After cleaning, check that there is no space when the vapor proof block is pushed in the arrow direction.
Vapor proof block
Space
Springs
Space
Vapor proof block
G050750

27690 2/2
27810
Replenishment package unit [SM]
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] [LASER,
iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount.

Arrangement for the replenisher pump and the
water supply pump
Tray units
G070020
4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to be replaced.

5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the pump to be replaced, and then remove the hoses.
IMPORTANT
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, and STB, do not remove the new caps from the
pumps. If they are removed, the poppet valves may be taken off. Then the pump output amount indicated on
the rating plate will not be determined properly.
IN
Caps
(Do not remove them.)
Poppet valves OUT
G050887
• Be careful not to let the pump rotating part come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.
1. Push. G050874
27810 1/4
27810
8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover
Lift up the cover holding the part indicated by the arrow.

G050875
9. Take a note of the output amount displayed on the new pump's rating plate.
The pump, for which the output amount measurement is no good, must be replaced.
Output amount
Rating plate
G050888
10. Unplug the connectors, and replace the pump.

J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
12. Enter the output amount.
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, BF-B, and STB
Enter the output amount written in step 9.
☞ 33003
Setting for BF-W and STB-W
Carry out pump output amount settings, and then enter the measurement values.
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump (except BF-W and STB-W).
IMPORTANT
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be carried out accurately.
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, the chemical may undergo oxidation, or precise values may not be
obtained because air escapes during the measurement.
(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1.

(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe from the sub-tank and fix the pipes in the vertical position with
the output ports front faced.
NOTE
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe at the same height as when the system is operating. When the
output amount is measured, the pipes should be secured to obtain values correctly.
27810 2/4
27810
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment solution or water to be output.

Replenisher pipe and water supply pipe

Tape G050889
IMPORTANT
• For measurements of two or more replenishment solutions, use a different container for each solution.
If no different containers are available, clean the container before using.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount Setting display and select Pump Output Amount Setting.
(5) Select the pump for output.
(6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual sorter switch.
(7) Check that the air does not remain in the hose. Then repeat step (5) until the replenishment solution or water
comes to the exit of the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe.
(8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher pipe.
Replenisher pipe and water supply pipe
Air exhaust tool
G050890
IMPORTANT
• When air is exhausted for two or more chemicals, be sure to start from CD-A pump.
• Before air exhausting from the pumps, be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is not cleaned, contamination
and chemical reaction may occur.
NOTE
• The air exhaust tool is a service tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump by pulling the cylinder of the syringe from
the air exhaust tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and discharge the air, water, or
replenishment solution.
IMPORTANT
• When the air is exhausted by using the air exhaust tool, the float of the package may fall by the force of
attraction and the attention messages such as Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.
may be displayed.
There may be still some replenisher solution left in the package. Remove the replenishment package
from the replenishment unit and shake it to check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the air exhaust tool, the replenishment solution or water may be
splashed.
27810 3/4
27810
(10) After air has been exhausted by the air exhaust tool, check that the air does not remain in the hose.
2. Check the output amount.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the measured value and the output amount entered in the system is
within ±3%. If the difference is not within ±3%, check for damage or clogging of the pipes. When there is still no
problem relating to those items, air must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air, and measure output amount
securely again.

• When the output amount for each replenishment package is measured, the remaining amount of each solution
varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.
27810 4/4
27820
Replacing the probe [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
Protection cover

G050891
4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors.

J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B
5. Remove the tray units.
2. Lift it up.
Tray unit B
1. Press the lever.
Tray unit A
G050892
6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
Probe holder
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A
G050893
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the probe nut securely using the probe replacing jig.
IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be used properly for each solution.
27820 1/2
27820
For CD-C solution, use the whole black probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the resin part is brown and the O-ring marked with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
27820 2/2
27830
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] [LASER,

iBeam]
! Procedure
1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the replenishment solution sensor.
Sensor arrangement
Trays

Replenishment solution sensors
G085952
2. Attach the replenishment package containing the replenishment solution.

3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to ON position.
4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0 PCB counterclockwise fully.
Cover
Replenishment solution Replenishment solution

package P-1 package P-2
G085953
VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclockwise Decreases the amount of light.
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.
27830 1/3
27830
6. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is off.

• Replenishment solution sensor sensitivity adjustment method varies depending on the part number and VR number of the
mounted SM I/O PCB.
Details about SM I/O PCB SM I/O PCB part number
Chemical VR No. LED No. J391191 J391378
CD-A VR1 LED1 ☞ Adjustment ☞ Adjustment
CD-B VR2 LED2 procedure 1 procedure 2
CD-C VR3 LED3
STB VR4 LED4

BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6 ☞ Adjustment
procedure 1
! SM I/O PCB VR adjustment procedure

Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2
• J391191 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
Adjusting procedure Adjusting procedure
1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is 1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is
off. off.
1. If turning the VR clockwise less than twice from the 1. If turning the VR clockwise less than one and a half from
leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns the leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ It LED
on by turning the VR less than twice:. turns on by turning the VR less than one and a half:.
2. If turning VR clockwise twice or more from the left most 2. If turning clockwise the VR one and a half or more from
position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns on by the left most position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED
turning the VR twice or more:. turns on by turning the VR one and a half:.
If LED turns on by turning the VR less than twice: It LED turns on by turning the VR less than one and a half:
1. If the LED turns on when rotating the VR of each 1. If turning the VR of each replenishment solution sensor
replenishment solution sensor clockwise less than twice from clockwise less than one and a half from the leftmost position
the leftmost position, return the VR to the leftmost position, turns on the LED, return the VR to the leftmost position, then
and turn it clockwise three times again. turn it clockwise twice.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This includes the case when LED turns on while the • This includes the case when LED turns on while the
VR is at the leftmost position. VR is at the leftmost position.
2. Reassemble the parts as they were. 2. Reassemble the parts as they were.
27830 2/3
27830
Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2

• J391191 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
If LED turns on by turning the VR twice or more: If LED turns on by turning the VR one and a half:
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each 1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly
and stop it at the position when LED turns on. and stop it at the position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it • If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it

counterclockwise to the position where the LED counterclockwise to the position where the LED
goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED
lights up. lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the 2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the
replenishment solution sensor clockwise 1 turn to the right. replenishment solution sensor clockwise half a turn to the
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its right.
sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor 3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its
exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2. sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor
NOTE exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2.
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each NOTE
replenishment solution sensor is 13. • The maximum number of VR rotations for each
• When the float in the replenishment package blocks off replenishment solution sensor is 13.
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off. • When the float in the replenishment package blocks off
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.
Floats Replenishment
solution
Replenishment package
Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)
Replenishment
Probe
solution
Replenishment solution sensor
(LED)
G050897
27830 3/3
3000
3. Mode
Password ............................................................................................................................. 30500

Password [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure table ............................................................................................................ 31000
Mode structure table [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................31000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 31100
Status Display [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................................................31100
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................31110
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................32510
3 Mode
iBeam Tuning [iBeam] ......................................................................................................................................32511
iBeam Engine Check [iBeam] ...........................................................................................................................32512
NCE Mode [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................................32513
Brightness of the Edge [LASER] ......................................................................................................................32514
Exposure Adjustment [LASER] ........................................................................................................................32515
Magazine Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................32520
Data Initialization [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings .............................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................................33001
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display [F] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................................33070
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM][J] [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information [F] [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................................33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................33505
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................33570
3000 1/2
3000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35100

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) [Laser, iBeam] ................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................35320
3 Mode
Reading and Writing Data [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................................35400
System Version Check [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................35500
Upgrading the system for each control PCB (CPU) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................35600
Operation Information [LASER] .......................................................................................................................35700
Operation Information [iBeam] .........................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction [LASER] ..................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment [LASER] ..........................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [LASER] ........................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................36081
Paper Pressure Operation Correction [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................................36090
White Border Width Correction [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................36100
Setting IP address and subnet mask ................................................................................... 37610
Setting IP address and subnet mask [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................................37610
Software .............................................................................................................................. 38000
Installing the system program [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................38000
3000 2/2
30500
Password
Password
Password [LASER, iBeam]
3. Mode
M5303-00
Entering password
Item Explanation
Entering the service personnel 1. Click Maintenance to show the Maintenance screen.
password 2. Press F9 while pressing F1 on the Maintenance screen, then enter the service personnel
password (2260).
IMPORTANT
• Do not tell the service personnel password to users.
Deleting the password
Item Explanation
Deleting the service personnel 1. Click Maintenance to show the Maintenance screen.
password 2. Press F9 while pressing F1 on the Maintenance screen, then enter the number other than the
service personnel password (2260).
Deleting the owner password 1. Click Maintenance to show the Maintenance screen.
2. Press the F1 key and press the F2 key on the keyboard to access the Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 000000 (0 for six times) on the Password Deletion display.
NOTE
• After the password is deleted, it is set to the initial value (0123).
The Password Deletion display is not shown if the password has not been registered.
The Password Deletion display is shown only when the password has been registered.
4. Click OK.
The password is deleted.
30500 1/1
31000
Mode structure table
Mode structure table [LASER, iBeam]
• SP1: The service personnel password is required to display this.

• SP2: Data can be changed by entering the service personnel password.
! Maintenance Application display

Item Reference
Output Device Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance display
! Maintenance display
Item Reference
3. Mode
Start Up Checks
Close Down Checks
Extension ☞ Extension display
Status Display ☞ 31100
Emulsion Number Change
Daily Setup
Cleaning the Focal Plane Regulating Guide
Help Display
Debug Mode (SP1) ☞ 31110
! Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings ☞ Processor Settings
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance
! Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(LASER) F NCE Mode (SP1) ☞ 32513
F Edge Brightness Correction (SP1) ☞ 32514
F Exposure Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 32515
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
iBeam Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(iBeam) F iBeam Tuning ☞ 32511
F iBeam Engine Check (SP1) ☞ 32512
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Paper Balance Correction
Paper Temperature Correction
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Initial Setup (SP1)
31000 1/4
31000
! Processor Settings
Reference
☞ Processor settings [F] ☞ Processor settings [N] ☞ Processor settings [SM] ☞ Processor settings [J]
Processor settings [F]

Item Reference
Print Sensor Adjustment ☞ 33001
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33002
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ☞ 33004
Quiet Process Setting
3. Mode
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33030
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502
Display Processor Working Information ☞ 33503
Processor Set Up Mode ☞ 33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) ☞ 33505
Processor settings [N]

Item Reference
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33003
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Processor settings [SM]

Item Reference
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33003
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
31000 2/4
31000
Processor settings [J]

Item Reference
Status Display (Basic)
Counter (SP2) ☞ 33070
Status Display (correction)
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration (SP1) ☞ 33500
Basic Kit Setting (SP1) ☞ 33520
Kit Correction (SP1) ☞ 33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33540
☞ 33550
3. Mode
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1)
Operation Check (SP1) ☞ 33560
Manual Kit Change ☞ 33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting (SP1) ☞ 33502
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) (SP1) ☞ 33505
! Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. See the User Manuals for other modes.
Operator Selections (Printer 1)

Item Details Normal setting
Notification of Print Quality This function is to notify decrease of the print quality caused by hysteresis. ON
Confirmation (0: Invalid) This notification is displayed when selecting to print to a wide paper size after
(iBeam) printing more than the specified number of prints in succession at a single
narrower paper size. (default: 300 prints)
☞ No. 01093
If you enter 0, it will be invalidate and the attention message will not appear.
Normally, setting value will not be changed.
Operator Selections (Processor)

Item Details Normal setting
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch Processor drive and dryer operate continuously. ON
This operates no matter if the system is printing or not.
Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment Error*1 (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) the replenisher tanks run out of solutions. ON
(Only for SM)
Refilling Water Error*1 (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the refilling water tank runs out of water.
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the error message is not shown even though the ON
circulation pumps stop.
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the print full sensor detects paper.
*1. Not in use for F.

Setting ON/OFF for errors related to replenishing or water refilling is not available.
31000 3/4
31000
! Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Colorimeter Calibration
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
(LASER)
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
(LASER)
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
(LASER)
3. Mode
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 (SP1) ☞ 36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 (SP1) ☞ 36081
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
White Border Width Correction ☞ 36100
Process Control Strip
Input Check Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data Reading Data (Media -> CPU) ☞ 35400
Writing Data (CPU -> Media)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade ☞ 35600
Operation Information Daily Setup History ☞ 35700
Laser Operation Record (SP1) (LASER)
iBeam Operation Record (SP1) (iBeam)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
*1. For LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and 3501 PLUS, there are no Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) of
Functions in Paper Advance Unit Correction.
31000 4/4
31100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Status Display [LASER, iBeam]
LASER iBeam
1 1
2 3
3. Mode
This section explains the Status Display for Printer Operation Status, Laser temperature control status and iBeam Temperature
Status. See the User Manuals for other modes.
No. Name Status

1 Printer Operation Status The printer status is shown.
• Printer is not ready.
The maintenance display is shown.
• Off-line
The output system and operation PC are not connected, or the power supply of the output system
is off.
• Closedown
After the close down checks, the program timer is being activated.
• Installing the program. . .
The system program is being upgraded.
• Idle
Printing process can be performed.
• Printing. . .
Printing is being processed.
• The system is in the program timer mode.
The program timer is being activated when starting up the system.
2 Laser temperature • Not initialized
control status • If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• If the process for starting the laser unit is not completed.
• If the process for the printer I/F main PCB is not completed.
• If the error occurs in the laser unit.
• If the output check is carried out.
• Temperature control started
• If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• If the temperature is except the processable range of the laser unit (17.0°C to 42.0°C).
• If the temperature is not in the processable range of B or R laser (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
• If the error occurs in the laser unit.
• Temperature control completed
The temperature adjustment is completed, the printing process can be performed.
31100 1/2
31100
Maintenance
No. Name Status

3 iBeam Temperature • Not initialized
Status • If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• If the process for starting iBeam unit is not completed.
• If the error occurs in the iBeam.
• Temperature control started
• If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• If the error occurs in the iBeam.
• Temperature control completed
Printing process of iBeam unit can be performed.
3. Mode
31100 2/2
31110
Maintenance
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata) [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Debug Mode
Debug Mode Save log data
3. Mode
! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the printer/processor operation, the operation status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a
Memory data and Log data.
IMPORTANT
• If the EZ Controller is installed, save a Memory data and Log data with Alt+Y.
☞ If the EZ Controller is installed (Alt+Y)
• If the EZ Controller is not installed, save a Memory data and Log data with Save log data.
☞ If the EZ Controller is not installed (Save log data)
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information shown below with the Logdata and memory data
Status when the problem occurred Operation performed before the problem With or without an error, its kind
occurred
Any other things you realized Paper used when the problem occurred
! If the EZ Controller is installed (Alt+Y)

Keyboard Destination Data format Output data
*1
Alt+Y 3501 PLUS, 3501i PLUS, 3502 PLUS Compresses and saves the files • Log file of the module that
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial shown in the right column as uses log output API
number folder of the output system] \Log\ LogData_YYYYMMDDhhmms • Log file of image
[Registered date folder] s.LZH *2 processing module
• Log files of printer and
processor
• Log file of scanner
• Watson log file
• Spec log
• Event log
• Error record file
*1
Alt+L C:NoritsukokiLogData Saves the files shown in the right • Log file of the module that
column to the uses log output API
LogData_Main_YYYYMMDD • Log file of image
hhmmss folder*2 processing module
*1. Up to 10 log data are stored on the HDD.
31110 1/2
31110
Maintenance
If the number of log data exceeds 10, the data is deleted from the oldest one.
*2. YYYYMMDDhhmmss is the date when the data was saved.
! If the EZ Controller is not installed (Save log data)

Destination Data format Output data
Click Start LP7000, LP7100, LP7200 Compresses and saves the files • Log file of image
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ shown in the right column as processing module
[Serial number folder of the output system] LogData_YYYYMMDDhhmms • Log files of printer and
\Log\ [Registered date folder] s.LZH *1 processor
3501 PLUS, 3501i PLUS, 3502 PLUS
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial
number folder of the output system] \Log\
[Registered date folder]
3. Mode
*1. YYYYMMDDhhmmss is the date when the data was saved.
31110 2/2
32510
Setup
Setup
Paper Specification Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
NOTE
• For iBeam, Setup→iBeam Setup→Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
3. Mode
M5317-00
! Functions
Model (LASER) Model (iBeam)
☞ Print Check ☞ Print Check
☞ Black Balance Adjustment ☞ Black Balance Adjustment
☞ NCE Mode ☞ NCE Mode
☞ Setup Switch (SP1) ☞ Setup Switch (SP1)
☞ Brightness of the Edge (SP1) ☞ iBeam Tuning (iBeam)
☞ Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ iBeam Engine Check (iBeam) (SP1)
☞ Machine-to-machine variation correction ☞ Forced Pre-Emission (iBeam) (SP1)
☞ Exposure Adjustment (SP1) ☞ Machine-to-machine variation correction
! Explanation
Model Explanation
LASER A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.
iBeam A paper type for setup is registered, setup, iBeam Tuning, iBeam Engine Check and Forced Pre-Emission are
carried out.
! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine Selection

A maximum of six paper types can be registered.
! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the OK The magazine for which paper specification is registered
like
127 (1) or the − The magazine which is registered and for which paper specification is not registered
like
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered
32510 1/5
32510
Setup
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Model Explanation
LASER • Perform Paper Gamma Setup 1 and Black Balance Adjustment for each paper type.
• Two test prints are output; one is 22-step print for Paper Gamma Setup and the other is 22-step print for Black
Balance Adjustment.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup 1 are printed 3 times at most.
iBeam • Perform Paper Gamma Setup 1, iBeam Tuning and Black Balance Adjustment for each paper type.
• For test prints are output; a 22-step print for Paper Gamma Setup, two iBeam Tuning prints and a 22-step print for
Black Balance Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• Functionally unevenness in the test print of black balance adjustment does not matter .
3. Mode
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup 1 are printed 3 times at most.
System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper gamma setup Black Balance Adjustment
1
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm Each unexposed part length: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm Each step length: 12 mm
22 step setup print: 320 mm 22 step setup print: 320 mm
iBeam Tuning (iBeam)
! Functions
• (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Print Check
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed. Then, the system can be checked using the sample prints.
Sample print Explanation Image

Sample 2 A print of sample image with the CMS setting OFF
32510 2/5
32510
Setup
Sample print Explanation Image

Sample 3 A print of letter image
Sample 4*1 The print contains three kind of gray colors.
Sample 5*1 A solid gray print
3. Mode
Sample 6*1 A print of test chart
Sample 7*1
Sample 8*1
*1. (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Black Balance Adjustment

Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the black letters as black.
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.
G068486
! NCE Mode
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be carried out automatically. To
carry out the fine adjustment just a little more, do it by NCE Mode.
• The blur of color around the letters on the print is softened.
See ☞ 32513.
32510 3/5
32510
Setup
G084967
! Setup Switch (SP1)

When the setup switch is ON, high density section is calculated and setup to be the most appropriate Dmax.
When the setup switch is OFF, setup within the range of the colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setup switch, it is necessary to carry out the operation from the initial setup again.
• Normally, the setup switch is ON for use.
! Brightness of the Edge (SP1)

If the print lacks uniformity, you can return the level to the same level of the (gray) print that was shipped with this system.
See ☞ 32514.
1 2
G085142
! Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization (SP1)

• If you initialize the Brightness of the Edge before performing Brightness of the Edge, perform this.
! Machine-to-machine variation correction

• Corrects color difference between printers when two or more printers are connected.
For details, see the Operator's Manual - Additional Operations -.
! Exposure Adjustment (SP1)

If unevenness appears on the print as shown in the illustration below after replacing the laser unit, it can be corrected.
It will be only effective on such unevenness as in the examples below. See ☞ 32515.
Example: before performing exposure adjustment Example: after performing exposure adjustment
Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective
32510 4/5
32510
Setup
! iBeam Tuning (iBeam)

See ☞ 32511.
! iBeam Engine Check (iBeam) (SP1)

See ☞ 32512.
! Forced Pre-Emission (iBeam) (SP1)

Use to remove the gas occurred inside the iBeam unit if the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more.
Be sure to operate the forced pre-emission before the initial setup when installing or replacing the iBeam unit.
IMPORTANT
• If the power supply of the iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more, the system performs Forced Pre-Emission
automatically.
If the power supply of the system turns on and Status Display→Printer Information→iBeam Temperature Status
3. Mode
for Temperature control started is shown for five minutes or more, Forced Pre-Emission is automatically performed.
Wait for 30 minutes until Temperature control started→Temperature control completed is shown.
If Temperature control started→Temperature control completed is shown, you do not have to manually operate
the Forced Pre-Emission in the Paper Specification Registration/Setup.
• If the power supply is reset due to an error during Forced Pre-Emission, it is necessary to manually perform Paper
Specification Registration/Setup→Forced Pre-Emission.
• Frequently operating the forced pre-emission may decrease iBeam unit life.
• To finish the forced pre-emission, approx. 30 minutes are required.
32510 5/5
32511
Setup
iBeam Tuning [iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → iBeam Tuning
Display (iBeam)
3. Mode
! Explanation
! iBeam Tuning
• If the print quality does not become same as that enclosed at the system shipment even by performing iBeam Tuning, perform
iBeam Tuning from Paper Specification Registration/Setup. The print quality returns to the same level as that enclosed at the
system shipment.
Specification of iBeam Tuning

Setup Times of iBeam Tuning
Daily Setup OK appears after one iBeam Tuning operation.
Paper Specification Registration/Setup OK appears after three iBeam Tuning operations.
Initial Setup Then iBeam Tuning can be performed repeatedly.
IMPORTANT
• For iBeam Tuning, A4 Flatbed scanner is necessary. (Use a specified model.)
A3 Flatbed scanner cannot be used. If using A3 Flatbed scanner, remove the A3 Flatbed scanner, then connect
A4 Flatbed scanner to the system.
• Confirm that the flatbed scanner power supply is on.
For the flatbed scanner, it is necessary to wait for four minutes until the light source lamp is stabilized after turning
on the power supply.
If the power is off, wait for four minutes after it is turned on.
Even if the power is on, the glass light may sometimes turn off after the specified time.
If the scanner glass light is off, turn off the flatbed scanner and turn it on again, then wait for four minutes.
For details, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - of the flatbed scanner.
• For iBeam Tuning, be sure to use paper of glossy surface registered in this system.
If non-glossy paper is used, iBeam Tuning may not be performed normally because the paper surface is too
rough.
If you set up paper type 5 or 6
For setup of paper type 5 or 6, paper with the following width cannot be used for iBeam Tuning.
• Paper Type 5
Paper whose width is 89 mm or less cannot be used for iBeam Tuning.
• Paper Type 6
Paper whose width is 102 mm or less cannot be used for iBeam Tuning.
32511 1/4
32511
Setup
NOTE
• Print iBeam Tuning chart with the maximum paper width.
•
• To print iBeam Tuning chart, the system uses two pieces of paper, placing them at positions that are 3.5 mm to the left and to
the right from the normal position. This is because the maximum paper width is still shorter than the light emission section of
the iBeam unit.
• To quit iBeam Tuning and output the test print again due to occurrence of an error/attention during iBeam Tuning, follow the
procedure below.
1. Press the Esc key on the iBeam Tuning display.
2. When Would you like to stop processing? appears, click YES.
• If errors occur during iBeam Tuning, or if there is no improvement in uneven density of color, see ☞ 4480.
• For iBeam, it is not possible to use several 89mm-width paper pieces to fully print iBeam Chart to adjust the iBeam unit,
even though it is possible for the QSS-29 series models.
3. Mode
iBeam unit
210.0 mm
3.5 mm 3.5 mm
203 mm
203 mm
Normal print position

G082070
! Functions
S1251-14-SM00
• iBeam Tuning Data Backup History
Latest five iBeam Tuning data are recorded.
This data is always updated.
Select the desired data to restore the settings.
32511 2/4
32511
Setup
! Adjusting procedure
! iBeam Tuning
IMPORTANT
• Before starting the iBeam Tuning, clean the flatbed scanner glass if it is soiled.
1. Select the paper type that is used in iBeam Tuning.
3. Mode
S1251-13-UM01
2. Click YES: Select.

Test print is made.
The paper type selection display appears again.
3. Click NO: Next if there are not any other paper types to be adjusted.
The Place the Test Print on the Flatbed Scanner. display is shown.
4. If you go on to iBeam Tuning, select the type of paper for iBeam Tuning and click YES: Select.
If you go on to the test print measurement display, click NO: Next.
5. Confirm that the print surface is not dirty using cleaning paper or test print.
• If it is clean, proceed to the next step.
• If it is dirty, continue printing until it becomes clean.
6. The test print measurement display appears.
7. Insert two test prints into the paper holder with the print surface down.
Place the test prints with their arrows pointing toward the far side of the flatbed scanner.
Test print (facing

down)
View from the side
G087902
NOTE
• The positions of the (two) test prints are interchangeable between right and left.
8. Adjust the position of the test prints so that they are at the edge of the paper holder.
Insert your finger into the hole in the

paper holder to push the prints to each
end.
Ends
G087903
32511 3/4
32511
Setup
9. Click Next.
NOTE
• Measure a test print.
• After measuring the test print(s), the result OK or No Good appears for a very short time.
Then, the result of the measurement is automatically registered.
• If the measurement of the test print resulted in No Good, No Good is shown to the maximum of three times.
10. Click Next.
The test print for the paper gamma setup is printed.
Measuring the test print automatically starts.
Measurement result appears.
11. Use Print Check Sample 4 or Sample 5 to verify the print quality.
If it is in the tolerance level
• End
3. Mode
If it is out of the tolerance level
• Repeat iBeam Tuning again.
32511 4/4
32512
Setup
iBeam Engine Check [iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → iBeam Engine
Check
3. Mode
S1251-13-SM01
! Explanation
! iBeam Engine Check

• Diagnosis available for the iBeam Unit if dispersion or unevenness of light intensity occurred at the iBeam unit.
IMPORTANT
• iBeam Engine Check is a mode to diagnose the iBeam unit by measuring iBeam Tuning chart using the flatbed
scanner.
If iBeam Tuning chart has any problem due to deteriorated processing solution, soiled iBeam unit or Exposure
advance unit, or failed adjustment in iBeam setup, it is impossible to diagnose the iBeam unit correctly.
• If errors occur during iBeam Tuning, or if there is no improvement in uneven density of color, see ☞ 4480.
1. Select the paper type that is used in iBeam Engine Check.

2. Press Select.
NOTE
• The system automatically makes test prints.
• iBeam Engine Check test print may have streaks. However, it has no effect on the actual print.
32512 1/3
32512
Setup
3. Mode
M5408-02
4. Confirm that the print surface is not dirty using cleaning paper or test print.
5. Insert two test prints into the paper holder with the print surface down.
Place the test prints with their arrows pointing toward the far side of the flatbed scanner.
Test print (facing

down)
View from the side
G087902
NOTE
• The positions of the (two) test prints are interchangeable between right and left.
6. Adjust the position of the test prints so that they are at the edge of the paper holder.
Insert your finger into the hole in the

paper holder to push the prints to each
end.
Ends
G087903
7. Press the YES:> Next key.

NOTE
• Start the measurement of test print.
32512 2/3
32512
Setup
8. Measurement result appears.
3. Mode
M5409-00
! MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion

• It compares the maximum light intensity and the minimum light intensity for each of B, G, R and then indicates the results in %.
• If the MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 50%, iBeam unit could be defective.
! Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion

• It compares the maximum adjacent light intensity and the minimum adjacent light intensity for each of B, G, R and then indicates
the results in %.
• If the Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 20%, iBeam unit could be defective.
32512 3/3
32513
Setup
NCE Mode [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → NCE Mode
NOTE
• For iBeam, Setup→iBeam Setup→Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
3. Mode
M5402-01
! Explanation
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be carried out automatically. To
carry out the fine adjustment just a little more, do it by NCE Mode.
• The blur of color around the letters on the print is softened.
IMPORTANT
• This NCE Mode is the user mode, however, the service personnel should instruct the user basically when the user
correct in the mode. The reasons are shown below.
• When using the Edit function of this system or Adobe Photoshop (commercial software), there is a case of the blur of
color around the letters is softened when making prints with the color values of letters is B = G = R = 10 or more. So
before correcting in NCE Mode, try it.
If the blur of color is still noticeable, correct in NCE Mode.
• Use this mode only when softening the area around the letters on prints (such as black letters on white or pale
background and white letters on the black background). This does not correct the whole color in prints.
• If the correction is done too much in NCE Mode, the level of high density tends to be lower (D-MAX becomes lower).
• How blurred colors appear changes depending on various condition such as letter's fonts and size, papers that are in
use, and condition of the media correction, DSA correction and processing solutions. So this correction cannot make
same effect on all kinds of letters.
Make correction with a print which is input letters with the most usually used font and size and made with most usually
used paper.
! (Input range: -20.0 to +20.0)

Check the test print and input the correction value.
IMPORTANT
• Correct all CMY colors in the minus direction.
NOTE
• By correcting all YMC colors in the plus direction, the density of black is raised. Check if the correction does not affect on the
area around letters.
32513 1/4
32513
Setup
! F: Function
! Test Print
Make a test print of characters and images.
3. Mode
G084967
NOTE
• Confirm the test print using the loupe.
1. Select the magazine to be corrected.

2. Carry out Test Print of Functions.
3. Check the dot position whether it is moved from the proper position.
Pattern of dot position disorder check
Test Print
G084962
IMPORTANT
• If the dot position of LASER is moved, the correction cannot be done on the NCE Mode. Correct the dot
position by Exposure Magnification Correction/Exposure Position Adjustment/Exposure Magnification Fine
Adjustment.
• Exposure Magnification Correction: ☞ 36020
• Exposure Position Adjustment: ☞ 36030
• Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment: ☞ 36040
4. Check if the white letters/black letters on the test print are not broken.
If the letters are not broken, proceed to Step 5.
IMPORTANT
• The cause of the broken letters is that all color density is high.
32513 2/4
32513
Setup
3. Mode
G084961
• If the letters are broken (all color density is high), check if the dots are broken on Y3, M3 and C3 in the figure.
• Another method is to confirm that the color of K3 did not change.
Pattern of dot position disorder check
High
Low
Density of dots
G084960
NOTE
• The checks by Y3, M3 and C3 are easier than that by Y4, M4 and C4.
• There is another method that compare the thickness of dots of each color using the pattern of dot position disorder check.
5. Check if the color of white letters/black letters are not changed.
If the letter colors are not changed, go to Step 6.
IMPORTANT
• The cause of the color change of letters is that the density balance of each color is lost and either color is high
density.
32513 3/4
32513
Setup
3. Mode
G084961
6. From the check results at Step 4 and Step 5, decide the correction value and enter each color to
change.
• Correct all CMY colors in the minus direction.
• For example, when you want to decrease the B (blue) color, do not increase (plus direction) the Y correction value, but correct M
and C in the minus direction.
7. Click Enter.
8. Check the letters on the prints carefully and correct them if necessary.
IMPORTANT
• The test print is reference. Check the result of correction seeing the actual print.
32513 4/4
32514
Setup
Brightness of the Edge [LASER]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Brightness of the
Edge
! Explanation
! Brightness of the Edge

• If the print lacks uniformity, you can return the level to the same level of the (gray) print that was shipped with this system.
• You can perform Brightness of the Edge only when the paper in use is 203 mm and 210 mm wide.
• Brightness of the Edge does not correct abnormal images that are listed in the Abnormal image countermeasure manual
☞ 4390.
It will be only effective on such unevenness as in the examples below.
3. Mode
Example: Before performing Brightness of the Edge Example: After performing Brightness of the Edge
Edge Brightness Correction is Edge Brightness Correction is Edge Brightness Correction is Edge Brightness Correction is
not effective effective not effective effective
! Brightness of the Edge
1. Confirm that Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup have been
completed.
2. Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
3. Select the paper type to be use for Brightness of the Edge.
M5308-00
32514 1/3
32514
Setup
• You can perform Brightness of the Edge only when the paper in use is 203 mm and 210 mm wide.
4. Pressing Next starts automatic test print.

3. Mode
M5309-02
6. The calibration display of the colorimeter is shown.
M5309-05
7. Click Execute.
8. Confirm that the printing surface of the test print is not dirty.
Conveyor unit
G084909
32514 2/3
32514
Setup
10. Open the processor upper cover.

11. Pull the lever and slowly pull out the unit.
G087885
12. Align the test print with the guide of the front side and insert the test print to the colorimeter.
3. Mode
• Insert the test print straight against the colorimeter.
13. Click Execute.

Measurement of the test print is started.
Guide (front side) Test Print

G084978
14. After measuring the test print, Register the correction values. is shown.
• Press the OK key to access the Paper Type Selection display in Brightness of the Edge.
• Press the Cancel key to stop the Brightness of the Edge operation.
15. On the Paper Type Selection display in Brightness of the Edge, perform Daily Setup for each paper
type to use.
16. Print an image with the same level as that of the (gray) print shipped with this system, then confirm the
print quality.
If it is in the tolerance level
• End
If it is out of the tolerance level
• Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
• Repeat Brightness of the Edge again.
17. Backup the data.
32514 3/3
32515
Setup
Exposure Adjustment [LASER]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Exposure Adjustment
3. Mode
G085371
! Explanation
! Exposure Adjustment (Initial value: both Reddish Line and Bluish Line unselected)
• If unevenness appears on the print as shown in the illustration below after replacing the laser unit, it can be corrected.
• Exposure adjustment does not correct abnormal images that are listed in the Abnormal image countermeasure manual
☞ 4390.
It will be only effective on such unevenness as in the example of images.
Example: before performing exposure adjustment Example: after performing exposure adjustment
Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective
1. Confirm that Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup have been
completed.
2. If either or both Reddish Line or/and Bluish Line at Exposure Adjustment is/are selected, unselect
both, then click OK.
3. Select paper magazine to use for Exposure Adjustment.
32515 1/2
32515
Setup
4. Click Functions→Test Print make a testprint.
G085371
5. Carefully check the testprint and perform adjustment as necessary.

• If the test print has a reddish line on the border of the white area and the gray area, select Reddish Line, then click OK.
• If the test print has a bluish line on the border of the white area and the gray area, select Bluish Line, then click OK.
• If the test print has neither a reddish line or a bluish line on the border of the white area and the gray area, leave both
Reddish Line and Bluish Line unselected.
Test Print
Reddish line Bluish line
3. Mode
G085337
6. End.
7. Backup the data.
32515 2/2
32520
Setup
Magazine Registration/Setup [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
NOTE
• For iBeam, iBeam Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup.
3. Mode
M5318-00
! Explanation
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper gamma setup is carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is also registered.
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine OK The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is completed.
Registration
Magazine − The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is not completed.
Registration
− The magazine not for setup is not registered and the magazine registration setup is not completed.
! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5 to 210 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)
NOTE
• For iBeam, the paper width is from 82.5 to 203 mm.
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm
22 step setup print: 320 mm

G068485
32520 1/2
32520
Setup
IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper Specification Registration/Setup of the paper type needs to be
completed.
NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
! Functions
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
☞ 32510
3. Mode
32520 2/2
32550
Setup
Data Initialization [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization
3. Mode
M5321-00
! Explanation
You can initialize the stored data of the printer, processor or each controller PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, be sure to backup the data.
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored by loading the backup data. ☞ 35400
• Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F] , or ☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in
specific condition after initializing the data.
• For all data, the following data are all initialized.
Item Backup file name Mode or data to be Remarks

initialized
Main PrinterIF.bin Printer I/F Main PCB System Specification information, Option
data Setting information, Operator Selections
information, Laser setup (for LASER), iBeam
setup (for iBeam), other
Printer Printer.bin Printer control PCB data Mechanical Adjustment data, Operator
Selections information, Unit Setting information,
Machine Working Information, other
Processor Proc.bin Processor control PCB Processor Adjustment data, Operator Selections
data information, Unit Setting information, Various
Setting data, Timer Setting data, Twenty-Four-
Hour timer, other
Colorimeter color.bin Each data of Colorimeter Various adjustment data of Colorimeter
LASER Laser.bin Laser control PCB data Each data of Laser (LASER)
iBeam Laser.bin iBeam control PCB data Each data of iBeam unit (iBeam)
Correction Data for LsrSHD_X.bin Shading data of laser (LASER)
Brightness of the Edge of engine
Image Field
iBeam Tuning Data LsrSHD_X.bin iBeam Tuning Data (iBeam)
! Data that are not initialized

Basically, all data are initialized when initialization is performed.
32550 1/2
32550
Setup
However, data below are not initialized.
Data that are not initialized

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Serial Number (Printer/Processor)/Date of shipment, total counter 2, laser operation record (LASER),
exposure adjustment(LASER) and iBeam Record Setting (iBeam)
3. Mode
32550 2/2
33001
Processor Settings
Processor Settings
Print Sensor Adjustment [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Print Sensor Adjustment
LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS LP7200/3502 PLUS
3. Mode
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and set by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Print Sensor Adjustment (Standard value: 150) (Input range: 0 to 255)

It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 254.
! Functions
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Model Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

LP7200/3502 PLUS Print Sensor (Left) Print Sensor (Right)
LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 Print sensor
PLUS
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Confirm that each cover is closed in dryer section.

2. Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not displayed if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is completed normally, OK is displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 254
33001 1/2
33001
Processor Settings
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not completed normally, − is displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 255 or more
• When LED light intensity value of each sensor is 255 and Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is finished
normally, the following error is shown.
☞ No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. is shown.
3. Mode
33001 2/2
33002
Processor Settings
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5466-00
! Explanation
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to set the standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
! Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 500.0 mL/m2)

The standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA, P2RB and PSR can be specified on the Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.
• In the replenishment package or process specification change, change the standard replenishment amount only when the instruction
for changing the standard replenishment amount arrives from the manufacturer.
• Do not change the standard replenishment amount without the instruction from the manufacturer.
33002 1/1
33003
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam]

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• [For N and SM specifications, see ☞ Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] [LASER, iBeam].
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5467-00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

By Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured, and the measured
values are entered.
! F: Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output amount.
• Do not return the replenishment solution used for measuring the output amount to the replenishment tank because this amount is
subtracted from the total replenishment solution amounts.
! Mixing Replenisher
There are two functions in Manual Open: creating replenishment solution and resetting the remaining amount of the replenishment
solution.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors, ☞ No. 00912[F] is shown if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing Mixing
Replenisher with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
At this time, the remaining amount of replenishment solution is reset.
• ☞ No. 00913[F] occurs if performing Mixing Replenisher with # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor on (EXCEPT FOR
the case that all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on, which is the state of
solution filled).
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher.
33003 1/3
33003
Processor Settings
! Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

You can remove the remaining air in the hose by operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB
Replenisher Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• Exhausting the air from PSR replenisher pump is performed when exhausting the air at Auto Cleaning.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Pump).
3. Mode
33003 2/3
33003
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
For [N] display For [SM] display
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

In Pump Output Amount Setting via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured and compared with the set
values.
! F: Functions
• SP1: Enter the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the pump output amount measurement of Functions, amount remaining
is subtracted.

After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33003 3/3
33004
Processor Settings
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5468-00
! Explanation
! Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)
Measure the output amount of Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump in Functions, and enter the measured values.
! Functions
! Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount (Initial value:P1: 82.5 ml, P2: 60ml, PS: 120 ml)
Use this function to measure the output amount of the cleaning water of P1/P2/PS.
• There is no problem even if the output amount difference of the cleaning water is ±20% compared with the initial value of cleaning
water of P1/P2/PS.

You can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Auto Cleaning Pump).
! Adjustment (Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount)
1. Spread a cloth or the like over the processor top.

When removing the hose of automatic cleaning pipe, the water in the hose comes out. Spread a cloth from the lower
processor top cover to upper processing tank to prevent water from getting into the processing tank.
33004 1/5
33004
Processor Settings
2. Remove the hose of automatic cleaning pipe used for measuring the output of the processing solution
at the connection part.
IMPORTANT
• Water comes out from the hose of automatic cleaning pipe. Be careful not to get in the water in the processing
tank to prevent the contamination.
• The output amount measurement hoses are used for each processing solution hose. Be careful not to use the
different processing solution hose. When the different processing solution hose is used for measuring the
output, replenishment operation is not carried out correctly.
3. Mode
Connection
For PS3/PS4
(The label is PS-2W)
For PS1/PS2
For P1 For P2
(The label is PS-1 W) G084993
For P1/P2 For PS1/PS2

(The label is PS-1 W)
For PS3/PS4
(The label is PS-2W)
The shape of the hose end for P1/P2 is

different from other hoses.
G085348
3. Connect the measurement hose to the connection part which removed the hose at the step 2.
There are three types in measurement hose: P1/P2, PS1/PS2 and PS3/PS4.
Measure the output amount after removing the water inside the hose completely.
When measuring the output amount for PS, get water from the hose for PS1/PS2 and PS1/PS2 to the same measuring
container.
33004 2/5
33004
Processor Settings
4. Prepare the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose.
IMPORTANT
• Water comes out. Be careful not to get in the water in the processing tank to prevent the contamination.
3. Mode
Measurement hose
Prepare the measuring container to get water from the outlet.
G084994
5. Return the dryer section to the original position.

NOTE
• The pump will not operate until the dryer section is returned to the original position.
6. Measure the pump output amount.
(1) Confirm that the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose is ready.
Hold the hose so that it will not

come off the measuring container.
Measurement hose
Measuring container
G089655
(2) Carry out the output.

There are two types for carrying out the output.
When carrying out the output with the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch)
Press the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch).
33004 3/5
33004
Processor Settings
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.
Manual sorter switch
3. Mode
G084937
When carrying out the output on the display monitor

Click YES: Execute.
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution does not come out from the exit of the replenishment pipe, the pipe may
contain the air. In this case, repeat the procedure of output until the replenishment solution comes out, and
dispose the replenishment solution as effluent after coming out the replenishment solution and measure the
output amount again.
7. Measure the water amount discharged to the measuring container and write down the amount.
If the pump is activated once, the output is carried out at one time. The output cannot be divided in several times. Confirm the
completion of the output and measure the output amount.
8. After measuring the output amount, dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as
effluent.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as effluent and not to put it in the
processing tank.
9. Measure the output amount three times or more on a processing solution and calculate the average
amount.
The first output amount is unstable. Measure the average amount at the measured value after second output amount.
Repeat the procedure from Step 4 to Step 8 three times or more and calculate the average amount. When measuring the
output amount of other processing solution continuously, wipe the measuring container and remove the water completely.
10. Click NO: Cancel.

The screen returns to the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting display.
11. Change the output amount measured on the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting screen
to the average amount calculated on Step 9.
33004 4/5
33004
Processor Settings
12. Click YES: OK.

The output amount is registered.
13. Remove the measuring hose.
14. Reconnect the hose of automatic cleaning pipe.
IMPORTANT
• Set the connection part of hoses to the position shown the illustration below to prevent the hoses from being
caught when you close the processor upper cover.
• Be sure to connect the appropriate hose for each processing solution hose. If the hose is connected to other
processing solution hose, the replenishment is carried out to the different processing solution tank.
3. Mode
Push the hose into the space.
Position the hoses to the U-shaped pitted area.
G084995
33004 5/5
33030
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [F] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
M5470-00
• Clear of Replenishment Lack Time appears if you enter the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount

Accumulated replenishment amount for each pump is displayed.
! Replenishment Lack Time

Replenishment is stopped if the effluent tank is full or an error occurs. However, if paper is being processed at that moment, the system
can continue processing the paper. Based on the amount of the processed paper, the amount of the replenishment solution shortfall will
be accumulated as Replenishment Lack Time so that such shortfall during lack time will be replenished after the effluent is removed
or the error is cleared.
! Clear
Resets each data.
33030 1/1
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] [LASER, iBeam]

• For SM, see ☞ Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] [LASER, iBeam].
! Display
3. Mode
M5435-00
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount

The total replenishment amount can be checked.
! Replenishment Lack Time

The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment Lack Time is
accumulated according to the paper amount which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry out the replenishment after
the error is released.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message appears and the process stops after the replenishment lack time reaches
600 seconds.
! Clear (SP1)
Clear the value which is accumulated.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display the clear button.
33040 1/3
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
3. Mode
M5463-01
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00 to 99999.99 mL)

The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.
! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity) (Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining amount.
When replacing the package before the replenishment package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value. (Initial value:
Package Capacity)
! Package Capacity
The package capacity which has been set in the Package Capacity Setting via Functions is displayed.
! Functions
• SP3: Enter the service personnel password (2260) to display this.
! Package Capacity Setting (SP3)
$ Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%) (Input range: -50 to +50%)
When the percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment
package capacity became smaller than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709 Replenishment Package
solution remaining error. occurs.
☞ No. 05708[SM]
$ Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL)
Set the replenishment solution amounts for the replenishment packages.
33040 2/3
33040
Processor Settings
! SM Forced Replenishment Setting (SP3)
$ SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 mL)
SM Forced Replenishment Setting
(standard processing)
CD-A 42.42
CD-B 42.42
CD-C 60.6
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0
This is the limit amount when carrying out forced replenishment.
3. Mode
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the initial value of the forced replenishment amount.
$ Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump operates replenishment with the value input in Forced
Replenishment Amount Setting is displayed.
33040 3/3
33060
Processor Settings
Correction Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction Setting
3. Mode
M5464-00
! Explanation
! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased depending on the paper process amount.
! Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without changing the value
of Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating environment of the system.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing
Amount).
Refer to ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
33060 1/1
33070
Processor Settings
Counter [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Counter
3. Mode
M5446-00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display .
! Explanation
! Replenishment Counter (Input range: 0 to 999999)

The number of tablets that have been dropped can be checked and set.
! Water supply Counter (Input range: 0.0 to 9,999.9 ml)

The total water supply amount can be checked and set.
! Reservoir Count (Input range: 0 to Drop Limit)

The number of insufficient tables to be replenished for the amount of paper that has been processed since last tablet replenishment can
be checked and set.
If any of the following errors occurred, the tablet replenishment is to be canceled.
(Error)
05600-05602 Tablet Drum operation error.
05603-05605 A tablet has jammed.
05609-05611 Printing cannot continue without replenishment.
05612 Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.
(Attention)
00600-00602 The Tablet Cartridge is empty.
00605-00607 Attach the Tablet Cartridge.
00608 Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, enter 0 with the key.
! Water Supply Reservoir Amount

The insufficient water supply amount for the amount of paper that has been processed since last water supply can be checked and set.
Water supply amount is accumulated every time when printing is processed.
If any of the following errors occurred, the water supply is to be canceled.
NOTE
• Water supply reservoir amount is display only. You cannot input any value.
(Attention)
0603 Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
33070 1/2
33070
Processor Settings
0604 Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

0610 Empty the Effluent Tank.
! Kit Remains
A B C D E F G H
3. Mode
S4102-01-SM00
Symbol Explanation
A Processing solution
B The number of the remaining cartridges per kit
C The number of the cartridges per kit
D The number of remaining tablets per cartridge
E The number of tablets per cartridge
F The number of remaining tablets per kit is displayed
or can be changed.
G The number of tablets per kit
H Based on the remaining tablets of CD, the calculated
numbers of remaining tablets that is required for BF
and STB are displayed.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display "H".
! Functions
! Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset (SP1)

If Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset is carried out, the water supply reservoir amounts for CD, BF and STB is initialized.
33070 2/2
33500
Processor Standard Setting
Thermosensor Calibration [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
M5439-00
! Explanation
NOTE
! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and enter the measured values.
! Correction Value
After entering the measured temperature, the correction value, subtracting the displayed temperature from the measured temperature,
will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the thermosensor is displayed.
33500 1/1
33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [F] [LASER, iBeam]

• [For the [N], [SM] and [J], see ☞ Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM][J] [LASER, iBeam].
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5472-00
z Explanation
• Do not change the Cleaning Water Amount Setting unless instructed to do by the manufacture.
• The Cleaning Water Amount Setting can be changed by service personnel if the processing solution specification is changed.
z P1 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 0.40) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
z P2 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 1.50) (input range: from 0.1 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
z PS Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 3.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
z Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 15.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the stop time of the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.
z Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 8.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump starts discharging until the drive motor starts.
z Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump finishes discharging until the drive motor stops.
z Cleaning Valve ON Wait Time (Initial value: 1.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 2.00 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump turns on until P1, P2, PS automated cleaning valves open.
33501 1/2
33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM][J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5441-00
z Explanation
z Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial value: 8.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.
z Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the stop time of the cleaning pump.
z Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 8.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the cleaning pump starts the output operation.
z Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the cleaning pump finishes the output operation.
33501 2/2
33502
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting
3. Mode
M5443-00
! Explanation
! Drive Motor Setting Value (Standard value: 216)

The setting count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Drive Motor Revolution Count

The present count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Functions
! Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is adjusted automatically.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine type registration of the machine specification has been changed, it is
adjusted.
33502 1/1
33503
Display Processor Working Information [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Display Processor Working Information
3. Mode
M5473-00
! Explanation
! Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts

• You can confirm Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts.
! Pump Operation Counts

• You can check operation counts of each replenishment pump in 100 times.
! Processor Drive Time

• The time period of drive motor can be confirmed.
! Clear
Clear the value which is accumulated.
33503 1/1
33504
Processor Set Up Mode [F] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
3. Mode
M5474-00
! Explanation
• If air in the auto cleaning pump is not exhausted during installation, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged. Be sure to perform
Processor Set Up Mode in the above order.
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump)
S4509-00-SM01
• At the installation, you can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump,P1 Auto Cleaning Valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto
Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump), press Cancel.
• If the air in the hose cannot be exhausted even though after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump),
exhaust the air by operating the pump of hose that the air remains by Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount via F:
Functions from Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting, or Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions from
Pump Output Amount Setting.
! Mixing Replenisher
S4509-00-SM02
• There are two functions in Manual Operation: creating replenishment solution and the resetting the remaining amount of the
replenishment solution.
33504 1/2
33504
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump)
S4509-00-SM03
• After operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump for a specified time, the air
remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If air cannot be exhausted from hoses after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), activate the
appropriate pumps and remove the air inside using Functions Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount
Setting.
3. Mode
33504 2/2
33505
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup)
Display (LASER, iBeam) Illustration (LASER, iBeam)
Normal Print
3. Mode
Auto Setup (Test print)
! Explanation
• The settings of Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) are applied to the following setups.
• Initial Setup
• Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• Daily Setup (Auto Setup inclusive)
• Magazine Registration/Setup
• Paper Setup
• Emulsion Number Change
! Temperature Setting (Initial value: 80°C) (input range: from 63 to 85 °C)

• The dryer temperature can be specified for setup.
! Print Start Setting

• Temperature at which to start setup (test print) and setup timing can be specified.
• Normally, the initial value is used in Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup).
However, in the high-humidity environment, the test print of setup does not completely get dry and the paper sticks to the guide of
the dryer rack, then ☞ No. 05535Paper has jammed in the processor section. is shown. In such a case, change each setting.
• Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) is valid only when setup is performed.
The dryer temperature of normal print is adjusted in Dryer Temperature Setting.
! (Initial value: 60°C) (Input range: 60 to Temperature Setting −3 °C)

• The dryer temperature can be specified to start the Waiting Time of Print Start Setting.
33505 1/2
33505
! Waiting Time (Initial value: 90 seconds) (Input range: 90 to 999 seconds)

• The time to start advancing the Auto Setup (Test print) can be specified after the dryer temperature reached the Dryer
Temperature of Print Start Setting.
Example: Temperature Setting (80°C), Dryer Temperature (60°C), Waiting Time (90 seconds)
Example: dryer temperature set to 30°C at the start of printing
Dryer temperature adjustment starts with 30°C Dryer Temperature: 60°C
Waiting Time (90 seconds) Start After 90 seconds, printing starts

G085949
Example: dryer temperature set to 70°C at the start of printing

Dryer temperature adjustment starts with 70°C
3. Mode
Waiting Time (0 seconds) Start
After 0 seconds, printing starts
G085949
NOTE
• If the temperature already reaches at the specified dryer temperature for starting setup printing, printing starts immediately.
33505 2/2
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] [LASER, iBeam]

• For SM, see ☞ Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam].
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5440-00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for iBeam.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Setting 1 (standard processing)
CD-W 140.0 81.0
BF-W 173.0 47.0
STB1-W 230.0 41.0
STB2-W 78.0 47.0
STB3-W 76.0 44.0
STB4-W 150.0 72.0
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is
set to ON. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting2

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level ON. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
33510 1/3
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for iBeam.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Setting 1 (standard processing)
Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low
Humidity)
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount)
CD 118.0 60.0
BF 160.0 26.0
STB1 122.0 41.0
STB2 76.0 47.0
STB3 62.0 44.0
STB4 142.0 51.0
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is
set to ON. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level ON. This setting is valid when the Refilling Water Level
2 of Correction Setting has been set to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
33510 2/3
33510
$ Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction Setting
for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing Amount)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Processing Amount for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction
Setting for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
Each refilling water amount can be set according to the amount of evaporation when processing amount is low (for
each machine or time of year).
IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Processing
Amount) are the same as that of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not change them.
If it is necessary to change the settings, the setting values are specified.
3. Mode
33510 3/3
33520
Basic Kit Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Basic Kit Setting
3. Mode
M5450-00
! Explanation
! Kit Processing Amount Setting (initial value: 388.8) (input range: 0.1 to 999.9 m2)
The paper area that can be processed per kit can be set.
! Kit Water Supply Setting (initial value: 0.01 to 327.67 L)

The water supply amount that is required per kit can be changed.
CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 19.05
BF 15.55
STB 58.32
! Drop Limit Setting (initial value CD:4, BF:8, STB:8) (input range: 0 to the number of tablets in the
cartridge)
If the tablet kit is finished, Tablet Operation will be performed. (The rest of the tablets will be dropped at once.)
A limit value for the number of tablets that can be dropped at that time can be set.
If the number of the tablets exceeds the set value (drop limit setting), 609: The Tablet kit is empty. appears.
! Total Cartridge Count (initial value: 1 to 99)

The number of cartridges per kit can be set.
CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 4
BF 10
STB 2
! Number of tablets in the cartridge (initial value CD:40, BF:40, STB:20)

The number of tablets per cartridge can be set.
IMPORTANT
• Changes to the kit processing amount setting, kit water supply setting, drop limit setting, total cartridge count, or the
number of tablets in the cartridge setting will not be applied until the kit ends.
33520 1/1
33530
Kit Correction [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Kit Correction
3. Mode
M5451-00
! Explanation
! Auto Low Processing Correction (initial value: ON), Correction Rate (initial value: 30) (input range: 0
to 99 %), Detection (initial value: 2.02) (input range: 0.01 to 9.99 m2)
Correction Rate and Detection is to be effective only when the Auto Low Processing Correction is ON.
This function corrects the tablet drop and water supply cycle automatically while low print processing. If it is ON, and the day
continues for one week when the accumulated processing amount per day (paper processing area) is smaller than that of detected auto
low processing correction, the correction rate is to be effective from the eighth day. However, if processing in more value than the
setting is performed for more than two consecutive days, it is to return to the normal processing from the third day.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Correction Rate or Detection of Auto Low Processing Correction is changed, the changes are not
to be effective until the kit ends.
! Replenishment Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the tablet drop cycle. The setting of large value makes drop cycle fast and that of small value makes it slow.
! Water Supply Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the water supply cycle. The setting of large value makes water supply cycle fast and that of small value makes it
slow.
33530 1/1
33540
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam]

3. Mode
M5452-00
! Explanation
! Environment Setting (Initial value: (1) 12-2 (2) 3-5 (3) 6-8 (4) 9-11 ) (Input range: 1 to 12)
A year can be divided into 4 environments and their periods can be set for the evaporation refill.
NOTE
• If any of 12 months is not set, it cannot be registered even if Enter is clicked.
Example: (1) 1-6 (2) 8-12
In this case, it cannot be registered because July is missing.
• Clicking Environment Setting Cancel initializes the value.
! Environment Correction Setting (Input range: 0 to 4)

The magnification of Evaporation Refill Amount can be set for each environment.
Magnification
No. Working Not working
0 0.0 1.0
1 0.6 0.6
2 1.0 1.0
3 1.4 1.4
4 Free setting Free setting
Magnification Condition
0.0 No refilling water
0.6 Humid condition
1.0 Standard condition
1.4 Dry condition
NOTE
• The value can be set freely for No.4. (input range: 0.0 to 9.9)
! Basic Evaporation Refill Amount (Input range: 0.0 to 99.9 ml)

The value for Evaporation Refill Amount can be set freely for both Working and Not Working.
33540 1/2
33540
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Basic Evaporation Refill Amount is changed, the changes are not to be effective until the kit ends.
3. Mode
33540 2/2
33550
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5453-00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200 ml)

Measure the pump output amount in Pump Output Amount Measurement in Functions, and check the measured value.
! Functions

Be sure to measure the output amount when installing it.
If the output amount setting is not appropriate, the water supply or replenishment operation is not carried out properly.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump, refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can
be extracted.
To cancel the initial replenishment, click Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33550 1/1
33560
Operation Check [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Operation Check
3. Mode
M5454-00
! Explanation
Operation Checks of Tablet Sensor 1 and 2 can be carried out.
! Functions
! Dropping Tablet
One dropping tablet operation is carried out for the selected chemical.
Conditions of tablet sensor 1 and 2 in dropping tablet are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The number of the dropped tablet in Dropping Tablet is not to be subtracted from the number of remaining tablets.
! Home Operation
When Either tablet sensor 1 or 2 is close, Home Operation of the drum can be carried out for the selected chemical.
IMPORTANT
• When carrying out Home Operation, be sure to remove the cartridges.
33560 1/1
33570
Manual Kit Change [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Manual Kit Change
3. Mode
M5455-00
! Explanation
! Manual Kit Change

When carrying out Manual Kit Change, the following values are to be initialized (setting value).
• Kit Correction Amount
• Kit Water Supply Amount Setting
• Kit Remains
• Drop Limit Setting
• Total Cartridge Count
• Tablets Per Cartridge
• Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
NOTE
• When setting value is changed, the new setting is to be effective from the time when the manual kit change or kit end is carried
out, or kit end error occurs.
33570 1/1
35100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
M5372-00
! Explanation
To measure each step such as test print correctly by colorimeter, correct the paper stop position and the error of feeding rollers.
NOTE
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the paper front end to the measurement position.
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

When the test is executed, the paper with 345 mm is advanced to the bottom of the paper advance unit.
! Paper Test Advance

Adjust the colorimeter unit.
! Cleaning operation
Use the densitometer cleaning sheet and clean the colorimeter unit advance roller.
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction, Advance Length Correction
1. Carry out Test Paper Advance of Functions.

2. Open printer doors 1, 2, and then remove the test paper from the bottom of the paper advance unit.
35100 1/3
35100
Maintenance
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 116 mm away from the test paper edge, then the second line at 201
mm away from the first position.
First line Second line

G068475
4. Slide the dryer section.

3. Mode
6. Insert test paper with the first line into the colorimeter.
When inserting test paper into the colorimeter, insert it straight against the colorimeter.
1 2
Test paper
G085057
7. Execute Paper Test Advance via Functions.

8. Press the OK key.
The test paper stops at the first line.
35100 2/3
35100
Maintenance
9. Press the Forward or Backward so that the first line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
Colorimeter guide
1 2
3. Mode
First line
G085058
10. Press the OK key to advance the test paper to the second line.
11. Press the Forward or Backward so that the second line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
12. Press the OK key to remove the test paper.
! Colorimeter cleaning
1. Slide the dryer section.

3. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.
4. Insert cleaning sheet into the colorimeter.
5. Press the OK key.
The cleaning sheet is fed to the colorimeter.
6. The cleaning sheet is ejected.
35100 3/3
35210
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer) [Laser, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer
! Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Supply ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)
Paper Magazine Code ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Code A)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit B)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit B2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section (LASER)
3. Mode
☞ Exposure Engine Section (iBeam)
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK When paper is detected.
2
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.
7 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
9 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Roller Position Sensor DARK The roller unit moves inside of the printer.
(only for iBeam)
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Code A)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
35210 1/3
35210
Maintenance
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit B)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK When paper is detected.
3. Mode
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit B2)

No. Display Status
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine B2 Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B2 DARK When paper is detected.
Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK Pressure roller 1 is being pressed moving
from the status in which paper pressure is
released.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK Pressure roller 2 and 3 are being pressed
moving from the status in which paper
pressure is released.
4 DARK/LIGHT Exposure End Sensor DARK When paper is detected.
5 ##.#C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
Exposure Engine Section (LASER)

Display Status
2 Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchro Normal
nchronous nous When the polygon mirror rotates properly
Asynchr Problem
onous When the polygon mirror does not rotate
properly
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
35210 2/3
35210
Maintenance
Display Status
3 Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchro When the polygon mirror is synchronous
nchronous*1 nous and either of R/G/B laser or all lasers
is/are emitting
Asynchr When the polygon mirror is
onous asynchronous
When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser or all lasers
is/are not emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B lasers are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity whether
synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking for any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310
4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
3. Mode
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G laser driver is not connected
correctly, or is damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being
deteriorated, add the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the current value
exceeds the limitation.
5 ##.#C R Laser Thermosensor The temperature of R laser is shown.
6 ##.#C B laser temperature sensor The temperature of the B laser is shown.
7 ##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor The temperature of the laser unit is shown.
8 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates properly
- When the polygon mirror does not rotate
properly
9 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the
10 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF laser unit type.
For details, see ☞ Exposure Engine
Section (2) (LASER).
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five minutes or more for the Laser Synchronous Sensor to turn from
Asynchronous to Synchronous.
Exposure Engine Section (iBeam)

Display Status
1 ##.#°C iBeam Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of iBeam unit.
NOTE
• The system does not control the temperature for iBeam Unit Thermosensor.
Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor*1 DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Turn Sensor DARK When the turn unit is in the paper transfer
position.
*1. Lane Select Sensor is not available for LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and 3501 PLUS.
35210 3/3
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor tab
For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER,
iBeam] iBeam] iBeam]
! Input Check
3. Mode
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Processor Section (3) (for each
(for each specification) (for each specification) specification)
N ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
SM ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Processor ☞ Processor
Section (3) Section (4)
J ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Tablet
Replenishment
Section
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor Section (1) (for each specification)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05508 occurs.
2 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
3 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
4 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05916[F]occurs.*1
5 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05917[F]occurs.*1
6 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05918[F]occurs.*1
10 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
11 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON
12 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
13 ON/OFF Control strip holder detection switch*2 ON When the control strip holder is detected
*1. If the processable level sensors for each processing solution are OFF, the system stops printing to prevent the time that paper is soaked from
becoming short and printing quality from degrading.
*2. It may take one minute for communicating between the processor control PCB and control strip unit.
35220 1/9
35220
Maintenance

No. Display Status
*3
1 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete. • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.
• OFF: Advancing the control strip is not
completed.
2 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
3 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
4 #.## P1 Flow Amount Displays the P1 circulation amount.*2
5 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays "OK" when all circulation pump is rotating normally.

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (P1, P2, PS1, PS2, PS3, and PS4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is shown in the order from P1.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
3. Mode

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
Sensor
2 ON/OFF P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
3 ON/OFF P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
4 ON/OFF P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
5 ON/OFF P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
6 ON/OFF P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
7 ON/OFF PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
8 ON/OFF PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ON When the cover is closed.
10 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor DARK When the replenish cartridge is set
11 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
upper position
12 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
lower position
13 #.# Environment Temperature Displays the temperature and humidity in the place
14 #.# Environment Humidity where the temperature and humidity sensor is
attached.
Refer to ☞ 61050 for the installation position of the
temperature and humid sensor.
Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is turned
off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
35220 2/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK When paper is detected.
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Print sensor
(LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
5 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Home Sensor DARK Home position: when placing at the
position to feed paper to the print conveyor
Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor*1 DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor*1 DARK When paper is detected.
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK
35220 3/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,
! Explanation
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor Section (1)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF
*1
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level*1 OFF
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level*1 OFF
*1
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the rack stopper is fixed, when
the processor top cover is closed
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is
available only for iBeam.)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
2 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch*1 ON
4 ON/OFF Control strip holder detection switch*4 ON When the control strip holder is
detected
5 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete.*4 • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.
completed.
8 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*3
35220 4/9
35220
Maintenance
*1. When the Three Effluents Collection Unit is selected optionally, BF Effluent Float Switch and STB Effluent Float Switch are displayed.
When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
3. Mode
35220 5/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,

No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is available
only for iBeam.)

No. Display Status
*4
completed.
35220 6/9
35220
Maintenance

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
3. Mode
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
2 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON
3 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
35220 7/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,

No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF

No. Display Status
*4
completed.

Tablet Replenishment Section

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
2 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
3 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 1 DARK
4 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
5 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 1 DARK
6 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
7 DARK/LIGHT CD Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
8 DARK/LIGHT BF Cartridge Sensor LIGHT
9 DARK/LIGHT STB Cartridge Sensor LIGHT
35220 8/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

10 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Upper Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
11 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Middle Sensor DARK
12 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Lower Sensor DARK
3. Mode
35220 9/9
35310
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer) [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer
! Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Supply Unit 1 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
Paper Supply Unit 2 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)
Magazine Unit ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section (1) (LASER)
☞ Exposure Engine Section (2) (LASER)
3. Mode
☞ Exposure Engine Section (iBeam)
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press Execute to operate for specified time.
2 Paper Supply Motor A
3 Paper Supply Motor B
4 Cut Motor Press Execute to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
6 Roller Move Motor Press Execute to move the printer repeatedly to front and
(only for iBeam) rear.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)

2 Ribbon Advance Motor Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 Dot Head (1st Line) Press Execute to operate once.
4 Dot Head (2nd Line)
5 Paper Hold Motor Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
6 Paper Supply Arm Motor Press Execute to repeat the forward/backward operation.
7 Buzzer Press Execute to sound buzzer.
Press Cancel to turn off the buzzer.
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit)

1 Paper Supply Motor B Press Execute to operate for specified time.
2 Paper Supply Motor B2
3 Guide Roller Motor
4 Paper Magazine Lamp B Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
Exposure Advance Unit

1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press Execute to operate for specified time.
35310 1/3
35310
Maintenance

2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press Execute to operate for specified time.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
Exposure Engine Section (1) (LASER)

1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press Execute to stop the polygon mirror.
Press Cancel to start the polygon mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press Execute to turn on the laser unit heater.
Press Cancel to turn off the laser unit heater.
3. Mode
Exposure Engine Section (2) (LASER)
1 R Laser Output ON Press Execute to turn on the R laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the R laser output.
2 G Laser Output ON*1 Press Execute to turn on the G laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the G laser output.
3 B Laser Output ON Press Execute to turn on the B laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the B laser output.
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five minutes or more for the G Laser Output ON to turn from Asynchronous to
Synchronous after performing G Laser Output ON.
Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate
nous properly
• When turning OFF the polygon mirror
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G laser driver is not connected correctly, or
is damaged.
##.#C R Laser Thermosensor The temperature of R laser is shown.
For the controlled temperature of R laser, see ☞ No. 06107.
##.#C B laser temperature sensor The temperature of the B laser is shown.
For the controlled temperature of B laser, see ☞ No. 06220.
##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor The temperature of the laser unit is shown.
The controlled temperature of the laser unit, see
☞ No. 06177.
35310 2/3
35310
Maintenance
Display Status
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF unit type.
See the list below for details.
Laser unit (Type # # #) G laser differentiation signal

1 2
HhB type OFF OFF
Exposure Engine Section (iBeam)
3. Mode
1 R iBeam Output ON Press Execute to turn on R iBeam Output.
Press Cancel to turn off R iBeam Output.
2 G iBeam Output ON Press Execute to turn on G iBeam Output.
Press Cancel to turn off G iBeam Output.
3 B iBeam Output ON Press Execute to turn on B iBeam Output.
Press Cancel to turn off B iBeam Output.
NOTE
• You can confirm the each R, G and B emission condition of iBeam with the printer door open.
2 Paper advance pressure change motor Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
3 Lane select motor *1 Press Execute to switch among the selection sensor position -
> left selection position -> selection position center -> right
selection position.
4 Paper advance arm motor Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
5 Turn motor Press Execute to switch between the paper receiving position
and the standby position.
*1. Lane select motor is not available for LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and 3501 PLUS.
35310 3/3
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor tab
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER,
iBeam] [LASER, iBeam] iBeam]
! Output Check
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Processor Section (3) (for each
3. Mode
(for each specification) (for each specification) *2 specification) *6
N ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
SM ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Processor Section (3)
J ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) ☞ Tablet ☞ Tablet
Replenishment Replenishment
Section (1) Section (2)
Dryer Section common to all ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification specifications ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
! Explanation
1 Drive Motor Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 P1 Heater
3 P2 Heater
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*1 Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*1
12 Signal Lamp
13 Control Strip Advance Motor • Execute: Control Strip Advance Motor starts.
• Cancel: Control Strip Advance Motor does not stop.
Processor Section (2) (for each specification) *2

1 Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor See ☞ Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation.
35320 1/7
35320
Maintenance

2 P1R Replenisher Pump Press Execute moves each replenishment pump one stroke
3 P2RA Replenisher Pump (maximum). *1
4 P2RB Replenisher Pump IMPORTANT
5 PSR Replenisher Pump • If each replenishment pump is operated, the initial
value is used for the next opening.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, the replenishment pump does not work.
*2. SP1: Enter the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation

Count Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation
First Press Execute to move the motor from the upper position to the lower position. *1
Second Press Execute to move the motor from the lower position to the upper position. *2
3. Mode
*1. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to right.
*2. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to left.
Processor Section (3) (for each specification) *6

1 P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Press Execute to operate each cartridge flushing valve and
Cartridge Cleaning Pump auto cleaning pump. *1*2*5
2 P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
3 P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each cartridge flushing valve (maximum 10
seconds).
• 4. Close each cartridge cleaning valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge
cleaning pump is about 205 ml per 10 seconds.
4 P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Press Execute to operate P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Cleaning Pump Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump. *1*3
• Follow the steps 1-4 below.
• 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
• 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
• 3. Open P1R agitation solenoid valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close P1R agitation solenoid valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• If P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump is operated, the initial
value is used for the next opening.
• The output amount of P1R agitation solenoid
valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump is
about 214 ml per 3 seconds.
35320 2/7
35320
Maintenance

5 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Press Execute to operate each automated flushing valve and
Cleaning Pump auto cleaning pump. *1*4
6 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
7 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each automated flushing valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close each automated flushing valve. → Turn OFF
the cleaning pump.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, each automated flushing valve does not work.
However, auto cleaning pump works regardless of the waste solution float switch. If the operation continues when either of waste solution float
switches is ON, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged.
*2. When pressing Execute, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the Replenisher
3. Mode
Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For details, refer
to the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*3. When pressing Execute, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be run
into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*4. When pressing Execute, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be run
into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*5. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output
Check without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
*6. SP1: Enter the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

1 Dryer Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1
3 Dryer Heater 2
4 Dryer Heater 3
5 Dryer Lane Select Motor Press Execute to stop at the position to feed paper to the
colorimeter -> Repeats stopping at the position to feed paper
to the conveyor unit
Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

*1
1 Sorter Motor Press Execute to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
4 Order Identification LED (Orange)*1 Press Execute to turn on Order Identification LED (Orange).
5 Order Identification LED (Cyan)*1 Press Execute to turn on Order Identification LED (Cyan).
Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

1 Paper Advance Motor Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 Calibration Plate Advance Motor
3 Pressure Change Solenoid
4 Colorimeter Cooling Fan
35320 3/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, iBeam]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,
[LASER, iBeam] iBeam] iBeam]
! Explanation
3. Mode
2 CD Heater
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan

1 CD Replenisher Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 BF Replenisher Pump
3 STB Replenisher Pump
4 CD-W Refilling Water Pump*1
5 BF-W Refilling Water Pump*1
6 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump*1
10 Cleaning Pump*1
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is
available only for iBeam.)
35320 4/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,

2 CD Heater
3. Mode
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan

1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.

1 STB Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
2 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump*1 Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
5 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump
6 Cleaning Pump*1
7 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
only for iBeam.)
35320 5/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] [LASER, ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F] [LASER,
iBeam] [LASER, iBeam] iBeam]

2 CD Heater
3. Mode
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*1 Press Execute to turn ON, and Cancel to turn OFF.
12 Control Strip Advance Motor • Execute:Control Strip Advance Motor starts.
• Cancel:Control Strip Advance Motor does not stop.

1 CD Water Supply Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 S -> B Replenishment Pump
3 STB Water Supply Pump
4 Cleaning Pump*1
only for iBeam.)
Tablet Replenishment Section (1)

1 CD Operation Lamp Press Execute to turn ON, and Cancel to turn OFF.
2 BF Operation Lamp
3 STB Operation Lamp
4 Elevator Motor (Up) Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop. Temporarily stops
if detected by the elevator middle sensor. When two seconds
passes, starts again. When detected by the elevator upper
sensor, stops.
5 Elevator Motor (Down) Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop. Stops when
detected by the elevator lower sensor.
35320 6/7
35320
Maintenance
Tablet Replenishment Section (2)

1 CD Drum Motor (Forward) Press Execute to operate once.
2 CD Drum Motor (Reverse)
3 BF Drum Motor (Forward)
4 BF Drum Motor (Reverse)
5 STB Drum Motor (Forward)
6 STB Drum Motor (Reverse)
3. Mode
35320 7/7
35400
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
Reading Data (Media -> CPU) Writing Data (CPU -> Media)
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media.
! Read all data., Write all data. (ALL)

The data to backup is as follows.
! Read INITIAL DATA 2./Write INITIAL DATA 2. (DATA2)

The data to backup is as follows.
! Read individual data./Write individual data.

The backup data can be read or written separately.
Backup data File name Remarks A D

Item L A
L T
A
2
Main PrinterIF.Izh Printer I/F Main PCB data % %
• Machine Specification information, Option Setting information, Setup
Data
Printer Printer.lzh Printer control PCB data % %
• Mechanical Adjustment, Function and Option Registration (Printer-
related), Operator Selections (Printer-related), Setup Data
Processor tab Proc.lzh Processor control PCB data % %
• Processor Adjustment data, Function and Option Registration
(Processor-related), Operator Selections (Processor-related), Timer
Setting data
Colorimeter unit Color.lzh Colorimeter unit adjustment data % %
LASER Laser.lzh Laser control PCB data (LASER) % %
iBeam Laser.lzh iBeam Control PCB data (iBeam) % %
iBeam Tuning Data LsrSHD_X.Izh Tuning data of iBeam unit cleaning (iBeam) % %
35400 1/2
35400
Maintenance
Backup data File name Remarks A D

Item L A
L T
A
2
Correction Data for Brightness LsrSHD_X.Izh Correction data for brightness of the Edge of Image Field of laser engine % %
of the Edge of Image Field (LASER)
• ALL: Data that is saved or loaded in Writing All Data and Reading All Data
• DATA2: Service data that is saved or loaded in INITIAL DATA2
! Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, all data are replaced by backup data if read or written.
Data below are not replaced.
3. Mode
Data that are not replaced
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Serial Number (Printer/Processor)/Date of shipment, total counter 2, total counter, paper remaining, laser
operation record*1 (LASER) and iBeam Record Setting*2 (iBeam)
*1. Laser operation record data are maintained in the laser unit body. Performing Write/Reading all data will not write/read data of laser operation
record.
*2. Neither reading all data or reading service data into the system replaces the data.
Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count data of iBeam Record Setting is saved in the iBeam unit.
! Restrictions of usable storage media

" Use the storage media of removable disks.
" CD-R/RW
Not available.
35400 2/2
35500
Maintenance
System Version Check [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version Check
Accessories Profile Data
3. Mode
NOTE
• For iBeam, LASER in the display above changes to iBeam.
! Explanation
! Accessories
No. Display Explanation
1 2 3 4
1 CPU*2 Each control PCB (CPU) is separately shown.

2 Version (CPU) The system program version saved in each control PCB is shown.
3 Version (PC)*1 The system program version saved in HDD is shown.
4 BOOT*1 The CPU version of each control PCB is shown.
5 E The connecting conditions of the capacity booster is shown.
• #.# # # E: When the Capacity booster PCB is installed
• #.# # # : When the Capacity booster PCB is not installed
*1. (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
*2. Main shows the version of the maintenance application on PC.
35500 1/2
35500
Maintenance
$ Version (LASER)
You can check the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
1 2 3 4
LASER 1.009 X1 HhB1 N OK

Hh B
B
I i
1 1.089 The software version of the laser control PCB is displayed.

2 H The type of the B and G laser drivers is displayed.
• H: G laser driver (J391231)
3. Mode
3 h The laser unit type is displayed.
• h: laser unit (Type HhB)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) are not entered. ☞ 35700
4 B It shows that the R-AOM and B-AOM driver functions are installed in the laser unit.
• Example:
B: laser unit (Type HhB)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) are not entered. ☞ 35700
$ Communication
If the communication status of each control PCB is not normal, the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT are not
displayed normally.
Enter the System Version Check mode again to update the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT.
! Profile Data (SP1)

The profile data version is displayed.
35500 2/2
35600
Maintenance
Upgrading the system for each control PCB (CPU) [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade
3. Mode
M5330-00
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the system of each control PCBs.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or printer driver has been connected, do not receive the order or make
prints before or during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
! Explanation
! Software Upgrade
• Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
• The software upgrade is carried out separately for each control PCB (CPU).
1 2 3 4 5
1 Normal Termination Displays this when the upgrading is completed correctly.

Abnormal Termination Displays this when the upgrading is not completed correctly.
2 # Select this to upgrade.
& Clear the check box not to upgrade.
3 Printer I/F Main Each control PCB (CPU) is separately shown.
4 1.00*1 The system program version saved in each control PCB is shown.
5 2.00*1 The system program version saved in HDD is shown.
*1. The whole name of system version may not be shown here.
Confirm the system version on the System Version Check.
35600 1/2
35600
Maintenance
! Data
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded

When replacing each control PCB, select the check box of the software to be upgraded, then upgrade.
Control PCB Software to be upgraded System file name Remarks

Processor control PCB Processor tab proc0_1.sys proc1_1.sys
Printer control PCB Printer supply0.sys supply1.sys
Laser control PCB LASER laser0.sys laser1.sys (LASER)
iBeam control PCB iBeam control PCB Vfp0.sys Vfp1.sys (iBeam)
Printer I/F main PCB Printer I/F main PCB printerif0.sys printerif1.sys
! The location of the system program
3. Mode
Software Upgrade (HD)
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys
! Procedures for installing the system program
1. Finish the system program.
2. Insert the system program CD into the DVD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
3. When the InstallShield Wizard display appears, click Next.
4. Installation starts.
5. When Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) is selected, insert the program CD.
6. Select Select All on the Software Upgrade display and upgrade each control PCB.
35600 2/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information [LASER]
• For iBeam, see ☞ Operation Information [iBeam].

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation Information
Operation Information Laser Operation Record
3. Mode
! Explanation
Operation Information
Item Explanation
Error Record For error record, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Daily Setup History The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data prior to that will be deleted.
Laser Operation Record

Item Explanation
Laser Operation Record You can check operation records of laser-related parts.
IMPORTANT
• The laser operation record PCB maintains the data of the Serial Number, Laser
Generation Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon Mirror Total
Operation Time and Polygon Mirror Operation Count.
The data listed above is not changed if loading all the data into the system with the
Reading and Writing Data.
• The data listed above can be maintained up to five.
Laser Unit Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the laser unit.
Laser component information The laser code is shown described in the laser operation record PCB (in the laser unit).
Do not change the laser code, because the error may occur.
Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the system that installed the laser unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. detected in Machine Specification.
The Serial Number data is maintained in the laser unit.
Laser Generation Accumulated The lighting cumulative time of R/G/B lasers is displayed.
Time
Laser Generation Count The R/G/B laser turned ON operation count is displayed.
Polygon Mirror Total Operation Displays the polygon mirror operation time.
Time
Polygon Mirror Operation Count Displays the polygon mirror operation count.
35700 1/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information [iBeam]
• For LASER, see ☞ Operation Information [LASER].

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation Information
Operation Information iBeam Operation Record
3. Mode
! Explanation
Operation Information
Item Explanation
Error Record For error record, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Daily Setup History The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data prior to that will be deleted.
iBeam Operation Record

Item Explanation
iBeam Operation Record Displays iBeam unit Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count.
IMPORTANT
• Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count data of
iBeam Operation Record is saved in the iBeam unit.
In Reading and Writing Data, reading all data into the system does not replace the
Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count data of
iBeam Operation Record.
• The Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count
information of iBeam Operation Record can be saved up to 5.
iBeam Unit Serial Number Displays the serial No. of iBeam unit.
Serial Number Displays the serial No. of system that installed the iBeam unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. detected in Machine Specification.
It also holds Serial Number data in the iBeam unit.
iBeam Total Lighting Time Displays the lighting cumulative time of iBeam unit.
iBeam Lighting Operation Count Displays the Turned ON Time Record of iBeam unit.
35700 2/2
35800
Maintenance
Machine Specification [LASER, iBeam]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
Machine Specification (1) Machine Specification (2)
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Software information The Software information obtained from the output device is shown.
Machine Type Registration The Machine Type Registration name of the printer is shown.
IP Address The IP Address of the printer is shown.
Subnet mask The Subnet mask of the printer (printer I/F main PCB) is shown.
Default gateway The Default gateway obtained from the output device is shown.
Serial Number (Printer/Processor) The Serial Number of the printer/processor can be confirmed.
At the installation, enter the production number.
Process Specification (Input range: Use this mode to set the process specification for the system.
0 to 80)
Processing Solution Display Set the display of the chemical solution names by process specification.
Installation Date The installation date of the system can be checked and set.
Date of operation The Date of operation of the system obtained from the output device is shown. Also the settings can
be configured.
Power Supply Specification The power supply specification of the system can be checked.
Language Language for the system program can be selected.
Unit Language Language for the display module can be selected other than Japanese and English.
Cannot be shown if the message file is not installed on PC.
• Save the language file to the following folder.
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\data
LP7000, LP7100, LP7200
• D:\Noritsukoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\data
Date of shipment The Date of shipment of the output device obtained from the output device is shown.
Circulation Pump Stand-by Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.
Function (only for SM)
35800 1/2
35800
Maintenance
Item Explanation
SM Replenishment Setting (only Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
for SM)
! Functions
! Program Timer Setting

The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.
3. Mode
35800 2/2
35920
Maintenance
Self-diagnostic [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic
Display (Self-diagnostic: LASER, iBeam) Display (Image Path Check: LASER, iBeam)
3. Mode
Failed portion display
*1. If you use iBeam, the display for images for Laser Confirmation in the Image Path Check display change to the For iBeam Confirmation.
*2. For iBeam, the display for Laser Control PCB in the Image Path Check display changes to the iBeam Control PCB.
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Image Path Check Transfer the data in each data path to judge the failure part by the CRC check or data comparison.
NOTE
• For Film Series Image Path, see Scanner Service Manual.
Test Print Put a check mark for Test Print and perform the following checks, if an abnormal print is made from
the scanned image though the scanned image saved to the storage media was normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the setup.
• The color on the print does not become better by performing the setup.
Test Print Image selection LASER
• Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the laser or the files.
iBeam
• Select the image to transfer from the For iBeam Confirmation or the files.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.
Paper Magazine for Test Print Set the magazine to make a test print.
Test Print Advance Length Set the paper advance length to make a test print.
Execution Time Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.
Start Test The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the
diagnostics.
Test Print Check Result Check the test print and put a checkmark to either of Good or No Good of Test Print Check Result.
Then the result of the diagnostics appears.
35920 1/2
35920
Maintenance
Item Explanation
Save Result The result of Image Path Check can be saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result is saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log.
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system] \Log
LP7000, LP7100, LP7200
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system]
\Log
• Only one file is available to save the result.
Clear Result Delete the result of Image Path Check.
Result The result of the test is displayed after Image Path Check is completed.
3. Mode
! Checking procedure
1. Select a Test Item.

NOTE
• When a checkmark is given to the Test Print, select a test print image.
2. The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the test.
3. Assumable failed parts are displayed on the Diagnostic Contents column.
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
• − stands for unused.
Diagnostic Contents
LASER iBeam
Printer I/F main PCB ←
Laser control PCB −
− iBeam control PCB
35920 2/2
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper sensor adjustment [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
3. Mode
M5374-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and set by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5) (input range: 0 to 255) [Proper Range: 1 - 169]
It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section becomes 0 and
the status section becomes -.
! Functions
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

Paper End Sensor A Paper End Sensor B Paper End Sensor B2
Paper Loading Sensor Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right)
Exposure Start Sensor Exposure End Sensor
• The paper end sensor B is not shown when the dual magazine unit is not attached.
• The Paper End Sensor B2 is not shown when the Triple Magazine Unit is not attached.
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Check that each printer cover of the printer section and printer doors are closed.
36000 1/2
36000
2. Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.

NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not displayed if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is completed normally, OK is displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not completed normally, − is displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 170 or more
3. Mode
36000 2/2
36010
Paper Advance Unit Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction
Paper Advance Unit Correction Functions
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Carry out each correction for the paper advance unit.
IMPORTANT
• When the paper advance unit correction is carried out by paper magazine A, B or B2, it is complete.
• After replacing the paper advance unit, carry out adjustment by following the procedure below.
1. Perform ☞ Turn Unit Stop Position Correction.
2. Perform ☞ Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
3. Perform ☞ Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
4. Perform ☞ Paper Stop Position Correction.
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −1.0 to +1.0)
The paper receiving position of arm unit 2 is corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −4.0 to +4.0)
The paper transfer position of arm unit 2 can be corrected.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receiving position of the turn unit can be corrected.
36010 1/6
36010
! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −4.0 to +4.0)
Corrects the stop position of the paper rear end where the turn unit receive the paper from the exposure advance unit.
Arm unit 2 Paper transfer position
3. Mode
Turn unit Paper receiving position
G083157
! Functions
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation

The correction values for Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction are
canceled, and arm unit 2 moves back and forth between the paper transfer position and the paper receiving position.
The following operation starts by pressing YES.
• First time: Carries out the initial operation and arm unit 2 moves to the paper receiving position.
• Second time: Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position.
NOTE
• The operation returns to the first operation by pressing YES, after pressing another key or opening/closing the paper advance
door.
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation

To test arm unit 2, apply the following two values: Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop
Position Correction. If it is functioning properly, test arm unit 2 will repeatedly move back and forth between the paper transfer
position and the paper receiving position.
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (left) (LP7200/3502 PLUS)

Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (left).
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (right) (LP7200/3502 PLUS)

Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (right).
! Test Operation for the Turn Unit Stop Position Correction

The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction is canceled, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving position.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation

The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction becomes valid, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving position.
36010 2/6
36010
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction

The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction is canceled, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper stop position after
the turn unit operates the initial operation.
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation

The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction becomes valid, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper stop position
after the turn unit operates the initial operation.
! Before each adjustment
IMPORTANT
• For each adjustment, turn ON Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) and keep printer door 2 opened on purpose and
3. Mode
confirm that arm unit 2 and turn unit operate correctly. Be sure not to put your hands into the paper advance section.
• Be sure not to pull the paper advance unit out with the Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) turned ON. It may damage
the system.
Remove the printer door 2 interlock switch, attach it to the main body, then turn on the switch.
NOTE
• Attach the printer door 2 interlock switch to the main body with tape or the like.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Turn Unit Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation via the F: Functions,
and stop the turn unit at the paper receiving position.
2. Enter the correction value so that the height of surface A of the turn unit is 2 mm high from surface B of
the exposure advance unit.
IMPORTANT
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so as not to tilt the adjustment position.
−correction
+correction
Surface A of the turn unit

Surface B of the exposure advance unit
G074586
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation via the F: Functions, and move arm unit 2 to the
paper transfer position.
36010 3/6
36010
2. Enter the correction value so that surface C of arm unit 2 may come to the position 1 to 3 mm away from
surface D of the processor loading unit.
IMPORTANT
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so as not to tilt the adjustment position.
• When + correction value is entered too much for Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction, it touches
surface D of the processor loading unit. Be careful to avoid it.
Surface D of the processor loading unit
+correction
3. Mode
−correction
Surface C of arm unit 2 Make a clearance of 1 to 3 mm between the surfaces C and D.
G074584
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation via the F: Functions, and move arm unit 2 to the
paper receiving position.
2. Enter the correction value so that surface E of arm unit 2 come away 48.3 ± 0.5 mm from surface F of
the turn unit.
NOTE
• Measure surface E of arm unit 2 from the bottom edge of the turn unit guide.
Bottom edge of the guide
Surface E of arm unit 2

G076391
36010 4/6
36010
Make a clearance of 48.3±0.5 mm between the surfaces E and F.
Surface E of arm unit 2
+correction
−correction
3. Mode
Surface F of the turn unit
G074579
! Paper Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
stop the paper at the turn unit.
2. Enter the correction value so that the front edge of the turn unit guide (lower) come away −1 to 0 mm
from the paper rear end.
IMPORTANT
• Check the paper rear end carefully.
From −1 to 0 mm
−correction +correction
Paper
Paper rear end

Front edge of the turn unit guide (lower)
G074585
36010 5/6
36010
3. The message Confirm the paper stop position, then remove the paper. appears. Press the YES:
OK key.
IMPORTANT
• If one or more of the doors in the printer section is open, paper is not fed.
4. Open the paper advance door, remove the test paper from the bottom of the paper advance unit, then
press the YES: OK key.
3. Mode
36010 6/6
36020
Exposure Magnification Correction [LASER]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Correction
A B
3. Mode
M5376-00
NOTE
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or B2, it is complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size which you
used, then measure the length between most outside lines of it.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 130.0 mm) (Input range: 125.0 to 135.0 mm)
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the actual measurement value can be entered.
! Functions
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/B2)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP imprinting.
! Test print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2)

Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print by Test Print Confirmation.
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
36020 1/2
36020
1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with paper of 152 mm or more.
2. Measure length A on the test print.
3. Mode
G074496
3. Select the line from part A and enter the measured value in part B.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 130 line usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or more, measure the length between most outside lines of it.
4. Perform Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions.
5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within ±0.1 mm of the specified length.
6. Perform exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
7. Perform Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
36020 2/2
36030
Exposure Position Adjustment [LASER]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
Adjustment
3. Mode
M5377-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the positions of
the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or B2, it is complete.
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.
! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
36030 1/5
36030
! Functions

NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.

NOTE
3. Mode
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed.

☞ 36020
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the paper whose width is 152 mm or more.
3. Check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-
B. And check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line.
Magenta line
Cyan line
Yellow line
G074510
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See the Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
36030 2/5
36030
4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and enter the offset value of main scanning and make a Test Print again if there is
no part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
Plus correction
3. Mode
Minus correction
G068455
5. Enter each checked number.

6. Check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-
D1. And check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print
BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line
Yellow line
Cyan line
G068456
IMPORTANT
☞ 80310
7. Enter each checked number.
36030 3/5
36030
9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B make the
straightest line comparing with the other columns.
Check area
3. Mode
G074511
10. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2 make
the straightest line comparing with the other columns.
IMPORTANT
• When the print is made via Test Print (Confirmation), it is exposed on the same position, 0 and -1 in BLOCK-
D1 and D2.
Check area
G074512
11. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it is not the
straight line, perform Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size
which you used, then check the dimension of the most outside line of it.
36030 4/5
36030
3. Mode
G074497
36030 5/5
36040
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [LASER]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment
3. Mode
M5378-00
NOTE
! Explanation
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of B, G and R on the both sides of a print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification fine adjustment is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or B2, it is complete.
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.
! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Functions

NOTE

36040 1/3
36040
NOTE
G066121
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction/Exposure Position Adjustment has been completed.
☞ 36020
3. Mode
☞ 36030
IMPORTANT
1 dot
+correction −correction
G074513
IMPORTANT
☞ 80310
36040 2/3
36040
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the
vertical direction at 0 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan lines make one line, carry out the fine adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of the test print.
NOTE
• For the correcting direction of the magenta line, refer to the list below.
Correcting direction of the magenta line

Correcting to the right +correction
3. Mode
Correcting to the left −correction
4. Enter the correction value.

6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on
the test print again.
7. Perform Exposure Position Adjustment again.
☞ 36030
36040 3/3
36050
Paper Advance Length Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction
3. Mode
M5379-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed error.
IMPORTANT
• The paper advance length correction is to be carried out with the basis of magazine A.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: from 145.0 to 155.0 mm)
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the paper
loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance feed error.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: from 180.0 to 220.0 mm)
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance roller feed error.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0 mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of the first and second test papers at the same time.
NOTE
• When magazines are positioned at magazine mounts A, B and B2, paper is firstly loaded to magazine mount A.
! Test Paper Advance Confirmation

Validate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0 mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
NOTE
36050 1/2
36050
! Loading
The paper is loaded.
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
1. Set the magazine to carry out the paper advance length correction on the magazine mount A/B/B2.
2. Carry out Test Paper Advance of Functions.
3. Open printer door 2 and remove the test paper from the bottom of the paper advance unit. Then, press
the YES: OK key.
3. Mode
4. Measure each test paper length of the first and second paper which are removed.
5. Enter each measurement dimension.
6. After correcting, carry out Test Paper Advance Confirmation of F: Functions and be sure to make a
print and check if the advance length is correct.
7. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it in the following procedure.
If the print advance length of the first paper after loading is not correct.
When the advance length is long. Carry out + correction for Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
When the advance length is short. Carry out − correction for Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
If the print advance length of the second or later paper after loading is not correct.
Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and adjust them again.
36050 2/2
36060
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction
3. Mode
M5380-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B and B2.
! A − B (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0 mm)

The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is necessary.
! Magazine A, Magazine B, Magazine B2

You can select paper magazine A/B/B2.
! Functions
LASER, iBeam Explanation
F Test print 1 (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
F Test print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) *1 Validate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
F Test print 2 (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
F Test print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) *1 Validate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
F Loading (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) The paper is loaded.
F Rewind (magazine A/B/B2) The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
*1. The arrow is printed in magenta on the print by Test Print Confirmation.
36060 1/3
36060
The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
G066121
1. Clean pressure pins of the arm units using a cotton swab (two places)
Pressure pins are in the positions where the arrows indicate. Insert a cotton swab into the space between the arm units to clean
the pins.
Clean the space.
3. Mode
Arm units
Cotton swab
Clean the space.
Cotton swab
G082875
2. Set the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount A/B/B2.
IMPORTANT
• Confirm the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B or paper supply unit B2 has been completed.

Dual magazine • Confirm the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B. ☞ 25730
Triple magazine • Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B) for paper supply unit ☞ 25770
B2.
• Confirm the zigzag adjustment (magazine B2) for paper supply unit ☞ 25755
B2.
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has been finished.
See ☞ 25620.
4. Select paper magazine A/B/B2.
5. Execute Test Print 1 of Functions.
6. Measure the difference of dimensions of lines A and B on the second test print. And enter the value to
(A−B).
NOTE
• If the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and B: 120 mm, for example, see the below.
36060 2/3
36060
• Line A (121 mm) − Line B (120 mm) = Correction value A − B (1 mm)
Line A
A
Line B
3. Mode
C
G083159
7. After the correction, make test prints by Test Print Confirmation 2 from Functions. Then, confirm that
the dimension differences between lines A and B and between lines A and C (on the second test print)
are within the values in the following table.
NOTE
• For example, if the measurement value of line A (on the second test print) is 120 mm
Check that the difference of dimension of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the tolerance level in the
following table.
Test Print Tolerance range

355.6 mm A−B±0.5 mm, both A and B are between 119.5 mm or more and 120.5 mm
or less.
610.0 mm A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and C are between 119 mm or more and 121 mm
or less.
IMPORTANT
• If the dimension difference of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to (A−B).
• Check the test prints again and adjust the unit repeatedly until the value is within the tolerance level.
Status Correction Status Correction
A is larger than B Plus correction A is smaller than B Minus correction
8. If the dimension differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the
tolerance level, check the following adjustment.
Magazine A Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Dual magazine Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. ☞ 25730
Triple magazine Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B2 (magazine B). ☞ 25770
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B2 (magazine B2). ☞ 25775
36060 3/3
36070
Exposure Center Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center Correction
3. Mode
M5381-00
NOTE
! Explanation
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and the exposure center correction for each paper magazine A,
B, B2.
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: from −2.0
to +2.0 mm)
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and surface).
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the left end to the center line on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center − Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the center line to the right end on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)

The exposure center correction value which is calculated from the entered values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value 1) and
(Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
NOTE
• When the correction value is over ±2.0 mm, the correction value display part turns red and it cannot be registered.
! Functions
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) without Correction Value

Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
36070 1/4
36070
! Test print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) with Master Value

Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and make a test print.
! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) with Master Value + Paper Magazine Values
Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
G066121
• When making test prints in Functions, a print with the advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width 〈A ####(#)〉 is
3. Mode
printed as the CVP imprinting.
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B/B2)

! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Exposure Center Correction (Master)
IMPORTANT
• When making test prints with magazine B/B2, check if the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B and B2 are
completed.
Magazine B ☞ 25730 Magazine B2 ☞ 25770
1. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction has been completed.

☞ 36060
2. Check that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed. (LASER)
☞ 36020
3. Set the paper magazine to carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) to magazine mount
A/B/B2.
5. Carry out Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.
36070 2/4
36070
6. Measure the length from the left end to the center line and the length from the center line to the right end
on the leading end of the test print.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
3. Mode
G074515
7. Enter each measurement dimension.

8. After correcting, carry out Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) with Master Value of F:
Functions and make a print and check if the exposure center is correct.
Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

1. Set the paper magazine for Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine) to the magazine
mount A/B/B2.
3. Carry out Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) with Master Value of F: Functions.
4. Measure dimension B from the left end to the center line on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When measuring the test print, use the front end of the test print.
Center line
Front end of the test print
G074516
36070 3/4
36070
5. Carry out correction so that dimension B is half of the paper width.

B is larger than one half of the paper width. Minus correction
B is smaller than one half of the paper width. Plus correction
6. After correcting, carry out Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/B2) with Master and Paper
Magazine Values of F: Functions and be sure to make a print and check if the exposure center is
correct.
3. Mode
36070 4/4
36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment 1
Display Details
Pressure rollers 1 Pressure rollers 3
3. Mode
Pressure rollers 2
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
! Explanation
The exposure start position correction and exposure advance motor 2 speed correction at the time of advancing paper after putting or
releasing the pressure roller 1, 2 and 3 of the exposure advance unit, can be performed.
IMPORTANT
• The exposure advance adjustment 1 exposure operation will be enabled for all the paper advance lengths.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any of magazine A, B or B2, the correction is finished.
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) (Input range: 23.4
to 27.4 mm)
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
Measure the length between the test print front end and 0 mm-line, then enter the measured value.
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm) (Input range: 244.0 to
264.0 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of the test print and enter the measured value.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
36080 1/3
36080

NOTE
G066121

! Rewind
3. Mode
1. Select Test Print (Paper Magazine A, B or B2) on the Functions display to make a test print.
2. Measure the length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then enter the
measured value in Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Print Measurement Value.
3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm line of the test print, then enter the value in 0 mm-
line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value

A
305 mm
0 mm (0 inch)-line to ∼ 254 mm line test paper

measurement value
G074517
4. Select Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A, B or B2) on the Functions display to make a test
print.
5. For confirmation of the test print results, refer to each value shown below.
Length between the paper front end 25.4 mm
and 0 mm-line
Length between 0 to 254 mm-line 254.0 mm
36080 2/3
36080
3. Mode
Rear end
G074518
36080 3/3
36081
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment 2
Display Details
Pressure rollers 1 Pressure rollers 3
3. Mode
Pressure rollers 2
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
! Explanation
The exposure advance motor 1 speed correction when paper was advanced by the exposure advance unit pressure roller 1 (putting
pressure) or pressure roller 2 or 3 (releasing pressure), can be performed.
• To make a test print for Exposure Advance Adjustment 2, be sure to use paper with the width between 82.5 mm and 152 mm.
If you use paper with a width of 152 mm or more, zigzagging may occur, and adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
IMPORTANT
• The exposure operation of the exposure advance adjustment 2 will be enabled when the paper advance length is from
384 mm to 466.9 mm long.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any of magazine A, B or B2, the correction is finished.
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm) (Input range: 244.0 to
264.0 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of the test print and enter the measured value.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
NOTE

Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
36081 1/2
36081
NOTE
G066121

! Rewind
3. Mode
1. Select Test Print (Paper Magazine A, B or B2) on the Functions display to make a test print.
2. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm line of the test print, then enter the value in 0 mm-
line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.

A
0 mm (0 inch)-line to ∼ 254 mm line test paper measurement value
383 mm
From 82.5 mm to 152 mm
G084941
3. Select Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A, B or B2) on the Functions display to make a test
print.
4. Check that the created test print 0 mm-254 mm line distance is 254.0 mm.
36081 2/2
36090
Paper Pressure Operation Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
3. Mode
M5384-00
NOTE
! Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller of the exposure advance
unit and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value that the correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial value: 1) (input range: from 1 to 13)
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
! Functions

Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure operation correction is made.
NOTE
G066121
36090 1/3
36090

! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
1. Select and execute Test Print via F:Functions.

NOTE
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in the list below.
• When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the print No. and the revolution pulse count are printed on the back print.
Print No. Revolution pulse count Revolution pulse count Test print advance length (mm)
3. Mode
(pps) (pps)
(LASER) (iBeam)
1 560 1073 152
2 547 919 153
3 532 873 154
4 517 837 155
5 501 805 156
6 487 776 157
7 473 749 158
8 459 723 159
9 444 701 160
10 429 680 161
11 415 659 162
12 400 637 163
13 387 616 164
36090 2/3
36090
2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and enter the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
At the area 26 mm from the paper +2 At the area 17 mm from the paper −2
rear end rear end
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2
3. Mode
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
Test print with no Print No.

banding
Print No.
Paper advance direction Paper advance direction
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.
36090 3/3
36100
White Border Width Correction [LASER, iBeam]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → White Border Width Correction
3. Mode
M5385-00
! Explanation
The margin can be corrected for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• When the correction is carried out for any one of magazines A/B/B2, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of prints with border and without border, because the image
exposure position is corrected.
! Paper Magazine (Input range: from 82.5 to 210 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.
! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value to make a test print.
NOTE

Validate the correction value to make a test print.
36100 1/2
36100
NOTE
G066121
! White Border Width Correction
IMPORTANT
• If the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the correction is not necessary.
3. Mode
1. Check that the exposure center correction has been completed.
☞ 36070
3. Measure the right and left margins on the test print.
G068472
4. Enter the measured value in each item.

5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F: Functions and make sure that the margin is 5.0 mm.
36100 2/2
37610
Setting IP address and subnet mask
Setting IP address and subnet mask [LASER, iBeam]
! Explanation
When replacing the printer I/F main PCB, the setting is required in the following procedure.
1. If printers are connected, temporarily set the environment so that the operation PC can connect the
printer I/F main PCB one on one.
Printer Replacing the printer I/F main PCB Disconnect the cable
Straight cable Cross cable
3. Mode
Printer
PC
HUB
Printer
Example 1 Example 2
Printer Printer
PC PC
HUB HUB
Printer Printer
G085196
2. If the operation PC and the printer I/F main PCB are directly connected when the network is being
established as an example 2, confirm the Advanced setting in the Computer Management.

Start → Right-Click My Computer → Manage (G) → Click Device Manager → Double-click Network adapters → Right-
click Ineel# # # → Click Properties. → Click Advanced
Computer Management Advanced
NOTE
• The Auto Detect display of the Link Speed & Duplex may vary depending on the the PC.
37610 1/4
37610
(1) If the Link Speed & Duplex is not Auto Detect, set it to Auto Detect.
NOTE
• Write down the Link Speed & Duplex setting as needed.
(2) Click OK.
3. If the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB are connected via HUB as an example 1, match the HUB
setting with Link Speed & Duplex.
4. Confirm the network setting of the operation PC.

Start → Settings → Network Connections → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
3. Mode
Protocol of the Local Area Connection Protocol of the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
(1) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

(2) Click Properties.
(3) Write down the IP Address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway as needed.
(4) Change IP Address, Subnet mask , and Default gateway of the operation PC to connect IP Address : 192 .
168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 and Default gateway : No setting of the printer I/F main
PCB.
Example
Operation PC IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 12, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224
Default gateway : No setting
(5) Click OK.
5. Carry out the light source registration.

Start → Programs → Select this printer. → Click Output Device Registration.
37610 2/4
37610
3 5 4
3. Mode
(1) Click the Find button.
(2) Select this printer from the list then click >.
(3) Select this printer from the list on the right side and register its name.
(4) Click Enter.
(5) Click Cancel.
6. Carry out Software Upgrade.

☞ 35600
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade
7. Read all data in Reading and Writing Data.

☞ 35400
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
8. Set the Time in Close Down Checks→Program Timer Setting.

Maintenance → Close Down Checks
37610 3/4
37610
9. Set the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor) and Date
of shipment in Machine Specification.
Machine Specification (1) Machine Specification (2)
3. Mode
• If the setting of IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224, Default gateway : 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 are not
changed:
1. Set Serial Number (Printer/Processor) and Date of shipment.
2. This completes the setting.
• If the setting of IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224, Default gateway : 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 are
changed:
1. Set the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor) and Date of shipment
in Machine Specification.
2. Perform Step 10.
10. If the setting of IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224, Default gateway
: 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 are changed, configure the setting in the following procedure.
(1) If the environment is changed in Step 1 to temporarily connect the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB,
restore the setting.
(2) Restore the setting of the IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway in the Step 4.
(3) Carry out the light source registration following the Step 5.
(4) If the controller is connected, click Update on the Printer setting.
Click F on the Controller Main Display. → Management Tool → System management → Printer setting
(5) Confirm that the PC can be correctly connected to the printer maintenance application.
(6) End
37610 4/4
38000
Software
Software
Installing the system program [LASER, iBeam]
1. Confirming the settings for operation PC prepared by the customer

Start → Right-Click My Computer → Manage (G) → Click Device Manager → Double-click Network adapters → Right-click
Ineel# # # → Click Properties. → Click Advanced
Computer Management Advanced
3. Mode
(1) Confirm that Link Speed & Duplex is set to Auto Detect. If not, change the setting.
The displayed items of Link Speed & Duplex and Auto Detect may vary depending on the type of PC.
Write down your settings as necessary.
(2) Click OK.
2. If the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB are connected via HUB, match the HUB setting with Link
Speed & Duplex.
3. Configuring the network settings of the operation computer

Select an IP address and subnet mask for Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
NOTE
• The printer is configured with the following IP address and subnet mask by default.
IP address: 192. 168. 1. 11
Subnet mask: 255. 255. 255. 224
For Windows XP
Start menu → Control Panel → Network Connections → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
For Windows 2000
Start menu → Settings → Network and Dial-up Connections → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
38000 1/5
38000
Software
Protocol of the Local Area Connection Protocol of the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
3. Mode
(1) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
(2) Click Properties.
(3) If the operation PC is prepared by the customer, write down the settings.
(4) Set IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway.
IP address: 192. 168. 1. 12
Subnet mask: 255. 255. 255. 224
Default gateway : No setting
(5) Click OK.
4. Installing the system program of the printer

Insert the system program CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe, that is on the CD-ROM.
Follow the instructions on the display to install the optional software.
LP7000 series
If the message Completing Windows Installer 3.1 (KB893803) Installation Wizard is shown, put a checkmark ( ) to Do not
restart now, then click Finish.
5. Installing the profile data (35 PLUS series only)

Insert the enclosed profile data CD (Profile Data Vol.3) to the CD drive, and start Setup.exe, in the CD-ROM.
If the display monitor to be used is not shown at the display monitor selection, select sRGB.
6. Installing the optional software of the printer

Insert the CD included with the option into the CD drive and start Setup.exe that is on the CD-ROM.
7. Installing the Capacity Booster Software (3502 PLUS and LP7200 only)
• Insert the CD included with the capacity booster into the CD drive and start Setup.exe that is on the CD-ROM.
• On the User information display, enter User Name and Company name, and enter the ID number from the package of the
Capacity Booster Software CD in Serial No..
• Enter the serial number of this printer on the Serial number input display
8. Installing the flatbed scanner driver software, referring to the operator's manual provided with the flatbed
scanner (iBeam models)
38000 2/5
38000
Software
9. Output Device Registration

Register this printer on the Output Device Registration display.
Start → Programs → Select this printer. → Output Device Registration
3. Mode
3 5 4
(1) Click the Find button.

(2) Select this printer from the list then click >.
(3) Select this printer from the list on the right side and register its name.
(4) Click Enter.
(5) Click Cancel.
10. Entering the service personnel password

On the Maintenance Application display, click Maintenance to access the Maintenance display.
On the Maintenance display, press the F9 key while pressing the F1 key, and enter the password for service personnel (2260).
If operations are performed with the display module
Press the Menu button for a few seconds. → button → Press the Menu button five times. → Enter
If the Menu display has been accessed with the display module, the Maintenance display cannot be accessed with the
maintenance application. And, if the Maintenance display has been accessed with the maintenance application, the Menu display
cannot be accessed with the display module.
11. Machine Type Registration

On the Machine Specification display, register Machine Type, Installation Date and Language.
Confirm the machine specification, and register it.
12. Configuring the location (LP7000 series models only)

This setting can only be configured with the display module if the language setting is not Japanese.
Select the location.
On the 1 START CHECKS display, press the button until 5 SETTING is shown. → button → Press the button until 8
SET AREA is shown. → Enter
38000 3/5
38000
Software
1. Press the button to select your location.

2. Press the Enter button.
3. When completed, press the MENU button.
13. Starting the EZ Controller (35 PLUS series only)

For details, refer to each Operator's Manual.
14. Loading the data of the printer/processor section, controller section and scanner section from the EZ
Controller (for 35PLUS series only)
IMPORTANT
• Reading the backup data from the EZ Controller twice is required when the following operation is performed.
1. If the PC or HDD which installed the EZ Controller is replaced.
3. Mode
2. If the PC which installed the EZ Controller is recovered.
38000 4/5
38000
Software
3. Mode
38000 5/5
4000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................4001
Suffix number [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [LASER, iBeam] ........................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4252
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) [LASER, iBeam] .......................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer ........................................ 4260
Check the connection of the PC and printer [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................4260
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from Temperature control started to
Temperature control completed. [LASER] .........................................................................................................4302
4 Troubleshooting
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual ........................................... 4390
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [LASER] ...........................................................................................4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual ........................................... 4470
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [iBeam] .............................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [iBeam] ..........................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [iBeam] ................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [iBeam] .............................................................................................................4470
Streaks appears on test prints of iBeam tuning. [iBeam] ....................................................................................4470
Check point for the iBeam Tuning ......................................................................................................................4480
Diagnosis appendix: [F] ......................................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge setting section troubleshooting flow [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................4620
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs ............................................................4630
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 00500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ...................................................................................40500
No. 00501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ........................................................................................40500
No. 00502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ...........................................................40500
No. 00503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ...............................................................................................40500
No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ...............................................................................40500
No. 00507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .....................................................................................................40500
No. 00508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ..............................40500
No. 00518 Set the Dryer Cover. ......................................................................................................................40500
No. 00519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. .........................................................................40500
No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................40500
4000 1/9
4000
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600

No. 00600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ...........................................................................................40600
No. 00601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF ............................................................................................40600
No. 00602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB ...........................................................................................40600
No. 00603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .......................................................................................40600
No. 00604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ...............................................................................................40600
No. 00605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ................................................................................................40600
No. 00606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF .................................................................................................40600
No. 00607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB ...............................................................................................40600
No. 00609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. .............................................................................................................40600
No. 00610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ....................................................................................................40600
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700
No. 00700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
No. 00701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ................................................................................40700
No. 00702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ...................................................................................40700
No. 00703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...........40700
4 Troubleshooting
No. 00704[SM] Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. .......
40700
No. 00705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ................................................................................... 40900
No. 00900[F] PSR is running out. ...................................................................................................................40900
No. 00901[F] PSR is empty. ............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ................................................................................................40900
No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ...........................................................................................40900
No. 00904[F] Replenish PSR. .........................................................................................................................40900
No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ........................................................................................40900
No. 00906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. .........................................................................40900
No. 00907[F] Collect the waste solution. ........................................................................................................40900
No. 00908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ....
40900
No. 00909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ......................................................40900
No. 00910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ..............................................40900
No. 00912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. ........
40900
No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started. .....................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000
No. 01000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A .............................................................41000
No. 01001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ..............................................................41000
No. 01002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .......................................41000
No. 01003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ........................................41000
No. 01004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...........................................................................41000
No. 01005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...........................................................................41000
No. - The measurement failed. Measure it again. ............................................................................................41000
No. 01047 Close printer door. .........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01074 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................41000
No. 01093 Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing? ............................41000
No. 01094 Unit is not attached. .......................................................................................................................41000
No. 01012-01120 Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual ..................................................41000
4000 2/9
4000
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ........................................................................... 41300

Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41500
No. 01501-01549 See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ....
41500
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550
No. 01552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ................................................41550
No. 01555 The calibration plate data is out of range. ......................................................................................41550
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common ..................................................................... 41620
No. 01750 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable may not be
connected. ..........................................................................................................................................................41620
No. 01751 There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and PC. The printer
clock was adjusted to match the PC clock. ........................................................................................................41620
No. 01752 Printer is not ready. One moment please. . . ................................................................................41620
No. 01753 Printer is not ready. Start the printer. ...........................................................................................41620
No. 01754 Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application. .....................41620
4 Troubleshooting
No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. Install the profile data that matches from the profile data CD.
41620
No. 01757 Execute the startup checks. ............................................................................................................41620
41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
No. 01801 Execute software upgrade. .............................................................................................................41800
No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software. ....................................................41800
No. 01805 The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software. ....................................................41800
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. ..............................................................................................................................................................41821
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 01920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ....................................41900
No. - Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. ................................................................................................................41900
No. - Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print. ....................................................................................41900
No. - Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. ..................................................................................41900
No. - Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass
surface or test print and measure again. ............................................................................................................41900
Attention message: Edit ....................................................................................................... 43370
43370
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4231 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. .................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage) .. 44350
No. 4350-4360 For corrective action of the attention message, see the Bravo II Service Manual/d-Storage/ CD-R
external writing system Service Manual. ..........................................................................................................44350
4000 3/9
4000
Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 05500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1 ..............................................45500
No. 05501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2 ..............................................45500
No. 05502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS ..............................................45500
No. 05503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ..........................................................................45500
No. 05504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1 ......................................45500
No. 05507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ..................................................................45500
No. 05508 The processing solution level is too low. .......................................................................................45500
No. 05509 The circulation amount has decreased. ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05510 Processor A/D conversion error. ....................................................................................................45500
No. 05511 The circulation pump has stopped. P1 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 05513 The circulation pump has stopped. P2 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 05515 The circulation pump has stopped. PS1 .........................................................................................45500
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05519 Thermosensor error. P1 .................................................................................................................45500
No. 05522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ............................................................................................................45500
No. 05524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ......................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 ............................................................................................................... 45530
No. 05530 The Processor Top Cover is open. .................................................................................................45530
No. 05532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ...........................................................45530
No. 05533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor ........................................................................................................45530
No. 05543 The dryer cover is removed. ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 05545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05546 Print Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................................45530
No. 05547 Print Sensor (Right) error. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ...............................................................45530
No. 05550 Drive Motor has stopped. ..............................................................................................................45530
No. 05552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ......................................................................................45530
4000 4/9
4000
Error message: Tablet replenishment ................................................................................. 45600

No. 05600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ..............................................................................................45600
No. 05601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ...............................................................................................45600
No. 05602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ............................................................................................45600
No. 05603[J] A tablet has jammed. .................................................................................................................45600
No. 05609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ...............................................................45600
No. 05610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ................................................................45600
No. 05611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ..............................................................45600
No. 05612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .......................................................................45600
No. 05613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ......................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700
No. 05700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ........................................................................45700
No. 05701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ........................................................................45700
No. 05702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ........................................................................45700
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .......................................................................45700
No. 05704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .........................................................................45700
No. 05705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .........................................................................45700
No. 05706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ...........................................................................45700
No. 05708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W .................................................................................45700
No. 05711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..................................................................................45700
No. 05712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .............................................................................45700
4000 5/9
4000
Error message: F replenishment ......................................................................................... 45900

No. 05900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ...................................................................45900
No. 05901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R .......................................................................45900
No. 05902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA ....................................................................45900
No. 05903F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB ......................................................................45900
No. 05904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR .......................................................................45900
No. 05905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
45900
45900
No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ......................................45900
No. 05910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ...................................................45900
No. 05911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB ....................................................45900
No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. .........................................................................45900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ............................................................................45900
No. 05914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ............................45900
No. 05917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ............................45900
No. 05918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ..........................45900
No. 05922[F] Replenisher section door is open. .............................................................................................45900
No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. .............................................................................45900
4000 6/9
4000
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46000

No. 06012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .........................................................................................46000
No. 06013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46000
No. 06014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46000
No. 06015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46000
No. 06016 Paper Cutter operation error. .........................................................................................................46000
No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06075 G Laser control error. ....................................................................................................................46000
No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06077 Interlock error. ...............................................................................................................................46000
No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06082 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06087 Laser Control PCB system error. ...................................................................................................46000
No. 06101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ................................................................................................46000
No. 06104 Printer Door is open. ......................................................................................................................46000
No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. ...................................................................................................46000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46000
No. 06135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 06136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .....................................................46000
No. 06137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .....................................................46000
No. 06144 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ..............................................................46000
No. 06145 Lane Select Motor operation error. ................................................................................................46000
No. 06146 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. ..................................................................................46000
No. 06147 Turn Motor operation error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 06148 Paper End Sensor A error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06149 Paper End Sensor B error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46000
No. 06152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ...................................................................................46000
No. 06153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .................................................................................46000
4000 7/9
4000
Error message: Printer 2 ..................................................................................................... 46100

No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06156 Exposure End Sensor error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ..................................................46100
No. 06177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. .........................................................................................46100
No. 06179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 06182 iBeam Unit control error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 06183 iBeam Control PCB control error. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06184 iBeam Control PCB system error. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06185 Roller Move Motor operation error. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06187 Setup calculation error. ..................................................................................................................46100
No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06203 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46100
No. 06204 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46100
No. 06205 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46100
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ................................................................................46100
No. 06209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ........................................................................46100
No. 06210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. .......................................................................................46100
No. 06211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ..............................................................................46100
No. 06217 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B2 ........................................................................................46100
No. 06218 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B2 ...................................................................................46100
No. 06219 Paper End Sensor B2 error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06220 B Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06226 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46100
No. 06227 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .........................................................................................46100
No. 06232 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B2 ........................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner ...................................................................................................... 46300
No. 06303-06337 For corrective actions, see the Scanner Service Manual. ...................................................46300
Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................. 46400
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 06551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ...................................................................................46550
No. 06554 Calibration Plate advance error. ....................................................................................................46550
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing ................................................ 46620
No. 06621-06803 For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual ................................................46620
No. 06680 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 06681 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
Error message: Main ........................................................................................................... 46900
No. 06901 ARCNET communication error. ....................................................................................................46900
No. 06903 Serial communication error. ..........................................................................................................46900
No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ................................................................................................46900
No. 06921 PCB error. ......................................................................................................................................46900
No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB .....................................................................................46900
4000 8/9
4000
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000

Error message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage) ..... 49350
No. 9350-9381 For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-Storage/
CD-R external writing system Service Manual. ................................................................................................49350
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module ........................................................... 49450
No. 10000-010401 See the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...............49450
Attention message: Setting module/Main controller ............................................................ 49500
4 Troubleshooting
4000 9/9
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Classification of errors and attention messages [LASER, iBeam]
! Attention message
The message that appears to provide information during the normal processing is an attention message.
• If replacing consumable parts is necessary
• If the judgment of operator is necessary
• If a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
The message that appears to provide information if an abnormal error occurred is an error.
• If there is something wrong with the system
• If a serious operation mistake has been made, performing the operation not allowed to be performed
! Error/Attention message number

Error/Attention message number consists of main and suffix numbers. For 01234-00001, 01234 is the main number and 00001 is the
suffix number.
4. Troubleshooting
Main number
It identifies the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging from the content and the countermeasure represented by the main number.
Suffix number
It identifies error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition judging with the content of the suffix number and performs the diagnosis.
IMPORTANT
• The digit number of suffix number for the Error/Attention message varies depending on the model. However, the suffix
number in five digits are described in the Service Manual.
• Example: Service Manual (suffix number)

• No.05900 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
Suffix Condition
number
00001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
Model Display
LP7000, LP7100, LP7200 No.05900-1 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
3501 PLUS, 3501i PLUS, 3502 PLUS No.05900-00001 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, refer to Suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
4002
Suffix number [LASER, iBeam]
! Types of suffix number

Suffix numbers can be classified to the following three types.
• No suffix numbers
• Suffix number representing the condition
• Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number
! No suffix numbers
If the occurring condition is single
Example 1
Suffix number Condition
00000 The cover is opened.
! Suffix number representing the condition

If the occurring condition is multiple and only one of them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number appears in five digits.
4. Troubleshooting
Example 2
00001 The sensor does not detect DARK.
00002 The sensor does not detect LIGHT.
! Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number

If the occurring condition is multiple and some of them are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total of the target
suffix numbers (bit) appears.
NOTE
• The bit operation value appears by decimal digit.
Example 3
Suffix number (bit) Condition
00001 Sensor 1 does not detect.
NOTE
• If the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects, 00005 is shown. When all the sensors are the objects, 00031 is shown.
4002 1/1
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [LASER,

iBeam]
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, see ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.
Reference (LASER, iBeam)

☞ Printer I/F main PCB (LASER, iBeam) ☞ Printer control PCB (LASER, iBeam) ☞ Dual magazine PCB (LASER, iBeam)
☞ CVP PCB (LASER, iBeam) ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3) (LASER, ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10) (LASER,
iBeam) iBeam)
☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12) (LASER, ☞ Control power supply (PS20) (LASER,
iBeam) iBeam)
Reference (LASER only)

☞ Laser control PCB (LASER) ☞ G laser driver (LASER) ☞ G-AOM driver (LASER)
☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (LASER) ☞ Laser power supply (PS16) (LASER)
Reference (iBeam only)

☞ iBeam unit (iBeam) ☞ iBeam control PCB (iBeam) ☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (iBeam)
4. Troubleshooting
! Printer I/F main PCB (LASER, iBeam)
Connector No. Symptom
J/P1206 Connects to the control PCB The processor drive starts but the printer program does not start
(+5 V) The message Output device is not available. One moment please. . . appears when the
Maintenance Application is started
J/P1207 Connects to the laser control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
J/P1208 PCB (ARCNET) occurs.
J/P1207 Connects to iBeam control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
J/P1208 PCB. (ARCNET) occurs.
J/P455 Connects to the laser control No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
PCB (LVPECL)
(LASER)
Connects to iBeam control The following symptom appears when printing is started.
PCB (LVPECL) • The messages No.06183-00008 iBeam Control PCB control error. and No.06184-
(iBeam) 00008 iBeam Control PCB system error. are shown.
• Only an unexposed print is output by canceling the error message.
J/P254 Connects to the ATX No.01750-00000 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be
motherboard (LAN) active, or the LAN cable may not be connected. occurs.
! Printer control PCB (LASER, iBeam)

J/P200 Connects to the dual No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P201 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P202 Roller position sensor No.06185-00002 Roller Move Motor operation error. occurs.
(iBeam)
J/P203 Connects to the paper The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor A are DARK.)
magazine code sensor A.
J/P204 Connecting paper magazine The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor B are DARK.)
code sensor B
Connects to the triple The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor B/B2 are DARK.)
magazine PCB.
4200 1/7
4200

J/P205 Connecting to the laser No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB
(LASER)
Connects to iBeam control No.06183-00004 iBeam control PCB control error occurs when processing prints. By
PCB. canceling the error, an unexposed print is output.
(iBeam)
J/P206 Connects exposure advance No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
motor 1, 2 and exposure
advance pressure change
motor 1, 2.
J/P207 Connects the zigzagging No.06135-00002 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
correction sensor (right and No.06211-00002 Paper remains inside the exposure advance unit occurs.
left), exposure advance
pressure change sensor 1, 2,
the exposure start sensor and
the exposure end sensor.
J/P208 Connects the paper advance No.06227-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
motor 1.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P209 Connects the paper hold No.06101-00001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor, cut motor, paper
advance motor 2, paper
supply arm motor right and
paper supply arm motor left
J/P210 Connects the paper hold No.06016-00005 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor, cut home sensor, cut No.06101-00002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
end sensor, paper loading
sensor and paper end sensor
A
J/P211 Connects to paper advance No.06146-00001 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
motor 3, paper advance
pressure change motor, turn
motor and paper advance
arm motor.
J/P212 Connects the lane select No.06145-00001 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and the lane select
sensor. (For
LP7200/3502PLUS)
J/P213 Arm sensor, Turn sensor, No.06146-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
Paper advance pressure
change sensor
J/P214 Lane select sensor No.06145-00002 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
J/P215 Unused −
J/P216 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P217 Connects the printer control The printer control box cooling fan (FAN24) and inner cooling fan (FAN23) do not work.
box cooling fan (FAN24)
and inner cooling fan
(FAN23)
J/P218 Connects the counter The counter does not operate.
(option).
J/P219 Connects the interlock No.01047-00001 Close printer door. occurs while printing.
switch (printer door 1, 2).
J/P220 Connecting to the laser No.06077-00002 Interlock error. occurs.
control PCB
(LASER)
J/P221 Connects to the interlock No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
relay.
4200 2/7
4200

J/P222 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06901-00001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs.
V) from printer power
supply 1.
J/P223 Inputs the power supply No.01047-00001 Close printer door. occurs.
(+24 V) from printer power On the Input Check display, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) shows OFF.
supply 4.
J/P224 Inputs the power supply No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
(+24 V, GND) from printer
power supply 2.
J/P225 Inputs the power supply No.06227-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
(+36 V, GND) from printer
power supply 3.
J/P226 Supplies power (+36 V-1-2) No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
to the dual magazine PCB.
J/P228 Connects to paper magazine Paper magazine lamp A/B/C does not light.
lamp A/B and the triple
magazine PCB.
J/P229 Roller move motor (iBeam) No.06185-00002 Roller Move Motor operation error. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P233 Connects to the laser control No.6901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
PCB (ARCNET) occurs.
J/P232 No.6901-00001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs.
! Laser control PCB (LASER)

J/P1501 Connects to the laser unit. No.06073-00003 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
driver.
J/P1504 Connects to the laser unit. • When checked in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control
status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 The following symptom appears when printing is started.
V) from laser power supply. • No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
occurs.
J/P1508 Connects to the G-AOM The following symptom appears when printing is started.
driver. • No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
• Paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit, but printing does not start.
J/P1509 Connects to the laser unit. No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P1510 Unused −
J/P1513 Connects to the printer I/F No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
main PCB (LVPECL)
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. The following symptom appears when printing is started.
• No.06073-00001 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
J/P1516 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
J/P1517 main PCB (ARCNET) occurs.
J/P1519 Connects to the G laser No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
driver.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P1521 Unused −
4200 3/7
4200

J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit Display keeps showing Temperature control started and does not change.
and connects the inner By input check, R Laser Thermosensor and B laser temperature sensor are 0.
thermosensor.
J/P1523 Connects the printer control No.6901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
J/P1524 PCB (ARCNET). No.6901-00001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs.
J/P1546 Connects to the processor No.6901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P1545 control PCB (ARCNET) No.6901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. • When checked in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control
status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
J/P1533 Unused −
J/P1534 Connects to the printer • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch of the printer supply section turns
control PCB. on (printer doors 1 and 2) but the interlock switch of the engine section turns off (printer
doors 1 and 2).
J/P1535 Unused −
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply • When checked in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control
(+24 V) from printer power status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
supply 4.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, laser control box cooling fan 2, and the laser unit heater do
fans 1 and 2, laser control not operate.
box cooling fan 2 and the No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
laser unit heater.
! iBeam unit (iBeam)

J/P900 Inputs power (+5 V and +12 No.06182-00001 iBeam Unit control error. occurs.
V) from iBeam Control
PCB.
J/P901 Connects to iBeam control
PCB.
! iBeam control PCB (iBeam)

J/P1101 Inputs power (+5 V and +12 No.06182-00001 iBeam Unit control error. occurs.
V) to iBeam unit.
J/P1102 Connects to the iBeam unit
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
V) from iBeam power occurs.
supply.
J/P1513 Connects to the printer I/F The following symptom appears when printing is started.
main PCB (LVPECL) • The messages No.06183-00008 iBeam Control PCB control error. and No.06184-
00008 iBeam Control PCB system error. are shown.
• A print colored in black only is output by canceling the error message.
J/P1517 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
J/P1516 main PCB (ARCNET) occurs.
J/P1546 Connects to the processor No.6901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P1545 control PCB (ARCNET) No.6901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P1523 Connects the printer control No.6901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
PCB (ARCNET). occurs.
J/P1524 No.6901-00001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs.
J/P1519 Connects to the G laser No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
driver.
4200 4/7
4200

J/P1520 Connects to the printer The following symptom appears when printing is started.
control PCB. • The messages No.06183-00008 iBeam Control PCB control error. and No.06184-
00008 iBeam Control PCB system error. are shown.
• Only an unexposed print is output by canceling the error message.
J/P1522 Connects the inner Paper Temperature Correction function of Setup is being used, the quality may be
thermosensor. affected.
0 appears in the Inner Thermosensor field at Input Check.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply The paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit when printing is attempted. However the
(+24 V) from printer power system does not start printing and the error does not occur.
supply 4.
! G laser driver (LASER)

J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No.06075-0007 G Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1665 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06106 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
V) from laser power supply.
! G-AOM driver (LASER)

J/P1636 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit.
J/P1638 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1639 PCB. The following symptom appears when printing is started.
• No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
! Dual magazine PCB (LASER, iBeam)

J/P277 Connects printer door 3 No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs.
sensor.
J/P278 Connects to the printer No.01047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P279 Connects paper end sensor No.06210-00002 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
B.
J/P280 Inputs the power from No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
Printer Control PCB (+36 V-
1-2)
J/P281 Connects the paper supply No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
motor A.
J/P282 Connects paper supply No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started.
motor B.
! CVP PCB (LASER, iBeam)

J/P500 Connects to the printer The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
4200 5/7
4200

J/P501 Inputs the power supply The CVP unit does not operate.
(+24 V) from printer power
supply 3.
J/P502 Connects the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.
! Printer power supply 1 (PS3) (LASER, iBeam)

J/P313 Inputs the AC power supply No.06901-00001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs.
from the Processor relay
PCB.
J/P328 Supplies the power to the
printer control PCB (+5 V).

4. Troubleshooting
J/P317 Inputs the AC power supply No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
from the Processor relay Via output check, no motor of the exposure advance unit works.
PCB.
printer control PCB (+24 V).
J/P327 GND

J/P318 Inputs the AC power supply No.06227-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
from the Processor relay
PCB.
J/P325 printer control PCB and
CVP PCB (+36 V,GND).
! Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (LASER)

J/P314 Inputs the AC power supply • When checked in Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control
from the Processor relay status does not change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
PCB. • Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) displays OFF.
J/P316 printer control PCB, laser No.01047-00001 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB and PU control Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) displays OFF.
PCB (+24 V,GND).
! Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (iBeam)

J/P314 Inputs the AC power supply If each item of the printer is selected for both input checks and output checks, Output device
from the Processor relay is not available. One moment please... is shown.
PCB.
J/P1614 Supplies the power to the No.01047-00001 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
printer control PCB and Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) displays OFF.
iBeam control PCB (+24
V,GND).
4200 6/7
4200
! Laser power supply (PS16) (LASER)

J/P309 Inputs the AC power supply • No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
from the Processor relay occurs.
PCB. • No.1804-00000 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software.
J/P412 Supplies power to the laser occurs.
control PCB and G laser
driver PCB (+5 V, GND)
! iBeam power supply (PS16) (iBeam)

J/P309 Inputs the AC power supply The following symptom appears when the power supply of the system is turned on.
from the Processor relay • No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER/iBeam
PCB. occurs.
J/P412 Supplies the power to the • Printer Operation Status is configured to Printer is not ready. and iBeam
iBeam control PCB (+5 V). Temperature Status is Not initialized on the Printer Information display of Status
Display.
4. Troubleshooting
! Control power supply (PS20) (LASER, iBeam)
J/P310 Inputs the AC power supply The processor drive starts but the printer program does not start
from the Processor relay The message Output device is not available. One moment please. . . appears when the
PCB. Maintenance Application is started
J/P319 Supplies power (+5 V) to the
printer I/F main PCB and
MD2.
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with the connector of each
PCB unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not plugged.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• If the connector is unplugged from each PCB and no malfunctions occur when power supply of the system turned on,
the connector is explained with a remark No malfunctions will occur on this condition. in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.
4200 7/7
4203
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [LASER,

iBeam]
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, see ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.

☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply (PS1)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB2) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB3)
! Processor control PCB

J/P669 Connects to the calibration After the calibration plate is calibrated, No,06554-00001Calibration Plate advance error.
plate advance motor occurs.
J/P670 Connects the processing No.05519-00000 to 05521-00000 Thermosensor error. occur.
solution temperature sensor, No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
dryer temperature sensor.
J/P671 Connects to the control strip The red LED blinks when the control strip auto loading unit is connected. (communication
4. Troubleshooting
communication PCB. error)
J/P673 Connects the CD digital No.05509-00000 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
flowmeter.
J/P674 Connects to the laser control No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P675 PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
Connects to iBeam control
PCB. (ARCNET)
J/P676 Power supply from the No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply (+5
V)
J/P677 Connects to the processor No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
relay PCB. No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
No.00518-00000 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P679 Connects to the No.00502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
replenishment solution level
sensor
Connects the refilling water No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
tank level sensor
J/P680 Connects the STB4 No.05518-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the STB3 No.05517-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
Connects the BF circulation No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
pump.
Connects the CD circulation No.05511 -00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
pump.
J/P681 Supplies the power from the No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
processor relay PCB (+24 V). No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P682 Processing tank cooling fan Processing tank cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 do not work.
1, 2, 3 and 4
4203 1/4
4203

J/P683 Connects to the effluent float No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P684 Connects to the refilling The refilling water pump and the cleaning pump do not operate.
water pump and the cleaning
pump.
J/P686 Connects to the replenisher The replenisher pump (CD BF STB) do not operate.
pump.
J/P687 Connects to the processor No malfunctions occur on this condition.
relay PCB.
J/P688 Power supply from the The error below is repeatedly shown or cleared.
processor power supply (+24 No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
V)
No.05552-00001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No.05520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
J/P689 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunctions occur on this condition.
J/P691 Connects the processor The processor status lamp does not light.
condition lamp.
J/P692 Connects to the manual Even though the manual sorter switch is pressed, the conveyor unit does not operate.
sorter switch
J/P693 Connects the sorter unit. No.05534-00001 Print Sorter Unit operation error. occurs when prints are fed out of the
dryer, and the conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P694 Connects the conveyor unit. The conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P696 Connects the paper advance When performing the dairy setup, No.06551-00001 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter
motor, pressure change Unit. occurs.
solenoid and cooling fan By Output Check, the paper advance motor, pressure change solenoid and cooling fan do not
operate.
J/P698 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunctions occur on this condition.
J/P699 Connects the minute meter The hour meter does not operate.
J/P702 Connects the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P703 Connects the paper sensor When calibrating the colorimeter, No.06554-00003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
(emission PCB) and paper
sensor 1 and 2 (detection
PCB).
J/P704 Connects to the colorimeter. The display of initializing colorimeter unit disappears, No.06903-00002 Serial
communication error. colorimeter occurs.
J/P705 Connecting the print sensor The system does not operate even though the print is put on the conveyor unit.
(LP7000, LP7100/3501i If over 5 prints are printed, No.05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs.
PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
Connects the print sensor
(right) (left).
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
J/P706 Lane select home sensor No.05552-00001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
J/P708 Dryer lane select motor No.05552-00001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
! Processor relay PCB

J/P640 Connects to the processor All the systems do not start.
power supply
4203 2/4
4203

J/P641 Supplies power to printer The following symptom appears when the power supply of the system is turned on.
power supply 1, 2, 3, and 4, • Turn on the processor drive.
laser power supply, iBeam
• Printer Operation Status is configured to Off-line and Data backup IP address is --- on
power supply, control power
the Printer Information display of Status Display.
supply and scanner. (when
F3 is connected) • Processor Temperature Status and Processor Temperature Status are --- on the
Processor Status display of Status Display.
• All the temperatures of Solution Temperature (C) are shown as 0.0 on the Processor
Status display of Status Display.
J/P642 Connects the dryer heater. Dryer heaters (three of the six dryer heaters) do not operate.
J/P643
J/P644 Connects the processing The processing solution heater (CD, BF and STB) do not operate.
solution heater.
J/P646 Connects the processor Processor control box cooling fan does not operate.
control box cooling fan
J/P648 Connects the interlock switch No.00518-00000 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
(dryer cover).
J/P649 Connects the processing No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
solution float switch. No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
J/P650 Supplies the power to the No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
V).
J/P651 Connects to the processor No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
control PCB. No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
No.00518-00000 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P652 Connects the replenishment No malfunctions occur on this condition.
level sensor of STB 1/2/3.
J/P653 Connects the processor No malfunctions occur on this condition.
control PCB.
J/P654 Inputs the power (+24 V) All the systems do not start.
from processor power
supply.
J/P655 Connector for setting the Dryer heaters (two of the six dryer heaters) do not operate.
input voltage of the dryer See wiring diagram IPP/LPP5-7.
heater.
J/P656 Connects the dryer safety No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P657 Connects the dryer fan. No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P658 Connects the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P659 Connects the interlock switch No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
(processor top cover).
! Processor power supply (PS1)

J/P793 Power supply from the All the systems do not start.
processor relay PCB
processor control PCB (+24
V).
Supplies the power to the
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
4203 3/4
4203
! Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the CD, BF and STB heaters turns to
OFF.))

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to OFF.))

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with the connector of each
4. Troubleshooting
PCB unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not plugged.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the equipped options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET communication
feature.
4203 4/4
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor

section) [LASER, iBeam]
For how to check the fuse blowout and conditions, refer to ☞ Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse.

☞ Laser control PCB ☞ Printer control PCB ☞ CVP PCB
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Power supply
! Laser control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • No.06760-0001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs when printing is started.
+24 V-1 input power supply • By input check, it is observed that Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the
from printer power supply 4) exposure engine section. In addition, Polygon Mirror Frequency turns 0.
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
+24 V-3 input power supply change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
from printer power supply 4) • The laser control box cooling fan, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 are not rotating.
4. Troubleshooting
• By output check, turning the laser unit heater on in the exposure engine section does not
raise the temperature.
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
+24 V-2 input power supply change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
from printer power supply 4) • By input check, the following are confirmed.
The display of Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the exposure engine
section.
The display of Polygon Mirror Frequency is 0 in the exposure engine section.
The display of Laser Unit Thermosensor is 0 degree in the exposure engine section.
! Printer control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F32 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
+24 V-1 input power supply
from printer power supply 4)
F33 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No.06101-00001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No.06137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
F35 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No.06146-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
F36 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally.
+36 V input power supply No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in
from printer power supply 3) the PJP mode.
F37 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of No malfunctions occur on this condition.
! CVP PCB
Fuse No. Symptom
F25 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The CVP unit does not operate.
4252 1/3
4252
! Processor control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F14 T3.15 A/125 V (24 V power The replenisher pumps (CD, BF, STB) do not operate.
supply protection)
F15 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The error below is repeatedly shown and cleared.
input power supply +24 V-2 No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
from processor power supply)
No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No.0520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No.00502-00000 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB
occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
F16 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-3 Processing tank cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 and exhaust fan do not work.
input power supply The conveyor motor and sorter motor do not rotate.
protection)
F17 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-4 No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
input power supply No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
protection)
F18 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-5 No.05552-00001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
input power supply
protection)
! Processor relay PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T5A/250 V: This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
power supply surge protecting circuit)
F41 T10 A/250 V (protection of All the processing solution heater do not operate.
power supply for processing
solution heater)
F42 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The CD heater does not operate.
power supply for CD heater)
F43 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The BF heater does not operate.
power supply for BF heater)
F44 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The STB heater does not operate.
power supply for STB heater)
F45, F50 (T10A/250 V: dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F46, F47, F48, F49 (T6.3A/250 V: The dryer heater does not operate.
dryer heater)
F51 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-1-1) No.05516-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
(Circulation pump power No.05515-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
supply protection)
No.05511 -00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
F52 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-1-2) No.05518-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
(Circulation pump power No.05517-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
supply protection)
No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
4252 2/3
4252
Fuse No. Symptom

F53 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-2) All the systems do not start.
(Dryer fan, drive motor The processor condition light blinks red.
power supply protection) The processor control box cooling fan rotates.
! Power supply
For each power supply PCB, the fuse has not been confirmed because it is irremovable.
! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with the fuse of each PCB
removed (for example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulting from blowout of fuse when the fuse on each PCB is blowout.
• If no malfunctions occur when the system is turned on on condition that the fuse is removed from each PCB, No
malfunctions occur on this condition. is shown for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.
4. Troubleshooting
4252 3/3
4260
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer
Check the connection of the PC and printer [LASER, iBeam]
Check the connection from the PC side.
1. Access the Command Prompt of Windows.

Start → Programs or All Programs → Accessories → Click Command Prompt in this order.
Example: The desktop display
4. Troubleshooting
G085185
The Command Prompt display is shown.
2. Enter ping command and the configured IP address.

Enter the printer IP address on the PC.
Enter ping + en quad + IP address.
Example: ping 192.168.100.200
Example: Command Prompt display
S063776
3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.

Confirm that the printer of which IP address has been configured exists on the network.
4. Check the information on the display.

If the communication is normal, the display as below appears.
NOTE
• The value displayed on the screen varies depending on the environment.
4260 1/2
4260
Example: Command Prompt display
S063777
4. Troubleshooting
Example: When "Destination host unreachable." is displayed
The communication is not normal. Check the following items.
(1) Confirm that the Ethernet interface cable has been correctly connected.
(2) Confirm that the settings of the IP address and the Subnet Mask are correct.
(3) If the HUB (line concentrator) is used, confirm that the power supply of the HUB is turned on.
After checking these items, go to Step 1 to repeat the procedure.
4260 2/2
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from
Temperature control started to Temperature control completed. [LASER]
• For details about Laser temperature control status of Status Display, see ☞ 31100.
! Checking procedure
1. Confirm that the system is used in the environment of room temperature 15°C to 30°C.
2. Restart the system.
3. Check if the displayed temperature on Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up when turning on the laser
unit heater via Output Check.
Check if laser unit cooling fan 1/2 operate when turning on laser unit cooling fan 1/2 via Output Check.
☞ 35310
4. Check if the displayed temperatures of the B laser temperature sensor, R laser temperature sensor
and laser unit temperature sensor change via Output Check.
☞ 35210
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Temperature of the laser unit heater, B laser heater and R laser heater is adjusted at the same time.
5. If there is a change in the displayed temperature, wait for a while. If the temperature does not change,
check the unit for faults.
Symptom Cause
☞ If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from The temperatures are not within the processable range of
17.0°C to 42.0°C. the laser unit (17.0°C to 42.0°C).
☞ If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of B laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
☞ If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of R laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
! If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from 17.0°C to
42.0°C.
1. Check if there is a wiring connection failure.

Wiring connection failure
Laser control PCB (J/P1522) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1541) ↔ printer power supply 4 (+24 V)
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
Laser unit heater Laser unit heater resistance value Remove P855 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit heater)
resistance value between Pin 1 and 2. It is
normal if the resistance value is 15 ± 1.5 Ω.
Laser Unit Laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove P1526 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit
Thermosensor *1 value resistance value between Pin 1 and 3. It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB Laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the voltage between Pin 3 (+) Laser control PCB
voltage of P1522 and the ground is 1.0 V.
Power supply to the laser unit Normal if the voltage between Pin 7 (+) and
heater*2 Pin 8 of P1551 is the following.
• When the heater is turned on: 24 V
• When the heater is turned off: 0 V
4302 1/3
4302
*1. The list below shows laser unit thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance

ATURE ATURE ATURE ATURE
5 23 kΩ to 25 kΩ 10 18 kΩ to 20 kΩ 15 14 kΩ to 16 kΩ 20 11 kΩ to 12 kΩ
25 9.2 kΩ to 9.8 kΩ 30 7.4 kΩ to 7.9 kΩ 35 6.0 kΩ to 6.4 kΩ
*2. Check the status by turning on the Laser unit heater on Output Check.
☞ 35310
! If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
2. Make a diagnosis referring the displayed temperature on the B laser unit temperature sensor.
4. Troubleshooting
B laser temperature Peltier control voltage • If the voltage between pin 6 of J1532 Laser unit (B laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between pin 5 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is 0 V or
more and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: 0 V or more and
less than 0.8 V
• When it is off: 0 V
B Laser B laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (B laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 8 (+) and 9(−). It is thermosensor)
Laser control PCB B laser thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 8 (+) and 10 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
B laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 9 (+)
voltage and 10 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV
under 28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows B laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
5 11.4 kΩ to 12.7 kΩ 10 9.2 kΩ to 10.3 kΩ 15 7.4 kΩ to 8.5 kΩ 20 6.0 kΩ to 7.0 kΩ
! If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
4302 2/3
4302
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the R laser unit temperature sensor.
R laser temperature Peltier control voltage • If the voltage between Pin 6 of J1532 Laser unit (R laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between Pin 5 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is 0 V or
more and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: 0 V or more and
less than 0.8 V
• When it is off: 0 V
R Laser R laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (R laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 1 (+) and 2(−). It is thermosensor)
Laser control PCB R laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 1 (+) and 3 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
R laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 2 (+)
voltage and 3 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV under
4. Troubleshooting
28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows R laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
5 11.4 kΩ to 12.7 kΩ 10 9.2 kΩ to 10.3 kΩ 15 7.4 kΩ to 8.5 kΩ 20 6.0 kΩ to 7.0 kΩ
4302 3/3
4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [LASER]
Specifying the occurring place (LASER)

The line appears inputting from the film. The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.
↓YES ↓YES
The line occurs in the image saved from a film NO ☞ Inputting side is not good. (around the
to a media. → scanner and around the AFC)
↓YES
The line appears inputting from the media. NO Perform Image Path Check of Self-
→ diagnostic.☞ 35920
↓YES Around the laser unit is not
→ good.
NOTE
• ← in the list below is the paper advance direction.
Around the laser unit is not good.

Symptom Image Countermeasure
4. Troubleshooting
The light density line (white) in • Clean the glass surface of the laser unit.
the paper advance direction is See ☞ Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass.
occurred. • Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the
• Replace the following parts if there is no
improvement after cleaning the laser unit and
Laser unit
The monochrome line • Replace the laser unit if there is no

perpendicular to paper advance improvement after resetting the power supply.
direction is occurred.
The stripped pattern like a wavy • Replace the laser unit if there is no
line in the whole part of print is improvement after resetting the power supply.
occurred.
4390 1/3
4390
Around the laser unit is not good.

Symptom Image Countermeasure
There is noise all over the print. • Replace the laser unit if there is no
improvement after resetting the power supply.
Light color appears in • Process the control strip and check the color of
unexposure position. the white part. If the problem occurs, the
chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass
cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and
4. Troubleshooting
make a setup print. If there is a difference
between the unexposed position shielded by the
splicing tape and regular unexposed position,
the abnormal print is caused by leakage of laser
beam.
• Replace the laser unit.
There is a color shift. • Confirm Exposure Magnification
Approx. 0.5 mm Correction.☞ 36020
Confirm Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
Confirm Exposure Magnification Fine
Adjustment. ☞ 36040
← • If the problem reoccurs after the adjustments
above, replace the AOM driver or laser unit.
Approx. 18 to 19 mm • Replace the AOM driver or laser unit.
Banding occurs. ☞ 25820

White/black lines (Horizontal) ☞ 36090
! Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass

• When the line is not clear, the dust may adhere to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit or inside of the laser unit. When the line
is clear, the dust may adhere around the focal plane regulating guide.
4390 2/3
4390
1. Open the exposure advance unit and clean the laser dustproof glass using the supplied cleaning sheet
(soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, wipe in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has been
removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in order
not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.
4. Troubleshooting
Laser dust-proof glass
G085852
4390 3/3
4470
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [iBeam]
! Explanation
If an abnormal image occurs, diagnose referring to the trouble list below.
NOTE
• ↑ in the list below is the paper advance direction.
Trouble list Image Reference

Line White line (Vertical) See ☞ White line and black line
Black line (Vertical) appear on a print. (vertical) [iBeam].
Black line (Vertical) NOTE

3.5 mm from paper edge
• If streaks appear within 3.5 mm
4. Troubleshooting
from paper edge, the iBeam unit
does not have problems.
• For details, refer to ☞ Streaks
appears on test prints of iBeam
tuning. [iBeam].
White line (Vertical) iBeam unit failure
White line (Vertical) See ☞ Mistake in setting of focal

plane regulating guide [iBeam].
Paper Width line Example: 89 mm or 127 mm NOTE

• The paper width line does not
occur due to the iBeam unit
failure.
• For details, refer to
☞ Appearing the paper width
line [iBeam].
203 mm
4470 1/9
4470
Trouble list Image Reference

White line (Horizontal) NOTE
Black line (Horizontal) • For details, refer to banding
shooting of the exposure
advance unit ☞ 25820.
Unevenness of density NOTE

(vertical)
• For details, see Check points at
iBeam Tuning
See ☞ 4480.
4. Troubleshooting
4470 2/9
4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [iBeam]
! Specifying the occurring place
The line appears inputting from the film.

The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.
YES
YES
YES
The line occurs in the image saved from a film ☞ Inputting side is not good. (around the
to a media. scanner and around the AFC)
NO
The line appears inputting from the media. NO

Perform Image Path Check of Self-
diagnostic.
☞ 35920
4. Troubleshooting
YES
☞ Outputting side is not good. (exposure

advance unit, iBeam unit)
Do the white line or the black line disappear? YES

End
NO
☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner
Do the white line or the black line disappear? YES

End
NO
Perform Image Path Check of Self-diagnostic.

☞ 35920
NO
Perform iBeam Engine Check of Paper Specification Registration/Setup.

☞ 32512
The MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 50%?

YES
The Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 20%?
Replacing iBeam unit
4470 3/9
4470
! Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner and around the AFC)
1. Clean the AFC.
Slot of AFC (135/240 AFC-II) Slot of AFC (120 AFC-II)
4. Troubleshooting
Lens unit
G078470
2. Clean the scanner lens and the LED light source unit glass.
LED light source unit Scanner lens
G078471
3. After cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, perform the Light Source Update.
4. If the condition is not improved after cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, the
LED light source unit or the Scanner unit may be defective.
5. Operation is completed. (Return to the workflow.)
4470 4/9
4470
! Outputting side is not good. (exposure advance unit, iBeam unit)
1. Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
Focal plane regulating guide
4. Troubleshooting
G082678
2. Clean the iBeam unit.
iBeam unit
G082676
3. Confirm the flatbed scanner glass and clean it if it is soiled.
4. Perform iBeam Tuning via Paper Specification Registration/Setup.

For details of iBeam Tuning, refer to ☞ 32511.
4470 5/9
4470
! Problems of the flatbed scanner
1. Confirm that the image scanned with the flatbed scanner at iBeam Tuning.
If the scanned image is not normal, confirm the connection, replace or reinstall the driver software of the flatbed scanner.
IMPORTANT
• Three images of PreScan Tmp (prescanning image), ScanTmp_Left (scanning image: left) or
ScanTmp_Right (scanning image: right) are saved in Tmp.
Saving destination for the scanning image
LP7000 3501i PLUS
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ [Registered date • C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Registered date folder]
folder] \Tmp \Tmp
• The image data in Tmp is overwritten every time you perform iBeam Tuning. If reset the power supply, the
image data in Tmp will be deleted.
PreScan Tmp ScanTmp_Left ScanTmp_Right
4. Troubleshooting
G082762
2. If the error occurs in scanning the image data, confirm it referring to the diagnosis in Chapter 4.
4470 6/9
4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [iBeam]
Line
G082764
! Cause
The error above occurs if you print in condition that the focal plane regulating guide is not securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
! Corrective action
Confirm that the focal plane regulating guide is securely attached.
G082679
4470 7/9
4470
Appearing the paper width line [iBeam]
Example: 89 mm or 127 mm
203 mm
G082762
4. Troubleshooting
! Cause
The error above occurs when printing with the bigger size paper (203 mm etc.) after you print hundreds of images with the smaller size
paper (89 mm etc.) repeatedly.
The paper width line does not occur due to the iBeam unit failure.
! Corrective action
Carry out iBeam Tuning via Paper Specification Registration/Setup to delete the line.
For the details of iBeam Tuning, refer to ☞ 32511.
4470 8/9
4470
Streaks appears on test prints of iBeam tuning. [iBeam]
Exposed area of normal prints
3.5 mm Exposure Center 3.5 mm
Test print 2
(Rear)
Paper advance
direction Test print 1
(Front)
4. Troubleshooting
G085313
! Cause
• If streaks appear within 3.5 mm from paper edge, the iBeam unit does not have problems.
NOTE
• When a test print of iBeam tuning is scanned with a flatbed scanner, streaks on paper edges cannot be corrected normally because
of the scanner light, so iBeam tuning correction is not performed for areas of about 1.8 mm from paper edges.
Therefore, streaks may appear on areas of 3.5 mm from paper edges.
• Two test prints are output in iBeam tuning and their exposed positions are shifted back and forth by 3.5 mm from those of normal
prints. Therefore, streaks on areas of 3.5 mm from paper edges does not affect normal prints.
4470 9/9
4480
Check point for the iBeam Tuning
! Explanation
If Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. or Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign
matter from the flatbed scanner glass surface or test print and measure again. is shown at iBeam Tuning, or if performing iBeam
Tuning several times did not improve uneven density, confirm the check point.
! Check point
1. Confirm that the focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit is in the right place.
4. Troubleshooting
G085938
2. Output the test print of iBeam Tuning.
4480 1/5
4480
3. Check uneveness of density on the iBeam tuning chart.

• If many uneven part of the density are found on the iBeam tuning chart, or if unevenness of density is not improved, read
iBeam tuning data, then perform the set up, which will save the set up time.
iBeam tuning chart Corrective action

If the number of the part where the density is uneven is small
1. Perform iBeam tuning.
If many uneven part of the density are found

1. Read the iBeam tuning data that was shipped with the
system.
4. Troubleshooting
2. Perform iBeam tuning.
4. Insert the iBeam tuning chart in place and perform iBeam Tuning.
5. Confirm the condition of the iBeam tuning chart.
Saving destination for the scanning image

LP7000 3501i PLUS
folder] \Tmp \Tmp
1. Compare the Y, M and C density of the Coordinate check line.

2. Compare the Y, M and C focus of the Coordinate check line.
• The image data in Tmp is overwritten every time you perform iBeam Tuning.
If you perform above test, move the image data saved in Tmp (ScanTmp_Left and ScanTmp_Right) to an another folder after the
first iBeam Tuning.
4480 2/5
4480
Coordinate check line (closeup)

• Example 1: for the No Good image data,
OK density is lower than that of the OK image
Coordinate check line data.
• Example 2: for the No Good image data,
focus is worse than that of the OK image data.
Example 1 Example 2
NG NG
Measurement section
4. Troubleshooting
G085939
6. In this case, confirm/perform below, which may solve the problem.
Example 1
For the No Good image data, density is lower than that of the OK image data.
Paper, processing solution Manual No. Others Manual No.

The combination of paper and processing − Carry out daily setup, paper specification −
solution is not compatible with the iBeam. registration setup, paper magazine registration
setup and initial setup, then confirm that these
increase the density of the coordinate check
line.
Process the control strip and check the − iBeam control PCB ☞ 64151
condition of the processing solution.
iBeam unit ☞ 26720
Exposure advance unit failure ☞ 25810
4480 3/5
4480
Example 2
Focus of the No Good image data is worse than that of the OK image data.
Cause Manual No.

Check if the iBeam head is dirty. −
iBeam head
Check if the focal plane regulating guide bends. −
Focal plane regulating guide
4. Troubleshooting
iBeam unit failure ☞ 26720
Exposure advance unit failure ☞ 25810
! Diagnosis
Diagnosis for the flatbed scanner
1. Prepare two iBeam tuning charts with which iBeam Tuning has been performed correctly.
iBeam tuning chart
Coordinate check line
Measurement section
G082775
4480 4/5
4480
2. Place iBeam tuning charts with which iBeam Tuning has been normally performed to the flatbed
scanner which an attention message is shown, then carry out iBeam Tuning.
If an attention message appears

• Problems of the flatbed scanner
Confirm connection of the flatbed scanner, change scanners, and reinstall driver software.
If no attention messages appear
• Confirm ☞ Check point.
4. Troubleshooting
4480 5/5
4600
Diagnosis appendix: [F]
Replenishment cartridge setting section troubleshooting flow [LASER,

iBeam]
The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO
Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door inserting the driver through the door space.
See ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.
4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenisher cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge installation section to the upper position in the Output Check,
and remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
See ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.
Confirm that the Light Lock Door Motor operates

normally in the Output Check.
Confirm that the replenishment cartridge installation sensor is
normal.
Operating
Not operating
The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No
The replenishment cartridge opening motor or F replenishment I/O PCB is failed.
Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

☞ 4610
4600 1/2
4600
! How to open/close the replenisher section door

If the replenishment cartridge installation section is lowered and the replenisher section door is locked, insert the flathead driver into
the slits beside the processor rear cover, lift the lever, unlock it, then open/close the replenisher section door.
Slit
Lever
4. Troubleshooting
Processor rear cover
G085896
! Replenishment cartridge setting section

Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
Replenishment cartridge setting section
G085933
4600 2/2
4610
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam]
YES Replenishment solution is left in the replenisher cartridge.

The replenisher cartridge is open.
Replenishment solution leaks in the solution tank.
NO
YES NO
1. Discharge all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank.

If the replenish cartridge is not open, perform Mixing ☞ 27550
Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
2. Attach new replenish cartridge. After the problems are solved,
☞ 33003 perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the
status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor at Input Check.
The maximum additional water (ml)

P1R P2RA P2RB
3695 642.5 642.5
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding
water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.
• ☞ No. 05905[F]−0001P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution

level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05907[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting and initialize the replenishment data.
☞ 33003
The printing process can be continued.
4610 1/1
4620
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error [LASER, iBeam]
The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
NO
Add a small amount of water to turn ON all of the P1R (Upper)

Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
(P1R/P2RA/P2RB). ☞ 27550 Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.
Attach new replenisher cartridge.
4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
4620 1/1
4630
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs
1. Error No. 05916 to No. 05921 occurs.
2. Remove the filter pipe of each processing tank, then push and sink the float of the processing solution float
switch with a stick to confirm the processing solution float switch moves smoothly.
Floats
4. Troubleshooting
Sticks
G069042
If the processing solution float switch does not move smoothly

• Check that each processing solution float switch is not soiled.
3. If the processing solution in a tank is found to be below the cutout of the sub-tank or the solution level
indicator, add the processing solution from the sub-tank.
Solution level check positions
Cutout Solution level indicator
G085934
4. Error recurs?
Error recurs Manual No. No error Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63280 Check each replenishment pump output ☞ 33003
amount again.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Check the output amounts of auto cleaning ☞ 33004
pump + each automated cleaning valve again.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Replenisher pump ☞ 63280
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 64250 P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
4630 1/1
40500
Attention message: Processor
No. 00500[N]
Add water to the Refilling Water Tank.
Attention message release

YES
Condition
00000 The refilling water tank level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Failed parts Manual No.

Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63290
4. Troubleshooting
$ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.
40500 1/10
40500
No. 00501[N]
The replenisher switch is turned on.

YES
• The replenisher switch turns ON by pressing the YES key.
Condition
00000 After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a specified number of seconds of replenishment lack time has
passed.
After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a specified time has passed with the replenishment solution sensor
ON.
After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, manual replenishment or output amount measurement is carried
out.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 2/10
40500
No. 00502[N]
Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank.

YES
Condition
00001 CD replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.
00002 BF replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.
00004 STB replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63290

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
40500 3/10
40500
No. 00503[N] [SM]

Empty the Effluent Tank.

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns ON.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns ON.
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns ON.
00008 P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch turns ON.
Check Point
1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis

Effluent float switch ☞ 63290

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
40500 4/10
40500
No. 00505
Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically released when prints are removed.
NOTE
• While this message appears, the sorter is not activated.
Condition
00000 The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Print full sensor ☞ 63510
NOTE
40500 5/10
40500
No. 00507
Close the Processor Top Cover.

• When the interlock switch (processor top cover) is ON, automated release is activated.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
When refilling with water is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns OFF.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 • Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
• Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 6/10
40500
No. 00508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off?

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn OFF the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being ON.
Condition
00000 Although paper still remains in the processing rack or dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.
NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the specification.
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 7/10
40500
No. 00518
Set the Dryer Cover.

• This message will be released automatically when the dryer cover is closed.
Condition
00000 When starting to print, the interlock switch (dryer cover) was OFF.
While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
1 Check that the dryer section or dryer cover is securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63290

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 8/10
40500
No. 00519
Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit.

YES
Condition
00000 When the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance length does not remain inside the processor at the time
of detecting the rear end of the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance length at the print sensor
When the first print of the next order entered at the time of detecting the rear end of the print with over 420 mm
of the paper advance length at the print sensor
When the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance length occurs 20 times consecutively inside the
processor at the time of detecting the rear end of the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance length at the
print sensor
(When the paper advance length is 420.1 to 610.0 mm:)
When detecting the rear end of the print at the print sensor while the long length print (36 inch) is processed*1
(When the paper advance length is 610.1 to 914.4 mm:)
4. Troubleshooting
*1. For the long length print (36inch), you are required to remove the print fed out of the dryer immediately. Therefore, the attention message occurs every
time when the print is fed out.
If the Long Length Print Ejection (36inch) is set to OFF on theOperator Selections→Processor 1, the attention message occurs under the same
condition of the 420.1 to 610.0mm paper advance length.
40500 9/10
40500
No. 00520
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
- The light source level is 255 when the sensor status changes from dark to light during Print Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment.

00001 Print Sensor (Left) (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
00002 Print Sensor (Right) (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
00004 Printer Sensor (LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis

Print sensor ☞ 63510
(LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
Print sensor (right) (left)
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)

- ☞ 4252
NOTE
40500 10/10
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
No. 00600[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD
No. 00601[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF
No. 00602[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB

• The message will be automatically released when the cartridge is replaced.
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 00600-00000 CD Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the CD Drum motor was started.
No. 00601-00000 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the BF Drum motor was started.
No. 00602-00000 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the STB Drum motor was started.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Drum motor
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
40600 1/6
40600
No. 00603[J]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW tank level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
SW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40600 2/6
40600
No. 00604[J]
Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW/DW tank level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
SW/DW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40600 3/6
40600
No. 00605[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD
No. 00606[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF
No. 00607[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB

• This attention message will be automatically released when you attach the tablet cartridge.
Condition
No. 00605-00000 The CD Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00606-00000 The BF Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00607-00000 The STB Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
40600 4/6
40600
No. 00609[J]
The Tablet kit is empty.

YES
Condition
00000 All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped.
NOTE
• If all tablets of CD in a kit are dropped, Tablet Operation is to be carried out and tablets of BF and STB are to be dropped up to Drop
Limit.
4. Troubleshooting
40600 5/6
40600
No. 00610[J]
Empty the Effluent Tank.###

NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns ON, all water supply pumps and cleaning pumps stops physically.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns ON.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns ON.
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns ON.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• At the removal of two solutions, when the suffix number 04 appears, BF+STB will appear.
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63290
NOTE
40600 6/6
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
No. 00700[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be released only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the replenishment
package sensor once.)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these messages
appear. When the following conditions, the tanks are not refilled forcibly.
SM Replenishment Detecting condition of the replenishment solution sensor

Setting
ON The replenishment solution is not detected when the power is ON.
The replenishment solution is not detected when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the replenishment package is not detected at the same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 1/6
40700
No. 00701[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

• When the replenishment package is set, the message is released automatically and attention message No. 00703 Would you like to
initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? appears.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns OFF.
00002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the replenishment package sensor −
4. Troubleshooting
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 2/6
40700
No. 00702[SM]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 The water supply tank level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
40700 3/6
40700
No. 00703[SM]
Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package?

YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns OFF.
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 4/6
40700
No. 00704[SM]
Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns OFF.
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 5/6
40700
No. 00705[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be released only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the replenishment
package sensor once.)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 6/6
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
No. 00900[F]
PSR is running out.
Countermeasure message
Add 8 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
YES
• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve two tablets in 8 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve two tablets in 10 liters of water, then replenish 8 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• Even if the above attention message is shown, printing can be continued until the message ☞ No. 00901[F] PSR is empty. is shown.
• The above attention message starts condition check after Start Up Check is performed.
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
00000 • PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66400
NOTE
40900 1/13
40900
No. 00901[F]
PSR is empty.
YES
• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve three tablets in 12 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve three tablets in 15 liters of water, then replenish 12 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• When the above attention message appears, printing process stops.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 • PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 2/13
40900
No. 00902[F]
Install the replenisher cartridge.

YES
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor is off.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
Check Point
Check that replenisher cartridge is correctly set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 3/13
40900
No. 00903[F]
Close the replenisher section door.

Closing the replenisher section door cancels the attention message.
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the replenisher section cover is opened.
Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 4/13
40900
No. 00904[F]
Replenish PSR.
YES
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 5/13
40900
No. 00905[F]
Install the new replenisher cartridge.

YES
Condition
00000 After opening the cartridge, all the following sensors remain off though a specified time has passed.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
• The replenisher cartridge setting part is raised, and the attention message appears.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check that an empty replenisher cartridge is not set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 6/13
40900
No. 00906[F]
It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge.

YES
Condition
00000 If this system is closed down and started while mixing Replenisher has been completed by a cartridge open
NOTE
• If creating the replenishment solution is completed, this attention message is shown only once when the system starts up.
• When creating replenishment solution on the previous day, this message appears while Start Up Checks are performed.
Replace an empty replenishment cartridge with a new cartridge in advance. When the solution runs out, replenishment solution will be
automatically created which will save you from stopping printing.
It is recommended that cartridges be replaced at the start up of the day.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Set a new cartridge.
40900 7/13
40900
No. 00907[F]
Collect the waste solution.

Condition
00001 P1 Effluent Float Switch turns ON.
00002 P2 Effluent Float Switch turns ON.
Check Point
Check the solution level of the effluent tank. -
Check the effluent float switch status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

• P1 Effluent Float Switch ☞ 63280
• PS Effluent Float Switch
NOTE
40900 8/13
40900
No. 00908[F]
Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will
resume.

YES
Condition
00000 The system is shut down with opening operation remaining incomplete and the system is started.
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 9/13
40900
No. 00909[F]
Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation.

YES
Condition
Condition
When trying to measure the output amount or perform the initial replenishment when the replenishment solution level sensor for
replenishment tank is under the conditions below.

00001 P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00002 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00004 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00008 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 10/13
40900
No. 00910[F]
Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . .

YES
Condition
Condition
While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum number of printed sheets (approx. 230 sheets for
127 mm × 89 mm).
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 11/13
40900
No. 00912[F]
Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart
replenishment.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the replenishment data.
• When Mixing Replenisher is performed by mistake while the replenishment solution is created normally, select NO.
Maintain the status without initializing the replenishment data.
Condition
Condition
If all the (upper and lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the Mixing
Replenisher operation.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors, attention No. 912 is shown if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing Mixing
Replenisher with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
4. Troubleshooting
40900 12/13
40900
No. 00913[F]
Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
Drain the replenishment solution from the tank.
YES
Condition
Condition
If the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on after the Mixing Replenisher is clicked

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If any one of the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Mixing Replenisher and a
specified time has passed, ☞ No. 05923[F] occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Mixing Replenisher with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 13/13
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 01000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
No. 01001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B

YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.
Condition
00000 Paper end sensor A or B is turned light during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
Diagnosis
☞ 61200
4. Troubleshooting
Paper end sensor A or B
Double magazine PCB (for dual magazine unit) ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
41000 1/11
41000
No. 01002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 01003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
Condition
00000 An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is carried out
or after you replaced the paper magazine.
Model Details
4. Troubleshooting
LP7100/3501 1. When the paper size of the magazine which is in use changes from narrow to wide: One piece of paper is
PLUS advanced by 200 mm advance.
LP7000/3501i NOTE
PLUS
• Advancing a piece of paper by 200 mm advance in detail 1 above is for cleaning the processing rack.
2. For LP7000/3501i PLUS, two pieces of paper are advanced by 200 mm before printing the test print of iBeam
Tuning.
NOTE
• In test printing for iBeam Tuning, the purpose of advancing the paper is the same as that of advancing the
paper when the paper size changes from narrow to wide, because the test prints are printed on the outer
sides than the maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced because the system advances paper to both the left and right sides along
the paper advancing direction.
3. Except for Details No. 1 and 2: One piece of paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
LP7200/3502 1. One piece of paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
PLUS
NOTE
• Refer to ☞ 55800 for other conditions.
41000 2/11
41000
No. 01004
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 01005
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B

YES
Condition
00000 When executing printing whose magazine is not installed if the paper magazine code sensor A or B turns light
during setup or printing of the machine adjustment.
NOTE
• This attention occurs only for setup prints or system adjustment prints.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
Diagnosis
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. ☞ 61050

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 61050
NOTE
41000 3/11
41000
No. −
The measurement failed. Measure it again.

YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again.
• Select NO to stop the operation.
Condition
− The test print paper type for measurement was not correct.
When measuring the daily setup test print, the density between steps did not rise consecutively.
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days were not
ready.
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively day by day and changed suddenly.
− Even though the range of the Dmax is within 0.9 and 3.8, the correction value density was over 10 times as high
4. Troubleshooting
as the previous value when calculating the daily setup correction value,
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value density was 3 key or more. And minus
correction (print density has been risen) has been carried out.
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total correction value (density), which started as soon as
the initial setup or paper specification registration setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And minus
correction (print density has been risen) has been carried out.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the colorimeter.
2 Check that the test print is correctly made.
Between steps
G083195
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number.
When the test print color density is normal.
The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27110
Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
Clean the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27100
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
41000 4/11
41000

Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing Emulsion Number
Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration setup
of other magazines.
If the test print color density is abnormal.

Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
(LASER)
Laser power supply ☞ 64250
(LASER)
Laser unit ☞ 61450
(LASER)
iBeam control PCB ☞ 64151
(iBeam)
Printhead module ☞ 26720
(iBeam)
4. Troubleshooting
Problems may occur when the processing solution has been replaced.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration
setup of other magazines.
NOTE
41000 5/11
41000
No. 01047
Close printer door.

• This attention message will be released automatically when the printer door is closed.
Condition
00001 The interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
00002 Printer door 3 sensor turns off.
NOTE
• The power is not supplied to some electrical parts when the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Confirm that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are firmly closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
F32 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140

Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) -
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61050
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050
Triple magazine PCB (for triple magazine unit) ☞ 64200
Printer power supply 4 ☞ 64250

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
NOTE
41000 6/11
41000
No. 01074
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
Condition
The light source level when the sensor status changes from DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in Paper Sensor Adjustment.

00001 Paper end sensor A (SE13)
00002 Paper end sensor B (SE41)
00004 Paper loading sensor (SE14)
00256 Paper end sensor B2 (SE5)
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A (SE13) ☞ 61200
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper end sensor B2 (SE5)
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Triple magazine PCB (for triple magazine unit) ☞ 64200
NOTE
41000 7/11
41000
No. 01093
Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing?

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop printing process.
1. Click YES.
The attention message disappears and printing process is completed.
2. Perform iBeam Tuning.
☞ 32511
• Select NO to continue printing process.
NOTE
• If printing process proceeded after selecting NO, confirm the finished quality of print and perform iBeam Tuning if necessary.
☞ 32511
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
- When selecting to print to a wide paper size after printing more than the specified number of prints in succession
at a single narrower paper size (default: 300 prints), uneven print caused by hysteresis may occur. Encourage
iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• This attention is not shown if Notification of Print Quality Confirmation (0: Invalid) (in the service mode) is set to 0 in the Printer
1 tab on the Operator Selections display.
41000 8/11
41000
No. 01094
Unit is not attached.

YES
Condition
Condition
When the motor protection circuit of paper supply unit A or paper advance unit operates

00001 Paper supply unit A
00002 Paper advance unit
00003 The Paper Supply Unit A and Paper Advance Unit
NOTE
• The corresponding unit is displayed in the second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• This attention message occurs due to the wiring connection failure at the drawer connector connected when having set
each unit, each motor failure and printer control PCB failure.
Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below when the problem recurs even after attaching and removing each unit.
Diagnosis
Paper supply unit A
Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper advance motor 2
Paper supply arm motor (left)
Roller move motor (only for iBeam)
Paper supply unit A drawer connector failure (J/P485, J/P486) -
Paper advance unit

Turn motor ☞ 61400
Paper advance arm motor
Paper advance motor 3
Paper advance pressure change motor
Lane select motor (only for LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Paper advance unit A drawer connector failure (J/P493, J/P494) -
NOTE
41000 9/11
41000
No. 01012−01120
Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual
Condition
IMPORTANT
• Attention messages not explained in this Service Manual are listed in the table.
For corrective actions, see the Troubleshooting Manual (LP7000 series/QSS-35 PLUS), EZ Controller
Troubleshooting Manual and EZ Controller Service Manual.
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual.
Attention message table
No. 01012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel.
No. 01018 Would you like to stop processing?
No. 01032 One moment please. . .
No. 01040 Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key.
See the Troubleshooting Manual (LP7000 series/QSS-35 PLUS)

No. 01081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
No. 01096 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01097 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B2
No. 01098 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B2
No. 01099 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B2
No. 01100 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
No. 01101 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
No. 01102 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B
No. 01103 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
No. 01108 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B2
No. 01110 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
No. 01111 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 01116 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B2
No. 01118 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01119 Which paper magazine would you like to print with?
No. 01120 Which paper magazine would you like to print with?
No. 01124 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A
No. 01125 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine B
No. 01129 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine B2
No. 01130 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine B
41000 10/11
41000
See the EZ Controller Service Manual.

No. 01095 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
4. Troubleshooting
41000 11/11
41300
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier
No. 01302−01439
Condition
IMPORTANT
Refer to the EZ Controller Service Manual and Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
No. 01302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 01456 Could not start the scanner.
No. 01457 The scanner has canceled processing. Processing will quit.
See the Scanner Service Manual.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 01305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
No. 01306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 01314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 01315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted. process cannot be continued.
No. 01316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 01317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction.
No. 01318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 01319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted.
No. 01320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.
NOTE
No. 01400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 01401 Attach the Film Carrier.
No. 01402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 01303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 01404 The IX frame data is incomplete.
No. 01405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 01410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 01412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing?
No. 01413 Input the frame number
No. 01414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 01416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 01417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 01421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed.
No. 01422 Select the 135 lane.
41300 1/2
41300

No. 01423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed.
No. 01425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete.
No. 01426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 01427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 01429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 01430 Confirm the frame size.
No. 01435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
No. 01438 Set the attachment.
No. 01439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan?
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41300 2/2
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media
No. 01501−01549
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Storage Media)
No. 01501 The media is write protected.
No. 01502 Replace the media.
No. 01503 The appropriate file was not found.
No. 01510 Read the data. Set the media.
No. 01511 Write the data. Set the media.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01512 Data was not read from the media.
No. 01513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media?
No. 01515 Data is too large to write.
No. 01516 Data is too large to read.
No. 01517 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files?
No. 01520 Select the template.
No. 01521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print.
No. 01522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one?
No. 01523 It was not registered as an option.
No. 01528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing.
No. 01529 Failed to read the bar code.
No. 01530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists.
No. 01531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected.
No. 01534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media?
No. 01539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No. 01540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting.
No. 01542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 01546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity Setting.
No. 01547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media.
No. 01548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01549 Data is too small to read.
NOTE
41500 1/1
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 01552
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.

YES
Condition
00001 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensor 1 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1 turned
LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
00002 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensors 1 and 2 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1
turned LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow. ☞ 56610
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63520
Paper advance motor
NOTE
41550 1/2
41550
No. 01555
The calibration plate data is out of range.

YES
Condition
00000 When calibrating the colorimeter, the difference between the two photometry values obtained by the calibration
plate measurements at the 9 mm point (black position) and 18 mm point (white position) from the leading end is
100 or less.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print judgment operation flow. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Wipe the measurement area using a firmly squeezed damp soft cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water. Then, wipe
and dry it up using a dry soft cloth.
4. Troubleshooting
Measurement part
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.

IMPORTANT
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and inserted it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 27100
• If the same attention message appears after Updating the Calibration Plate Data, follow the diagnosis below.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27110
For defective parts
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the colorimeter unit failure.

NOTE
41550 2/2
41620
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common
No. 01750
Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable
may not be connected.

Retry or Continue
• If Retry is selected, the system starts connecting maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB again.
If the communication fails, the same attention is displayed.
• Select Continue to stop the process.
Condition
00000 The communication between the printer maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB failed.
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer. -
2 Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. ☞ 4260
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
• Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. -
☞ 4260
• Confirm that the settings of the IP address and the Subnet Mask are correct.
☞ 64101, ☞ 37610
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 35500
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520

Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 64101
PC -
NOTE
41620 1/8
41620
No. 01751
There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and
PC. The printer clock was adjusted to match the PC clock.

YES
The attention message is closed.
Condition
00000 If time difference between the printer timer and operation computer was two minutes or more, and the timer
setting of the printer was changed to that of the operation computer.
IMPORTANT
• The error above appears for the FRONTIER-Printer only.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 2/8
41620
No. 01752
Printer is not ready. One moment please. . .

YES
• The attention message is closed.
Wait until the printer is ready to process.
Condition
00000 This attention is displayed when the operation computer inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not
while it is initialized or maintenance is performed.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 3/8
41620
No. 01753
Printer is not ready. Start the printer.

• While the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. The close down checks is canceled.
• After the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. Start this system.
Condition
00000 This attention is displayed when the operation computer inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not
while the close down checks is performed or after it is finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 4/8
41620
No. 01754
Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application.

YES
Condition
00000 If the profile data has no compatibility when connecting the NKC maintenance application to the OEM printer.
Check Point
1 Check the profile data. -
4. Troubleshooting
41620 5/8
41620
No. 01756
Printer profile versions are inconsistent. Install the profile data that matches from the
profile data CD.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the profile version is different between the printer I/F main PCB and
operation computer.
Check Point
Model Countermeasure Manual No.
LP7000, LP7100, LP7200 Install the printer CD. -
QSS-3501i PLUS, QSS-3501 PLUS, 1. Install the profile CD. -
QSS-3502 PLUS 2. Carry out the daily setup.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
41620 6/8
41620
No. 01757
Execute the startup checks.

1. Click YES.
2. Perform the start up checks.
Condition
00000 This attention is displayed when the operation computer inquiries something even though the start up checks has
not been finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 7/8
41620
No. 01621−01722
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (NMC)
No. 01637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted.
No. 01638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted.
No. 01639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01644 Exif Information was not read.
No. 01645 Data is too large to read.
No. 01646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No. 01649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write.
No. 01650 Data is too small to read.
No. 01658 The Picture CD could not be created because there are more frames than can be saved.
No. 01702 Meida is being written. One moment please. . .
No. 01719 New software has been received. Would you like to upgrade the software?
No. 01720 E-mail has received.
No. 01723 Uploading the setting data. One moment please. . .
No. 01724 %s is running.
NOTE
41620 8/8
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
No. 01801
Execute software upgrade.

YES
Condition
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked when the power supply is turned on, it is not correct.
Suffix number PCB

(bit)
00001 Printer control PCB
00008 Processor control PCB
00200 Laser control PCB/iBeam control PCB
NOTE
• The name of PCB for which the attention occurred is displayed in the second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
• Perform diagnosis following the reference of each PCB below.
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
Laser control PCB (LASER) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (iBeam) ☞ 64151
NOTE
41800 1/3
41800
No. 01804
The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the versions of the printer control PCB, processor control PCB and laser
control PCB/ iBeam control PCB are different from those saved on the computer.
NOTE
• This attention is displayed only when the versions on the computer are newer.
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
41800 2/3
41800
No. 01805
The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the software of the printer I/F main PCB corrupts and cannot function.
IMPORTANT
• The attention message above is shown if the power supply is reset during upgrading the printer.
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer.
2 Start the recovery software to recover it.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• If starting the recovery software, set the address of the printer I/F main PCB to 192.168.1.11.
If the same address is used for other printer, connect the PC and the printer I/F main PCB directly.
• The recovery software does not operate correctly when starting the recovery software while the error above is not
shown.
Procedure
1. Click in the order of Start of Windows →Programs or All Programs→NPIPLVUP.
2. The DOS display is shown for a moment and the recovery software starts, then upgrading is performed.
IMPORTANT
• It will take about one minute to upgrade. Do not turn off the power supply during upgrading.
3. Restart the printer/processor section.
Diagnosis
NOTE
41800 3/3
41821
Attention message: External system
No. 1821
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Attention message (External system)
No. 1821 The data cannot be output to the External System. Confirm the power supply of External System.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41821 1/1
41900
Attention message: Main
No. 01920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status.

YES
• Select YES to operate as the low capability type input section.
Condition
00016 The capacity booster PCB E is not detected during startup. (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
00512 If the option CD for the capacity booster E is not installed.
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Check Point
1 Confirm that the capacity booster PCB is recognized correctly.
☞ 35500
2 Confirm that the booster hard key is attached correctly.
4. Troubleshooting
3 Confirm that Capacity Booster Software has been installed normally.
• After installing the Capacity Booster Software, click OK on the Machine Specification display.
4 Confirm the connection between the printer I/F main PCB (J/P1211) and capacity booster PCB (J/P860).
Diagnosis
Capacity booster PCB ☞ 64102
NOTE
41900 1/8
41900
No. −
Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner.

YES
Condition
Condition
The flatbed scanner is not connected or its power supply is OFF at the start of iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• Power supply is checked after Test Print and before Scanning.
• For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner Operation.
☞ 55910
Check Point
1 Confirm that the flatbed scanner power supply is ON.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Confirm that the USB cable is connected to the flatbed scanner.
Diagnosis
Flatbed scanner −
41900 2/8
41900
No. −
Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print.

YES
procedure below.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 Incorrect paper type was attached when measuring the test print in iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Paper type is checked while pre-scanning on the flatbed scanner.
☞ 55910
IMPORTANT
• You can check the image of the test print scanned by the flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner 4470.
Check Point
1 Confirm the type of the test print.
Diagnosis
Flatbed scanner −
41900 3/8
41900
No. −
Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.

YES
procedure below.
Condition
Conditions of pre-scanning
Condition
• Two test prints cannot be detected.
• Both of the two test prints are for the left side, or both are for the right side.
4. Troubleshooting
• The coordinate check line of test prints cannot be detected.
(The density of the coordinate check line is low, or the line is blurry.)
• The test print tilt calculated based on the coordinate check line is more than 30 degrees.
Measurement section
Conditions of scanning
Suffix Condition
number
00000 No dot of the coordinate check line can be detected .
Condition in calculating
Suffix Condition
number
00000 Enough number of dots for calculation cannot be detected.
NOTE
☞ 55910
41900 4/8
41900
IMPORTANT
• The image of the test print scanned by the flatbed scanner can be checked at the following location.
Destination
LP7000 3501i PLUS
folder] \Tmp \Tmp
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
1. See ☞ 4480.
Others
The combination of paper and processing solution is not compatible with the iBeam. −
Flatbed scanner −
4. Troubleshooting
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution. −
Exposure advance unit ☞ 25810
Flatbed scanner −
Setup
Carry out daily setup, paper specification registration setup, paper magazine registration setup −
and initial setup, then confirm that these increase the density of the coordinate check line.
Clean the calibration plate. −
NOTE
41900 5/8
41900
No. −
Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the
flatbed scanner glass surface or test print and measure again.

YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again.
• Selecting NO cancels the attention message.
procedure below.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
00000 Dirt or dust was adhered on the test print if it was scanned by flatbed scanner.
When a test print scanned, dust was adhered on the glass of the flatbed scanner.
Check Point
• Check if there are no dirt or dust or while line on the test print.
Unexposed print of 200 mm paper advance length Test print for iBeam tuning
Dirt
Dirt
• Check the flatbed scanner glass and clean it if necessary.
NOTE
• It there are white line on the test print, clean the iBeam head and focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
iBeam head Focal plane regulating guide
G084933
☞ 55910
41900 6/8
41900
IMPORTANT
• The image of the test print scanned by the flatbed scanner can be checked at the following location.
Destination
LP7000 3501i PLUS
folder] \Tmp \Tmp
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
1. See ☞ 4480.
Others
The combination of paper and processing solution is not compatible with the iBeam. −
Flatbed scanner −
4. Troubleshooting
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution. −
Exposure advance unit ☞ 25810
Flatbed scanner −
41900 7/8
41900
No. 01860−01997
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (Software)
No. 01860 Service information is not set up. The writing will be canceled.
No. 01861 Accessing the media. The writing will be canceled.
No. 01862 The size specified in the DPOF information is not correct. Would you like to read the file?
Attention message (Main)
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it.
No. 01903 Proceeding. One moment please. . .
No. 01908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings.
No. 01922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings.
No. 01926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
No. 01941 Would you like to delete the selected Print Menu?
No. 01943 The setting has changed. Would you like to register?
No. 01944 Appropriate Print Menu was not found. Stop the process.
No. 01945 A tab where the Print Menu has not been set exists. Would you like to continue?
No. 01947 The selected Print Channel is used as a Print Menu Icon. Would you like to delete?
No. 01977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process.
No. 01980 Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected.
No. 01981 Short Cut Key is selected overlapped.
No. 01995 Processing an order. Cannot change this setting.
No. 01996 Processing the order. . . The setting data was not updated.
No. 01997 Setting data will be updated.
NOTE
41900 8/8
43370
Attention message: Edit
Attention message: Edit
No. 04001−04052
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (Edit)
No. 04001 Are you sure about deleting?
No. 04002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No. 04003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No. 04004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No. 04006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 04010 Specify the image area.
No. 04015 Selected file already exists.
No. 04017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small.
No. 04018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No. 04019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No. 04020 Failed to write the file.
No. 04021 Failed to read the file.
No. 04023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range.
No. 04024 Select the layer.
No. 04025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used.
No. 04026 The image size is too large to insert.
No. 04032 Template size is too large to read.
No. 04033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
No. 04034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area.
No. 04035 Additional phrases could not be saved.
No. 04036 The image size is too small to insert.
No. 04037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 04038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No. 04040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field.
No. 04041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No. 04042 Single Form is not positioned.
No. 04043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No. 04044 Single Form is overlapped.
No. 04045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned.
No. 04046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled.
No. 04047 The selected font was not found.
No. 04049 No more items can be added.
NOTE
43370 1/1
44200
No. 4200−4231
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (External PCs)
No.4200 The ink comes to an end.
No.4201 The CD is filled to capacity when writing the Viewer Software. This order will be canceled.
No.4202 The background data was not found.
No.4203 The logo data was not found.
No.4204 There is insufficient space left on the hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4205 An error has occurred in the Rimage.
No.4206 The Viewer Software folder was not found.
No.4207 The Shop Data folder was not found.
Attention message (External system)

No.4208 Image size is too large.
No.4209 Confirm the CD-R external writing system.
No.4210 Confirm the CD-R external writing system.
No.4211 The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external writing
system.
No.4213 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System.
No.4215 Confirm the d-Storage.
No.4216 The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
No.4217 Confirm the LAN connection with the d-Storage.
No.4230 Previous order information remains. Would you like to continue?
No.4231 Too many files. Could not read.
NOTE
44200 1/1
44350
Attention message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage)
Attention message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage)
No. 4350−4360
For corrective action of the attention message, see the Bravo II Service Manual/d-
Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Bravo II)
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button, then
install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button, then
install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button, then
install the new cartridges. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridges, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.
IMPORTANT
CD-R external writing system
No. 4360 The shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
44350 1/1
45500
Error message: Processor 1
No. 05500
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1
No. 05501
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2
No. 05502
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
No. 05500-00000 The P1 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 1°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 thermosensor)
No. 05501-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
4. Troubleshooting
temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 thermosensor)
No. 05502-00000 The PS processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (PS thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process specification whose safe range of PS is the setting temperature + 7°.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Confirm the setting temperature of the chilling unit (only when equipped with the chilling unit).
3 Confirm that the cooling water solenoid valve for P1, P2 and PS work well (only when the cooling water unit is installed).
4 Confirm that the tank cooling fans operate.
Diagnosis
For cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63290
Transistor PCB ☞ 63200
Chilling unit -
Processing tank cooling fan 1, 2, 3 ☞ 63290
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 1/14
45500
No. 05503
The dryer temperature is above the safety range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 10°C) after temperature adjustment has been
completed. (dryer temperature sensor)
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Dryer heater ☞ 63510
4. Troubleshooting

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
NOTE
45500 2/14
45500
No. 05504
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1
No. 05505
No. 05506
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the error display is canceled.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05504-0000 The P1 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 1°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 temperature sensor)
No. 05505-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 3°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 temperature sensor)
No. 05506-00000 The PS processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 5°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (PS temperature sensor)
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit (only when equipped with the chilling unit).
Diagnosis
Processing solution heater ☞ 63510

NOTE
45500 3/14
45500
No. 05507
The dryer temperature is below the processing range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is canceled.
Condition
00000 The dryer temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper processing.
(dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
Dryer heater ☞ 63510
4. Troubleshooting

$ Symptoms of connection failure of wiring/symptoms of blowout of fuse ([N])

☞ 4203 -
NOTE
45500 4/14
45500
No. 05508
The processing solution level is too low.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The processing solution level detectors of the processing solution float switches (P1, P2 and PS) turned off.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn OFF.
Check Point
Common
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Common
F17
Common
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 64250
[F]
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63280
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
PSR Replenisher Pump
[N]
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump
45500 5/14
45500
[SM]
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
[J]
$ Symptoms of connection failure of wiring/symptoms of blowout of fuse ([N])

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45500 6/14
45500
No. 05509
The circulation amount has decreased.
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
• This error message will be displayed only when the system is equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
Condition
00000 The circulation amount of the P1 processing solution measured by the digital flowmeter falls below 3L/min.
Although the system is not equipped with a digital flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via Option
Registration.
NOTE
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is set to OFF via Option Registration.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected to the pump are clogged.
Diagnosis
Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 7/14
45500
No. 05510
Processor A/D conversion error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The analog data detected by each thermosensor cannot be converted to digital data.
IMPORTANT
• The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data of the temperature measured by the processing solution
thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting


☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45500 8/14
45500
No. 05511
The circulation pump has stopped. P1
No. 05513
The circulation pump has stopped. P2
No. 05515
The circulation pump has stopped. PS1
No. 05516
No. 05517
No. 05518
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05511-00000 The rotation detector built in the P1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05513-00000 The rotation detector built in the P2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05515-00000 The rotation detector built in the PS1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
Check Point
Diagnosis
No. Blown fuses Manual No.
5511 F51 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
5513 F52
5515 F51
5516 F51
5517 F52
5518 F52

Circulation pump ☞ 63290

45500 9/14
45500

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 10/14
45500
No. 05519
Thermosensor error. P1
No. 05520
No. 05521
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
No. 05519-00000 The temperature detected by the P1 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
No. 05520-00000 The temperature detected by the P2 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05521-00000 The temperature detected by the PS thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis
05520-00000 F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
05521-00000


☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45500 11/14
45500
No. 05522
Dryer Thermosensor error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45500 12/14
45500
No. 05524
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05525
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05526
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 05527
No. 05528
No. 05529
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05524-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05525-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05526-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not detect on even
though about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
NOTE
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level detector and
a safety thermostat for each.
The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a refilling water level detector for each.
Check Point
3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and STB4-W to the sub-
tank are not clogged.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
45500 13/14
45500
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 14/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
Error: Processor 2
No. 05530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns OFF.
Check Point
1 • Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
4. Troubleshooting
• Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290
NOTE
45530 1/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05532
The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The safety thermostat of the processing solution float switches CD, BF or STB turns OFF.
NOTE
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Standard processing Time reduction processing

Status Temperature (°C) Status Temperature (°C)
OFF 46±3 OFF 51±3
4. Troubleshooting
ON 36±3 ON 41±3
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation pumps will
stop.
Check Point
2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump are clogged.
Diagnosis
F17

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.


In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
45530 2/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45530 3/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The dryer safety thermostat turns OFF.
NOTE
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Status Temperature (°C)

OPEN(OFF) 105±4.4
CLOSE(ON) 80±5.6
4. Troubleshooting
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater and dryer fan go OFF.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis
F17
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.

Dryer fan ☞ 63290

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63290


☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 4/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05534
Print Sorter Unit operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Although a specified time has passed since the print sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
00002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63510
Detection failure Manual No.

Sorter home sensor ☞ 63510

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 5/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix number Status Condition
00000 Normal • After feeding out the paper from the printer to the processor, the print sensors in the dryer
operation section do not turn DARK within a specified time and this happens consecutively six times.
• For details, refer to ☞ 56100 Processor paper advance operation.
Automated • When the colorimeter unit paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK within a specified time in
Color performing the automated color measurement of setup print
Measurement • For details, refer to ☞ 56610 Processor paper advance operation.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Confirm that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are securely attached.
2 Confirm that the gears and the rollers rotate smoothly after removing the paper processing rack from the processing solution
tank.
3 Confirm that the lower turn belt of the paper processing rack is damaged.
4 Confirm that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
5 Check if the print sensor is soiled.
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure Manual No.
If the paper jam occurs at the time of automatic colorimetry ☞ 33505
Check the setting of Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup).
Check Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction, Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Paper ☞ 36010
Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Check the installation position of the processor loading unit. ☞ 26630
See Adjustment after reattaching in Removing the processor loading unit
Check the belt tension of paper advance motor 3 belt in the paper advance unit. ☞ 20110
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.

Dryer fan ☞ 63510
When the drive motor is defective Manual No.

Drive motor ☞ 63290
45530 6/13
45530
Error: Processor 2

(LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
Print sensor (right) (left) ☞ 63510
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63520

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45530 7/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05538
Backup data error. Processor
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the printer I/F main PCB and processor control PCB.
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply being OFF or if the processor control PCB has been replaced with a new
one, this error message will appear.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, the backup data for the processor control PCB saved in printer I/F main PCB is sent
to the processor control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be canceled.
After the completion of sending the backup data, the error above can be canceled.
However, the backup data saved in printer I/F main PCB may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend
you to read the backup data on the media saved at the close down check.
Diagnosis
If the data was erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400
Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F] , or ☞ 57020
☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in specific condition.

NOTE
45530 8/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05543
The dryer cover is removed.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
When paper is advancing inside the processor, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
1 Check that the dryer section or dryer cover is securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63290
NOTE
45530 9/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05545
Print Sensor (Left) error.
No. 05546
Print Sensor error.
No. 05547
Print Sensor (Right) error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
- When performing Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment, the system could not adjust it normally.
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 0, the print sensor did not change to
LIGHT.
00002 If the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 255, the print sensor did not detect LIGHT.
In addition, although the standard voltage was set to 4.0 V, the print sensor did not detect LIGHT.
00003 Even if the standard voltage was changed from 7.5 V to 4.0 V for the light source level, the print sensor did not detect
LIGHT.
Check Point
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Print Sensor Adjustment Display.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
(LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS)
Print sensor (right) (left) ☞ 63510
(LP7200/3502 PLUS)
NOTE
45530 10/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05549
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed in Functions of
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting.
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

00001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
4. Troubleshooting
00002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 0, it was more than the required count.
Diagnosis
NOTE
45530 11/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05550
Drive Motor has stopped.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The drive motor has stopped due to the protected operation.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 12/13
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05552
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
• It occurs only when the system has the automated color measurement function.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates the dryer selection guide from the DARK status position to the
colorimeter side for a certain period of time, the dryer selection home sensor does not become LIGHT.
00002 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates the dryer selection guide from the LIGHT status position for a
certain period of time, the dryer selection home sensor does not become DARK.
00003 At the initial operation, even though the dryer select motor was operated in the left direction for a certain period of time, the
4. Troubleshooting
dryer selection home sensor did not change to DARK.
00004 When performing the automated color measurement, even though the dryer selection guide was operated in the colorimeter
direction, the test print was not ejected to the colorimeter side but onto the print conveyor.
Diagnosis

Dryer selection home sensor ☞ 63510
Dryer lane select motor

☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 13/13
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
No. 05600[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
No. 05601[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 05602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 Even though the drum was moved for a specified time to return it to the home position, the home position was not detected.
Even though the system attempted to move the drum for a specified time to exit the home position, the drum remained at that
4. Troubleshooting
position.
Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK, tablet sensor 1
does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Position adjustment failure of elevator lower sensor ☞ 27680

Check if the tablet sensor 1 or 2 is not soiled. ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB
NOTE
45600 1/5
45600
No. 05603[J]
A tablet has jammed.
No. 05604[J]
No. 05605[J]
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 Even though a specified time has passed since the drum was moved from the home position and tablet sensor 1 turned
DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
Even though the drum was moved from the home position, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn DARK.
Even though the drum is reversed, the home position is not detected after a specified time.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690


Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Check if the tablet sensor 1 or 2 is not soiled. ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB
NOTE
45600 2/5
45600
No. 05609[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD
No. 05610[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF
No. 05611[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05609-00000 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop limit in Basic Kit Setting when Order Display→Processor
No. 05610-00000 Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05611-00000
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of Counter to 0. See ☞ 33070.
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via Functions in Counter.
See ☞ 33070.
45600 3/5
45600
No. 05612[J]
Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Even though a specified time has passed after the elevator moves up, the elevator lower sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
00002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator lower
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
00003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned DARK and a specified time passed.
00004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
00005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle sensor did not turn LIGHT even though it turned DARK and
4. Troubleshooting
a specified time passed.
00006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
Diagnosis
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle sensor ☞ 27670
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper sensor ☞ 27660

Confirm that the elevator lower sensor, elevator middle sensor and elevator upper sensor are not ☞ 63310
soiled.
Elevator motor
NOTE
45600 4/5
45600
No. 05613[J]
The processing solution level is too low. STB1
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 When the processing solution level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch turns OFF and water
supply is carried out for a given amount of time, the processing solution level detector keeps OFF.
Check Point
2 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4. Troubleshooting
4 Check if the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
Diagnosis
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 5/5
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
No. 05700[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A
No. 05701[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B
No. 05702[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C
No. 05703[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W
No. 05704[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A
No. 05705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B
No. 05706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
00002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
Check Point
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 1/4
45700
No. 05708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
No. 05709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
The attention message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one. will be displayed when the replenishment alarm
value is set to -5% (initial value) in Package Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes empty. In this case, the error
messages Nos. 5708 and 5709 Replenishment Package solution remaining error. will not be displayed.

00000 The percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment package
capacity became smaller than the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment remaining amount < Package
4. Troubleshooting
capacity × Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 2/4
45700
No. 05710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05711[SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05712[SM]
No. 05713[SM]
No. 05714[SM]
No. 05715[SM]
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05710-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not turn ON even though
a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05711-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not turn ON even though
a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05712-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
Check Point
2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves smoothly.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

45700 3/4
45700
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45700 4/4
45900
Error message: F replenishment
No. 05900[F]
Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00002 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenishment cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00003 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to lower position to open the replenishment cartridge, Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
4. Troubleshooting
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
00004 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was failed to
be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has
passed.
00005 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was failed to
be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has
passed.
00006 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to upper position due to the failure in opening the replenishment
cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00007 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00008 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00009 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
00010 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning the cap,
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00013 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time
has passed.
00014 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has
passed.
45900 1/15
45900
Suffix Condition
number
00015 Opening or cleaning the replenisher cartridge is completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects it.
• For suffix numbers 00001 to 00006, making approx. 230 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• Regarding the suffix numbers 00007 to 00015, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.
Countermeasure
1. Check whether the replenisher cartridge setting part malfunctions or not.
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4610
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Check that the replenisher cartridge setting part operates normally. ☞ 35320
Diagnosis
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) ☞ 63280
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower)
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
NOTE
45900 2/15
45900
No. 05901[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R
No. 05902[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA
No. 05903F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB
No. 05904[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution are ON and when # # #
(lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
Diagnosis
NOTE
45900 3/15
45900
No. 05905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05906[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05907[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing
solution do not turn off even a specified amount of processing solution is added.
00002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution turned off, the processing
solution less than the specified amount was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution also turned off.
00003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution do not turn off even though the processing solution exceeding the specified
amount has been added.
• Making the equivalent to approx. 230 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the above
errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
1. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, lower amounts of solution than the specified range is
replenished, and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution is off.
2. If each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, larger amount of solution than the specified range is replenished,
and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution does not turn off.
• If the processor control PCB is replaced, data (all data, or only the processor data) is initialized
or ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor occurs, suffix number 00002 of the error shown above may occur. ☞ 57020
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
☞ 4620
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment pump are not jammed. -
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
45900 4/15
45900
Diagnosis
P1R Replenisher Pump
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 5/15
45900
No. 05908[F]
Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
- After it was opened and a specified time passed, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor for each
processing solution does not turn on.

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
4. Troubleshooting
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input ☞ 35220
Check.
Diagnosis
NOTE
45900 6/15
45900
No. 05909[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
No. 05910[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
No. 05911[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
ERROR No. Condition
05909-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P1R cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid valve are
opened and the auto cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper) Replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
05910-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RA cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump
is turned on for a specified time. However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
on.
05911-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RB cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump
is turned on for a specified time. However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
on.
• If Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump)→Mixing Replenisher→Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher
Pump) in Processor Set Up Mode are not performed in order at system installation, the above errors may occur.
• If normal opening operation is performed at system installation, replenishment solution is created with the replenishment
tank empty. Then, the replenishment solution does not reach the position where P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor and P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn on, and the above errors occur.
• If opening operation is performed in the Processor Set Up Mode at system installation, the above errors do not occur even
if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are off.
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Check the hoses for bends (Hoses connected to each of the cartridge cleaning valves and the auto cleaning pump).
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
Confirm by Output Check that each cartridge valve and the auto cleaning pump work. ☞ 35320
• P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
45900 7/15
45900
Diagnosis
P1R (Upper) Replenishment P2RA (Upper) Replenishment P2RB (Upper) Replenishment ☞ 63280
Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor
Auto cleaning pump Automated cleaning valve
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 8/15
45900
No. 05912[F]
Predetermined process amount was exceeded.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 When an error in the following error list occurred and printed before the error was cleared, the integrated value
of P1R replenishment amount has exceeded the specified amount (approx. 230 sheets for 127 mm x 89 mm size).
Error list
• ☞ No. 00902[F] • Install the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 00905[F] • Install the new replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
4. Troubleshooting
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
• ☞ No. 05910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.
• Even if an error is cleared, it reoccurs until the replenisher cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is created).
Diagnosis
Take the corrective action in the error list. -
45900 9/15
45900
No. 05913[F]
An error occurred in the replenisher section.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 When an error in the following error list occurred, the system was restarted or started before the error was
cleared.
Error list
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
• ☞ No. 05910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.
Diagnosis
Take the corrective action in the error list. -
45900 10/15
45900
No. 05914[F]
Temperature and humidity sensor error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 The measured environmental temperature is not within the range between −10° C and +60° C.
00002 The measured environmental humidity is not within the range between 0 % and 100 %.
• An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator Selections→Processor→Humidity.

• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when evaporated.
In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High, except Automatic, in Operator Selections→Processor→Humidity.
Then, water is refilled and the system can be used again.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check the status of the temperature and humidity sensor via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check that there is no dust on the temperature and humidity sensor. -
Check that there is no connection failure in the wiring between the temperature and humidity sensor and -
processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 61050
NOTE
45900 11/15
45900
No. 05916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1
No. 05917[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2
No. 05918[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1
No. 05919[F]
No. 05920[F]
No. 05921[F]
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
00000 • # # #When the processable level decreases and addition of specific amount water is carried, # # #the
processable level detector keeps OFF.
• When the product starts up with program timer and filling up the moisture which evaporated is carried out,
# # # the processable level detector keeps OFF.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting and Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting are not performed at system installation, the above errors may occur.
1. Even if specified amount of water is supplied, # # # processable level does not turn on.
2. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, specified amount of solution is not replenished.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn OFF.
Countermeasure
1. Perform ☞ Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs.
☞ 4630
Check Point
Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank. -
Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly. -
Check the status of the float switches of each processing solution via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Select Operator Selections→Processor, and change the Evaporation Correction setting from OFF to -
ON.*1
*1. If Evaporation Correction is set to OFF, water is not replenished automatically although # # # processable level decreases.
45900 12/15
45900
Diagnosis
F17
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processor power supply 1 ☞ 64250

P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45900 13/15
45900
No. 05922[F]
Replenisher section door is open.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
When the replenisher section door is opened while the replenisher cartridge is open (replenishment solution is being created).

00001 When the replenisher section door is opened before the cap is cleaned.
00002 When the replenisher section door is opened while the cap is being cleaned.
• For suffix number 00001, making approx. 230 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
• For the suffix number 00002, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.
Countermeasures for the suffix number 00001

1. Close the replenisher section door.
☞ 4620
Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 14/15
45900
No. 05923[F]
Solution remains in the replenishment tank.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
1. The replenishment solution cannot be detected by P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RA (Lower)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.
2. Mixing replenisher is in standby status when starting the mixing replenisher automatically, because the Interlock Switch
(Replenisher Section Door) is opened.
3. When # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor detects the replenishment solution while the mixing replenisher is in
standby status.
4. Troubleshooting
00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
NOTE
• When Mixing Replenisher is clicked and the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB is on, the following
attention message is displayed.
☞ No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be canceled when one of the following conditions are fulfilled.
• Mixing Replenisher is performed without solution in each replenishment tank.
• All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each replenishment tank are on.
Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Mixing Replenisher with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.
Diagnosis
NOTE
45900 15/15
46000
Error message: Printer 1
No. 06012
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
No. 06013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 06012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine A.
No. 06013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine B.

00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor A and
4. Troubleshooting
B do not turn DARK during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensors A and B have turned DARK, the
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
Diagnosis
06012 F36 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Advance failure Manual No.

Paper supply motors A, B
Dual magazine PCB ☞ 64190
In the case of a detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
In the case of a detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
46000 1/27
46000

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
☞ 4203 -
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46000 2/27
46000
No. 06014
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
No. 06015
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 06014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine A.
No. 06015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine B.

00001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
4. Troubleshooting
does not turn LIGHT.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT, paper end
sensors A and B do not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis


NOTE
46000 3/27
46000
No. 06016
Paper Cutter operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The cut home sensor does not detect LIGHT even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation
started.
00002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation started
and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT.
00003 The cut end sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while even though the cut operation started and the cut home
sensor turned DARK.
00004 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while even though the cut operation started and the cut end
sensor turned DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
00005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in the initial operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.
NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 61200

Cut home sensor ☞ 61200
Cut end sensor

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 4/27
46000
No. 06073
Synchronous Sensor error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The R laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
00002 The G laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
00003 The B laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
Diagnosis
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control PCB to laser unit are separate.
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON and G Laser Output ON of Output Check → Printer → Exposure
Engine Section. If the results are as same as shown below, each laser is normal.
☞ 35310
• Laser Synchronous Sensor:Synchronous
• Polygon Mirror Frequency:1380±7
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in the laser unit) may be defective.
G-AOM driver ☞ 64230

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 5/27
46000
No. 06075
G Laser control error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00006 to 00011 A communication or control error occurred between the laser control PCB and the laser unit.
Diagnosis
Point
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P 1519) and G laser driver, the above error will appear when the system
is turned on.
4. Troubleshooting
G laser driver ☞ 64210

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 6/27
46000
No. 06076
Polygon Mirror control error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
00002 Any of R/G/B Laser turns to asynchronous 7 times or more per 1 second while the system is printing or
initializing after the power supply is turned ON.
NOTE
• The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from 1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.
Countermeasure
1. The status of Exposure Engine Section is normal if Polygon Mirror Synchronous and Polygon Mirror Frequency is the following
4. Troubleshooting
value when performing the Output Check for Engine Section
Display Status
Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchronous
2. Carry out G Laser Output ON, B Laser Output ON and R Laser Output ON in Output Check and confirm in each case if the
value of Polygon Mirror Frequency is the following value.
Display Status
Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7
3. Carry out the following diagnostics.
Diagnosis
Point
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P 1515 ) and laser unit, the above display will appear when printing
starts.

AOM driver (In case of suffix number 00002) ☞ 64230

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 7/27
46000
No. 06077
Interlock error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When printing is started, the laser control PCB detects the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) off while the printer
control PCB detects the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) on.
Diagnosis
Point
The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection failure exists between the printer control PCB (J/P220) and laser
4. Troubleshooting
control PCB (J/P1534).


☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 8/27
46000
No. 06081
Backup data error. Printer
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, it cannot be canceled for approx. 5 to 10 minutes until the Maintenance Display is
displayed.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0###H • The backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal.
• The new printer control PCB is attached.
• The RAM of printer control PCB is broken.
4. Troubleshooting
• The power supply of backup for printer control PCB is shut off.
1###H • The backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal.
• Backup data of the printer I/F main PCB does not exist.
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If about 5 days has passed with the power supply off or if the printer control PCB is replaced with a new one, this error message will
be shown.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, the backup data for the printer control PCB saved in printer I/F main PCB is sent to
the printer control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be canceled.
After the completion of sending the backup data, the error above can be canceled.
However, the backup data saved in printer I/F main PCB may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend
you to read the backup data on the media saved at the close down check.
Diagnosis
If the data was erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400

46000 9/27
46000
No. 06082
Setup error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
#0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
#0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
#0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
#0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
#0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
#0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
4. Troubleshooting
#0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (R)
specification registration setup. (G)
specification registration setup. (B)
#0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
setup. (G)
setup. (B)
#0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
setup. (G)
setup. (B)
#0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
#0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)
#0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
#0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
#0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)
#0306 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
#0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (R)
#0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (G)
#0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (B)
#0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (R)
#0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (G)
#0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (B)
*1
#0501 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
#0502*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0503*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
#0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
#0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
46000 10/27
46000
Suffix Condition
number
#0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
#0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
*1. Not displayed for iBeam.
IMPORTANT
• Setup error. is shown on the display module.
On the maintenance application display, messages are shown.
Check Point
1 Calibrate the colorimeter.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
In case of colorimeter failure Manual No.

Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 27100
Calibration plate failure
LASER
G-AOM driver ☞ 64230
iBeam
NOTE
46000 11/27
46000
No. 06087
Laser Control PCB system error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
An error occurs on the laser control PCB.
Suffix Condition
number
00001 (Unused)
00002 SD-RAM mounted on the laser control PCB is abnormal.
00003 The image data sent from the printer I/F main PCB to the laser control PCB via LVPECL and the image information sent
via ARCNET communication do not match.
4. Troubleshooting
00004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the image data is small or large.
00005 (Unused)
00006 Exposure does not complete even though a specified time has elapsed after starting the exposure.
00008 Lookup table data and shading table sent from the main PC cannot be transferred to the laser control PCB successfully.
Communication between the printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB via ARCNET line ended abnormally at turning
on the power supply.
• LUT data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal.
• Shading data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal.
00009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-specified magazine code do not match at starting the printing operation.
00019 There are two communication: Printer I/F main PCB → laser and printer I/F main PCB → printer → laser.
When exposing, these two communications have the same receipt number.
This message is shown if the receipt number is different between two communications.
00022 Cable connection error between the printer control PCB and laser control PCB occurs.
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number (bit).
Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure

00002 Laser control PCB may be defective.
00006 ☞ 64150
00003 Check the cable connection between printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB. (LVPECL)
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 64150
• Failure in the Printer I/F Main PCB
☞ 64101
This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
00004 It does not occur normally.
00007
00008 This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
00009 • Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
00019 ☞ 35500
☞ 50520
46000 12/27
46000

00022 Check the wiring connection between printer control PCB (J/P205) ↔ laser control PCB (J/P1520).
☞ 64150
• Failure in the printer control PCB
☞ 64140
☞ 4200 −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46000 13/27
46000
No. 06101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.
00002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55200 ☞ 55210.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.
Check Point
Diagnosis

Paper hold sensor ☞ 61200

Paper hold motor ☞ 61200

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 14/27
46000
No. 06104
Printer Door is open.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (printer doors 1 or 2) turns OFF.
00002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3 sensor turns off.
NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) or printer door 3 sensor turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Confirm that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are firmly closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) -

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61050
Dual magazine PCB (for dual magazine) ☞ 64190
Triple magazine PCB (for triple magazine) ☞ 64200
NOTE
46000 15/27
46000
No. 06106
G Laser light source status error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 An error occurs in the light source state of G laser.
NOTE
• This error lets you know that the G laser head in the laser unit has deteriorated.
• When the error is released once, the error does not recur until the power supply is reset or the system is started by the program timer.
IMPORTANT
• Check G Laser Light Source Status of Input Check →Printer→Exposure Engine Section, and if it is OK, it is highly
4. Troubleshooting
possible that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if G Laser Light Source Status is No Good.
Diagnosis
No. Point
06106 The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection failure exists between the G laser driver (J/P1665) ↔
laser power supply (J/P412).


☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 16/27
46000
No. 06107
R Laser temperature is out of range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 R laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 50.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 R laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature falls under 44.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Input Check.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 35210
Check Point
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to 47.3°C.
Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number 00001) ☞ 61050
NOTE
46000 17/27
46000
No. 06135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn DARK even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit 1 for the
specified length in the direction of paper advance.
00002 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn LIGHT even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit 1 for the
specified length in the reverse direction of paper advance when zigzag correction sensor is DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 61200

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46000 18/27
46000
No. 06136
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
00002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though
the exposure advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 61300

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 61300
NOTE
46000 19/27
46000
No. 06137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the specified length.
00002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though
the exposure advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the specified length.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the focal plane regulating guide is securely attached.
Diagnosis

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 ☞ 61300

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 ☞ 61300

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 20/27
46000
No. 06144
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 In initial operation, even though the paper advance pressure change motor operates a specified amount, the paper
advance pressure change sensor does not turn DARK.
00002 Even though the paper advance pressure change motor operates a specified amount, the paper advance pressure
change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
00003 Even though the paper advance pressure change motor operates a specified amount from the home position, the
paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55400☞ 55420.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper advance pressure change motor ☞ 61400

Paper advance pressure change sensor ☞ 61400
NOTE
46000 21/27
46000
No. 06145
Lane Select Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 In initial operation, even though arm unit 2 operates for a specified amount, the lane select sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK.
00002 Even though arm unit 2 operates for a specified amount, the lane select sensor does not change from DARK to
LIGHT.
00003 In lane select operation, even though arm unit 2 operates a specified amount from the home position, the lane
select sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The lane select sensor is attached only in one place of far side.
Therefore, the stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side
lane and center lane is not supervised.
If the error cannot be detected in initial operation, by communication is unstable, the prints of near side lane and center
lane are transported, but an error may occur on the print of far side lane.
Diagnosis

Lane select motor ☞ 61400

Lane select sensor ☞ 61400

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 22/27
46000
No. 06146
Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 In initial operation, even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified length, the arm sensor does not change from
LIGHT to DARK.
00002 Even though arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, the arm sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
00003 Even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified length from the home position, the arm sensor does not change
from LIGHT to DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

Paper advance arm motor ☞ 61400

Arm sensor ☞ 61400

☞ 4200 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 23/27
46000
No. 06147
Turn Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 In initial operation, even though the turn unit operates a specified amount, the turn sensor does not change from
LIGHT to DARK.
00002 Even though the turn unit operates a specified amount, the turn sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
00003 Even though the turn unit operates a specified amount from the home position, the turn sensor does not change
from LIGHT to DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Turn motor ☞ 61400

Turn sensor ☞ 61400
NOTE
46000 24/27
46000
No. 06148
Paper End Sensor A error.
No. 06149
Paper End Sensor B error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was performed in
Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
00002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
00003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
00004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
NOTE
46000 25/27
46000
No. 06151
Paper Loading Sensor error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
NOTE
46000 26/27
46000
No. 06152
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
No. 06153
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the zigzagging correction sensor (right or left). ☞ 61300
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300
NOTE
46000 27/27
46100
No. 06155
Exposure Start Sensor error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
NOTE
46100 1/34
46100
No. 06156
Exposure End Sensor error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the exposure end sensor using the blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Exposure end sensor ☞ 61300
NOTE
46100 2/34
46100
No. 06173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing from paper magazine A.
NOTE
• For the dual magazine specification, this error is shown to let the operator know that opening printer door 3 during printing is a wrong
operation and that adversely affects the print quality.
• For the triple magazine specification, this error is not shown when the setting of Operator Selections→Printer 2→An error
occurred when Printer Door 3 opened. is OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.
Diagnosis

• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the sensor is defective.
NOTE
46100 3/34
46100
No. 06177
Laser Unit temperature is out of range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 35210
Check Point
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from 17.0°C to 42.0°C.
Diagnosis
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050
IMPORTANT
• Laser unit heater can be replaced separately.
NOTE
46100 4/34
46100
No. 06179
B/G Laser Output Unit error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00003 • When the type detection of the laser unit is abnormal between G laser driver and laser unit
NOTE
• The laser unit type is judged at two places, at G laser driver and laser unit.
Check Point
1 Check that the wiring of laser driver G and laser unit have been securely connected.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
46100 5/34
46100
No. 06182
iBeam Unit control error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated against iBeam unit, it is not replied even a specified time has
passed.
00002 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated against iBeam unit, the response is abnormal.
Diagnosis
Suffix number Point
00001 The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam control
4. Troubleshooting
PCB (J/P1101, 1102) and iBeam unit (J/P900, 901).


☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 6/34
46100
No. 06183
iBeam Control PCB control error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Control error of the Flash Memory on the iBeam control PCB
00002
00003
00004 Poor contact of a cable between the Printer Control PCB and iBeam Control PCB
00005 Control of expose arrangement for iBeam control PCB has not been completed.
00006
00007 The exposure does not finish after a specified time has passed after starting the exposure.
4. Troubleshooting
00008 Communication is impossible completely
00009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving valid frame data
00016 When the valid frame data differs between the sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data loss)
00017 When having received unspecified data
00018 When having received unspecified codes
Diagnosis
Suffix number Point
00004 The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam control
PCB (J/P1520) and printer control PCB (J/P205).
00008 The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection is improper between iBeam control PCB
(J/P1513) and printer I/F main PCB (J/P455).

Failure in the printer control PCB (suffix number 00004) ☞ 64140

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 7/34
46100
No. 06184
iBeam Control PCB system error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00003 The image data sent from the printer I/F main PCB to the iBeam control PCB via LVPECL and the image information sent
via ARCNET communication do not match.
00007 The size of image data received by the iBeam control PCB from the printer I/F main PCB is out of range.
00008 • LUT data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal*1.
• Shading data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal*2.
4. Troubleshooting
00009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-specified magazine code do not match at starting the printing operation.
00016 No exposure-specified magazine code from the printer I/F main PCB exists.
00025 There are two communication: Printer I/F main PCB -> iBeam and printer I/F main PCB -> printer -> iBeam.
When exposing, these two communications have the same receipt number.
This error is shown if the receipt number is different between these two communications.
*1. LUT data is sent at printing as required.

*2. Shading data is sent only when the printer I/F main control PCB data and the iBeam control STB data are different when the power supply is turned on.
Diagnosis

00003 Check the cable connection between printer I/F main PCB and iBeam control PCB. (LVPECL)
• The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection is improper between iBeam control
PCB (J/P1513) and printer I/F main PCB (J/P455).
• Failure of the iBeam control PCB
☞ 64151
• Failure in the Printer I/F Main PCB
☞ 64101
This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
00004 It does not occur normally.
00007
00008 This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
00009 • Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
00016 ☞ 35500
00025
☞ 50520

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 8/34
46100
No. 06185
Roller Move Motor operation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified amount, the roller position sensor does not change from
DARK to LIGHT.
00002 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified amount, the roller position sensor does not change from
DARK to LIGHT.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Roller position sensor ☞ 61200
Roller move motor

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 9/34
46100
No. 06187
Setup calculation error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 Problematic setup calculation result detected.
00002
NOTE
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Carry out initial setup. -
46100 10/34
46100
No. 06194
Laser Control PCB control error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
A communication failure has occurred between the printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB.

00008 Communication is impossible completely
00009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving valid frame data
00010 When the valid frame data differs between the sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data loss)
00011 When having received unspecified data
4. Troubleshooting
00012 When having received unspecified codes
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
Suffix number Point
00008 The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection is improper between the laser control
PCB (J/P1513) and printer I/F PCB (J/P455).


☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 11/34
46100
No. 06198
Laser Unit EE-PROM control error.
Condition
00001 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM write
00002 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM read
LP7000, LP7100, LP7200

• Error display does not appear for this error
• In addition, this error is not recorded in Error Record.

• Error display does not appear for this error
• This error will be recorded in the Error Record of EZ Controller.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• The occurrence of this error does not interrupt the normal process.
46100 12/34
46100
No. 06203
Setup error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
#2001 When measuring the daily setup test print, the density for specific colors between steps did not rise
consecutively.
#2002 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days were not
ready.
#2003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively day by day and changed suddenly.
#2004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but when calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction
value for specific colors was over 10 times as high as the previous value.
4. Troubleshooting
#2005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value for specific colors was 3 key or more.
#2006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total amount of the correction value (specified color) after
completing the initial setup or paper specification registration setup exceeded the limit value.
IMPORTANT
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It occurs when an abnormal correction value is calculated. Confirm that the color density state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison with the previous print.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Suffix
number
#2002 Clean the calibration plate.
#2003 Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27100
#2004
#2005
#2006
46100 13/34
46100
Suffix
number
#2001 Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
#2002 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
#2002
#2004
#2005
#2006
#2006 Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing
Emulsion Number Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for
several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper
magazine registration setup of other magazines.
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.

Suffix
number
#2001 G-AOM driver ☞ 64230
4. Troubleshooting
#2004 (LASER)
#2005 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
#2006 (LASER)
(LASER)
(LASER)
(iBeam)
(iBeam)
#2004 It may occur when the contamination has occurred.
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
#2005 Problems may occur when the processing solution (P1) has been replaced.
NOTE
46100 14/34
46100
No. 06204
Setup error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
#3001 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively (the Dmax is decreasing day by day)
#3002 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value density was 3 key or more. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has been carried out.
#3003 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total correction value (density), which started as soon as
the initial setup or paper specification registration setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has been carried out.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It may occur when the processing solution is deteriorated. Confirm that the color density state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison with the previous print.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Suffix number The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
#3002 Clean the calibration plate.
#3003 Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27100
#3003 Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing
Emulsion Number Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for
several days.
Even though the color density state of the test print have not changed too much in comparison
with the previous print, the correction value may have become high due to the gradual
deterioration of the processing solution.
In that case, process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
46100 15/34
46100

#3001 Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
#3002 Clean the strainer units of the replenisher pumps and the hoses. Check the output amounts.
#3003
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 16/34
46100
No. 06205
Setup error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
#4001 When the test print was measured, the Dmax was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively (the Dmax is increasing day by day)
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
Between steps
G083195
NOTE
Diagnosis
00001 Clean the calibration plate.
NOTE
46100 17/34
46100
No. 06208
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified length of paper was fed from the
exposure standby position.
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor is not soiled.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• When the error above occurs, if paper whose advance length is 320.1 mm or longer stops somewhere close to Roller 1 in
the Exposure Advance Unit during processing, examine the dimensions of the space between Paper Supply Unit A
and the Exposure Advance Unit.
Roller 1 and surrounding area
G081998
• Adjustment failure Manual No.
Confirm that the paper advance length of the Paper supply operation is 320.1 mm or longer. ☞ 55200
☞ 55210
Check the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit. ☞ 26910
Diagnosis
Paper hold motor Cut motor ☞ 61200
Paper supply arm motor (left) Paper supply arm motor (right)
Paper advance motor 1 Paper advance motor 2
Paper supply motor A Paper Supply Motor B
Paper supply motor B2 Guide roller motor
Exposure advance motor 1 Exposure advance motor 2 ☞ 61300
Exposure pressure change motor 1 Exposure pressure change motor 2

46100 18/34
46100
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 19/34
46100
No. 06209
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the exposure start sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT.
00002 The exposure end sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified length of paper was fed from the
exposure standby position.
00003 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the exposure end sensor has turned DARK, the exposure
end sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor and exposure end sensor are not soiled.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• When paper is jammed in the turn unit, confirm the state of pressure release arm.
Turn unit
G083099
Diagnosis
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010

Paper hold motor Cut motor ☞ 61200
Paper supply arm motor (left) Paper supply arm motor (right)
Paper advance motor 1 Paper advance motor 2
Paper supply motor B2 Guide roller motor
Exposure advance motor 1 Exposure advance motor 2 ☞ 61300
Exposure pressure change motor 1 Exposure pressure change motor 2
46100 20/34
46100

Exposure end sensor
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 21/34
46100
No. 06210
Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or closing the
printer door, the status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE

00001 Paper end sensor A
4. Troubleshooting
00002 Paper end sensor B
00003 Paper loading sensor
00004 If there is paper between the paper loading sensor and exposure start sensor
00005 Paper end sensor B2
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in the printer.
2 Confirm that the guide is correctly attached to the paper advance path.
3 Confirm that each sensor is not soiled.
4 Confirm that paper magazine is correctly placed.
6 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
NOTE
• When suffix number 00001, 00002 or 00005 was displayed, the printer door may have been shut in the state where the paper magazine
is not correctly placed.
• The above mentioned is occurred by having blocked the paper end sensor with a normal magazine code has not been detected by the
paper magazine code sensor.
In case of adjusting failure or defective parts Manual No.

Confirm whether the paper magazine positioning hole smoothly enters the positioning pin. -
Adjustment failure of the paper magazine code sensor -
Confirm whether the paper magazine pressure spring of printer door is functioning correctly. -
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A, B or B2 ☞ 61200
Paper loading sensor
46100 22/34
46100

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 23/34
46100
No. 06211
Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or closing the
printer door, the status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE

00001 Exposure start sensor
4. Troubleshooting
00002 Exposure end sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in the printer.
2 Confirm that each sensor is not soiled.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Exposure end sensor

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
46100 24/34
46100
No. 06217
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B2
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
• Displayed when the triple magazine unit (option) is installed.
Condition
00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started from paper magazine B2,
paper end sensor B2 does not turn DARK during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor B2 has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor 1 Guide roller motor ☞ 61200
Paper supply motor B2

Paper end sensor B2 (for triple magazine) ☞ 61200

NOTE
46100 25/34
46100
No. 06218
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B2
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
Condition
00001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started to paper magazine B2,
the paper loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
sensor B2 does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper supply motor B2


NOTE
46100 26/34
46100
No. 06219
Paper End Sensor B2 error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean paper end sensor B2 using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
NOTE
46100 27/34
46100
No. 06220
B Laser temperature is out of range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 B laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 50.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 B laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature falls under 44.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The B laser thermosensor is built into the B laser.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 35210
Check Point
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to 47.3°C.
Diagnosis
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050
NOTE
46100 28/34
46100
No. 06225
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
• When processing normal prints, suffix number 00001 does not occur.
This error occurs only when printing starts using magazine B of the triple magazine unit (option).
Condition
00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started from paper magazine B,
paper end sensor B does not turn DARK during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor B has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor B (for the triple magazine)

Paper end sensor B (for triple magazine) ☞ 61200

NOTE
46100 29/34
46100
No. 06226
Alarm release
NO
YES
• This error occurs only when printing starts using magazine B of the triple magazine unit (option).
Condition
00001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started to paper magazine B, the
paper loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
sensor B does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor B (for the triple magazine)

Paper end sensor B (for triple magazine) ☞ 61200

NOTE
46100 30/34
46100
No. 06227
No. 06228
Alarm release
NO
YES or Forced Output
• YES
1. Click YES.
The error display is closed and paper loading starts.
• Forced Output
1. Click Forced Output.
For the dual magazine specification, No.01119 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
For the triple magazine specification, No.01120 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
2. Check the print.
4. Troubleshooting
If white margin is on the print, cut the margin.
NOTE
• This error occurs only when processing normal prints.
Condition
No. 06227 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine A.
No. 06228 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine B.

00001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors A and B
do not turn DARK.
Check Point
Diagnosis


46100 31/34
46100

☞ 4200 −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 32/34
46100
No. 06232
No. 06233
Alarm release
NO
YES or Forced Output
• YES
1. Click YES.
The error display is closed and paper loading starts.
• Forced Output
1. Click Forced Output.
For the dual magazine specification, No.01119 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
For the triple magazine specification, No.01120 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
2. Check the print.
4. Troubleshooting
If white margin is on the print, cut the margin.
NOTE
• This error occurs only when processing normal prints.
Condition
Error message Suffix Condition
No. number
No. 06232 00001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started from paper
magazine B2, paper end sensor B2 does not turn DARK.
No. 06233 00001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started from paper
magazine B, paper end sensor B2 does not turn DARK.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor B (for the triple Paper supply motor B2
magazine)

Paper end sensor B or B2 ☞ 61200

46100 33/34
46100
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46100 34/34
46300
Error message: Scanner
Error message: Scanner
No. 06303−06337
For corrective actions, see the Scanner Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• Error messages not explained in the Service Manual are listed in the table below.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.
Error message (Scanner)
Error message table
No. 06305 Scanner Focus operation error.
No. 06306 Scanner IRIS operation error.
No. 06309 Scanner change of light error.
No. 06321 Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 06322 Scanner input balance error.
No. 06324 F stop value range error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 06327 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error.
No. 06332 Light Source adjustment error.
No. 06333 The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error.
No. 06334 Lane change operation error.
No. 06335 The Scanner Unit Cover is open.
No. 06336 Scanner Zoom operation error.
No. 06340 Analog offset adjustment error
No. 06341 Scanner image path error.
No. 06342 Scanner unit was disconnected. Check the power supply and the connection.
NOTE
• In the Error message table, error message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
46300 1/1
46400
Error message: Film carrier
No. 06400−06463
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions, see the Scanner Service Manual and EZ Controller Service Manual.
Error message table
No. 06400 Perforation Sensor error.
No. 06401 Loading Sensor error.
No. 06402 Ready Sensor error.
No. 06403 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 06407 Spool Key operation error.
No. 06408 The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 06409 The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06410 Film Sensor error.
No. 06411 Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed.
No. 06412 135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 06423 Auto focus error.
No. 06424 Mount Unit operation error.
No. 06425 Mount detection error.
No. 06426 The lane is out of position.
No. 06429 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
No. 06431 Auto focus error.
No. 06432 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 06433 Mount detection error.
No. 06434 Mount detection (inlet) error.
No. 06435 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 06436 Mount elevator operation error.
No. 06437 Mount eject operation error.
No. 06438 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06439 The film strip is too short for processing.
No. 06441 The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06442 The perforation of the film may be broken.
No. 06443 Move Table operation error.
No. 06444 Cartridge is out of position.
No. 06445 End Perforation Sensor error.
No. 06446 Film was set to the incorrect lane.
46400 1/2
46400

No. 06463 Scanner data receive error
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46400 2/2
46550
Error message: Colorimeter
No. 06551
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 Although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the front end of the paper, paper sensor 2 does not detect
DARK.
00002 While paper is fed in paper advance operation, paper sensor 2 detects LIGHT.
00003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the
front end of the paper.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow. ☞ 56610
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
4 If the error of suffix number 00003 occurs without a paper in the colorimeter unit, clean the paper sensor 2.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 2 ☞ 63520
Paper advance motor

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46550 1/2
46550
No. 06554
Calibration Plate advance error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn DARK.
00002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
00003 In initial operation, although a specified length of moving to the home position was attempted to the calibration
plate, paper sensors 1 does not turn LIGHT.
00004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT.
00005 Not occur
00006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 1 dose not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Refer to the colorimeter calibration operation flow. ☞ 56600
Check Point
1 If the errors of suffix number 00003 or 00006 occur with the calibration plate placed on the standby position, clean paper
sensor 1.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63520
Calibration plate advance motor

☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46550 2/2
46620
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing
No. 06621-06803
For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Error (NMC)
Error message table
No. 06621 Could not connect to the server.
No. 06622 There is no backup data in the server.
No. 06624 Failed to download the backup data.
Error message (Software upgrade)

Error message table
4. Troubleshooting
No. 06803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English.
Error message(Image processing)

Error message table
No. 06831 Image correction error
No. 06832 Image composition error
No. 06833 Image process log error
NOTE
46620 1/3
46620
No. 06680
Network communication error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The communication between the input side and printer I/F main PCB failed in printing process.
IMPORTANT
• The error above appears for the FRONTIER-Printer only.
• The above errors may occur if problems occur with the software.
If this error still appears after performing the following countermeasure, get the log data.
☞ 31110
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
• Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. -
☞ 4260
☞ 35500
☞ 50520

Hard disk -
NOTE
46620 2/3
46620
No. 06681
Network communication error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00001 The printer I/F main PCB failed to get the print information when the information was transferred from the input
side to the printer I/F main PCB during the print process.
00002 The PC for input failed to read images during the print process.
00003 The printer I/F main PCB failed to receive the images when they were transferred from the input side to the
printer I/F main PCB during the print process.
00004 The PC at the input side failed to process images before sending them to the printer I/F main PCB during the
print process.
00005 The communication between the input side and printer I/F main PCB failed in printing process.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The error above appears for the QSS-Printer only.
• The above errors may occur if problems occur with the software.
If this error still appears after performing the following countermeasure, get the log data.
☞ 31110
Diagnosis
Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure Manual No.

00001 • Restart the computer and printer. -
00003 • Confirm the connection of the LAN cable.
00005 ☞ 4260
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
00002 Restart the computer. -
00004
Suffix number (bit) Failed parts Manual No.

00001 Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 64101
00003
00005
00002 Hard disk PC Service Manual
00004
NOTE
46620 3/3
46900
Error message: Main
Error message: Main
No. 06901
ARCNET communication error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is checked, or software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the instant power failure.
Suffix number (bit) PCB

00512 Laser control PCB (LASER)
iBeam Control PCB (iBeam)
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of the system.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be displayed in the second line depending on the equipped options or
ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the displayed PCB.
☞ 50520
☞ 35500
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
iBeam power supply
Control power supply
Printer power supply 1

☞ 4200 −
☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46900 1/6
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06903
Serial communication error.
Alarm release
NO
YES or NO
• Select YES to continue the communication.
• Select NO to abort the communication.
Condition
00002 There was a communication error between the colorimeter and processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Suffix number Point
00002 An error happens if the following symptoms occur.
4. Troubleshooting
• Connection failure between the processor control PCB (J/P 704) and colorimeter.
• Supply failure from the processor power and processor control PCB (+24 V).
• (F15) of the processor control PCB has blown.



☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46900 2/6
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06909
CPU was reset. Abort the process.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
The CPU of the printer control PCB is reset due to power failure.

Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
46900 3/6
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06921
PCB error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.

00512 Laser control PCB (LASER)
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
NOTE
46900 4/6
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06931
Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
When the power supply is reset during saving a data in the printer I/F main PCB.
NOTE
• Example: If the power supply of the printer reset in registering the Result of iBeam Tuning, No.06931 may occur.

00001 Printer control PCB data
00002 Processor control PCB data
4. Troubleshooting
00004 Laser Control PCB or iBeam Control PCB data
00008 Printer I/F Main PCB data or Printer Maintenance Application data
00010 Colorimeter data
00020 Setup 1 data
00040 Setup 2 data
00080, 00100, 00200, Shading data
00400, 00800, 01000,
02000
Check Point
Manual No.
1 Reset the power supply again. −
2 If the error reoccurs, read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400
Diagnosis
NOTE
46900 5/6
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06900-06930
Condition
IMPORTANT
Error (Main)
Error message table
No. 06900 Main control system error.
No. 06907 The file was not found.
No. 06930 Failed to register the order.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46900 6/6
49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit
No. 09000-09002
Condition
IMPORTANT
Error (Edit)
Error message table
No. 09000 Edit mode System error.
No. 09002 Edit mode Image data error.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
49000 1/1
49350
Error message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage)
Error message: Bravo II/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage)
No. 9350−9381
For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-
Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Condition
NOTE
IMPORTANT
See the Bravo II Service Manual for corrective actions of the messages.
Error (Bravo II)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9354 PTIF.DLL process response error.
4. Troubleshooting
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9358 PTBurn system error.
No.9359 Tray Operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.9360 The ink cartridges were not found. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button. Make sure the
cartridges are installed.
No.9361 Bravo Internal Printer communication error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9362 The media was not picked. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9363 Arm operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9364 Arm Picker error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9365 There are no user authorizations on the personal computer. Login as Administrator, and restart the software.
No.9366 PTBurn Internal Software error. Restart the software.
No.9367 CD-R drive for Bravo was not found. Disconnect all the cables from the Bravo (including power supply). Then reconnect
all the cables to the Bravo and restart the computer.
No.9369 The Bravo Utility was not started.
No.9370 The PTBurn was not started.
No.9371 The shared folder of PTBurn could not be accessed.
No.9373 Job history information file error.
No.9374 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.
No.9375 The media was not picked. Remove the media and turn ON the power supply of the Bravo.
No.9376 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.
IMPORTANT
For corrective action of the error message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9380 Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems was not started.
No.9381 Failed to access the shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems.
49350 1/1
49450
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module
No. 10000−010401
See the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for corrective actions for the messages.
Attention: Main controller/ Setting module
No. 10000 Are you sure you want to quit the application?
No. 10001 Are you sure you want to delete the order?
No. 10003 Select the Same Service Name.
No. 10004 Processing of the print has been started. Failed to interrupt.
No. 10300 There is no data in the specified path. Specify the correct path.
No. 10302 Would you like to restart the EZ Controller to read the data?
4. Troubleshooting
No. 10304 Could not cancel as the end processing has started.
No. 10305 If you change the setting, you will have to set up the registered print channel again. Are you sure you want
to change the setting?
No. 10306 Cannot register the printer.
No. 10307 Set up the scanner.
No. 10308 The scanner you have selected is not installed. Select another scanner.
No. 10309 Cannot register with the paper size selected.
No. 10310 Cannot manipulate as order is being processed.
No. 10311 Printer registration has been changed. EZ Controller will restart.
No. 10312 The main printer has been designated for this group. Would you like to change the main printer?
No. 10313 Cannot delete the printer. Change the main printer.
No. 10400 The file was not found for showing the error/attention message for the printer.
No. 10401 The Paper Setup was not executed.
NOTE
49450 1/1
49500
Attention message: Setting module/Main controller
Attention message: Setting module/Main controller
No. 10300−15302
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual and EZ Controller Service Manual for corrective actions for the
messages.
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual.
No. 10300 There is no data in the specified path. Specify the correct path.
No. 10301 Cannot write data with the following devices as they are currently running. Would you like to continue?
No. 10302 Would you like to restart the EZ Controller to read the data?
No. 10304 Could not cancel as the end processing has started.
No. 10305 If you change the setting, you will have to set up the registered print channel again. Are you sure you want
4. Troubleshooting
to change the setting?
No. 10306 Cannot register the printer.
No. 10307 Set up the scanner.
No. 10308 The scanner you have selected is not installed. Select another scanner.
No. 10309 Cannot register with the paper size selected.
No. 10310 Cannot manipulate as order is being processed.
No. 10311 Printer registration has been changed. EZ Controller will restart.
No. 10312 The main printer has been designated for this group. Would you like to change the main printer?
No. 10313 Cannot delete the printer. Change the main printer.

No. 15000 System error.
No. 15001 USB hardware key was not detected. Confirm that the hardware key is connected.
No. 15300 Failed to initialize the data.
No. 15301 Failed to read the data.
No. 15302 Failed to write the data.
NOTE
49500 1/1
5000
Starting/ Closing sequence .................................................................................................. 50500

Startup sequence [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ..................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................50520
Dataflow ............................................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................50700
Data flow [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................................50710
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................. 55000
Paper path diagram [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................................55000
Printer paper advance operation ......................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................55100
Paper loading operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................55210
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam] ......
55300
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................55310
5 Operation sequence
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................55400
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [LP7200/3502 PLUS] ..........................................................55420
Paper rewind operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................55500
Paper splicing processing operation [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................55600
Paper end processing operation [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................55700
Fogged paper operation [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................................55800
iBeam Tuning operation ...................................................................................................... 55900
iBeam Tuning test print operation [iBeam] .......................................................................................................55900
iBeam Tuning operation [iBeam] ......................................................................................................................55910
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................56100
Processor paper advance operation (setup print) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................................................56200
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped system] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................56300
Print conveyor unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................56400
Print sorter unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam] .....................................56500
Colorimeter unit operation ................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................56600
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................56620
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ............................................................................... 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation [F] [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................57020
5000 1/1
50500
Starting/ Closing sequence
Startup sequence [LASER, iBeam]
• This section explains the starting sequence.
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.

• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X2) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.
3. The control PCBs turn ON.
4. The system starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Turns ON SSR1 (CD heater), SSR2 (BF heater) and SSR3 (STB heater) of the processor relay PCB.
5. The following error occurs if each control PCB is not turned on properly after checking the communication
status between the printer I/F main PCB and each control PCB.
Control PCB Error

Processor control PCB Printer control PCB • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
Laser control PCB (LASER) iBeam Control PCB (iBeam) communication error.
6. Checks the conditions of all the control PCBs.
If the conditions of all the control PCBs were abnormal.

• ☞ No. 06921 PCB error.
7. Checks the backup data of all the control PCBs.

NOTE
• Applicable models are indicated with % and inapplicable models are indicated with −.
Symptom Error
• If the backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor
• If the backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer
• If the backup data cannot be read to the laser control PCB from the • ☞ No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error.
printer I/F main PCB. (LASER)
• If the backup data cannot be read to the iBeam control PCB from the • ☞ No. 06183 iBeam Control PCB control error.
printer I/F main PCB. (iBeam)
• If data on the printer I/F main PCB has problems • ☞ No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main
PCB
NOTE
• If the backup data of each control PCB is abnormal, backup data is written to each control PCB from the printer I/F main PCB
after Backup data error is displayed.
• Since the laser control and iBeam control PCBs do not maintain the backup data, they are written from the printer I/F main
PCB everytime the power supply is turned on.
• After writing the backup data, the exposure engine will be controlled.
50500 1/2
50500
8. Checks the communication status between the processor control PCB and colorimeter.
Explanation
If there was a communication error between the processor control PCB and colorimeter.
• ☞ No. 06903 Serial communication error. is shown.
9. The laser control PCB checks the conditions of the G laser driver and laser unit. (LASER)
If the condition of G laser driver was abnormal.

• ☞ No. 06075 G Laser control error.
If the condition of the laser unit was abnormal.
• ☞ No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error.
• ☞ No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error.
10. Checks the communication from the iBeam control PCB to the iBeam unit. (iBeam)
If there was a communication error between the iBeam control PCB and the iBeam unit.
• ☞ No. 06182 iBeam Unit control error.
11. Controls the exposure engine.
Model Explanation
LASER The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
• Temperature control started → Temperature control completed is displayed for Laser temperature control
status of Status Display.
iBeam The system waits for that the iBeam unit becomes stable.
• Temperature control started → Temperature control completed is displayed for iBeam Temperature Status
of Status Display.
12. When Laser temperature control status of Status Display turns Temperature control started →
Temperature control completed, the laser control PCB checks the light source state of the laser unit.
(LASER)
If the light source state of the laser unit was abnormal.

• ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error.
13. The process for starting the Printer/Processor software completes.
14. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.
15. Arrangement of the exposure engine is completed.
Model Explanation
LASER Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.
iBeam Stabilization of the iBeam unit has finished.
16. The system displays an attention/error message if any.
50500 2/2
50520
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication flow [LASER, iBeam]
Order of the ARCNET communication

3 Laser (iBeam) Control PCB
ARCNET (Connector emission side)
ARCNET (Connector detection side)
LASER:
Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB iBeam: Processor control PCB
iBeam control PCB
J/P1528
J/P1527
J/P1548
J/P1524 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P1547 J/P1545
J/P1523 J/P1546 J/P674 J/P675
J/P232 J/P233
ARCNET ARCNET
LVPECL Printer I/F main PCB
J/P1207
J/P1208
LAN
J/P32
USB
ATX MOTHER
AFC/scanner control PCB
BORD
G085045
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.
! Order of the ARCNET communication

LASER, iBeam
No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 3 Laser control PCB (LASER)
50520 1/1
50700
Dataflow
Dataflow
Data flow in printing [LASER, iBeam]
Print data AFC/scanner control PCB
Actual scanning data
Prescanning data
Data coming from the media drive

USB
Media drive
LASER Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD
R laser
Bl
ase
HDD
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
se
r
LAN
Laser control PCB
Printer I/F main PCB
iBeam
iBeam control PCB LVPECL
iBeam unit
G085048
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.
1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• The scanner unit corrects the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).
2. The image is processed with the EZ Controller.
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
with the EZ Controller.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed with the EZ
Controller.
• The pre-scanned data of the scanner is transferred to the EZ Controller and displayed on the PJP monitor and printed on
index prints.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.
50700 1/2
50700
Dataflow
3. The image data goes through the printer I/F main PCB → laser (iBeam) control PCB and is output to
the exposure engine.
Model Exposure engine

LASER Laser unit
iBeam iBeam unit
4. The exposure engine exposes the paper.
50700 2/2
50710
Dataflow
Data flow [LASER, iBeam]
LASER Laser unit
R laser Note
Bl • The LUT, Correction Data for Brightness of the
Edge of Image Field [LASER] or iBeam Tuning
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
Data [iBeam] is loaded to the laser control PCB
r
or iBeam control PCB when the power supply is
turned on.
A/D converter
Laser control PCB

Buffer (up to 96 MB)
LVPECL (Transfers the RAW file.)

iBeam
A/D converter
iBeam control PCB
Buffer (up to 96 MB)
Printer I/F main PCB

iBeam unit
Flash memory
Buffer
• LUT
• Up to 4 MB
• Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field [LASER]
• iBeam Tuning Data [iBeam]
LAN (8 bit) [Transfers the RAW file.]
PC Printer profile
Scanner (PIC) or (EZ Controller) FRONTIER-Printer

• Scanning data • CMS process • CMS process
• Cropping process • Rotation
• Enlarging/reducing images • Cropping process
• Combining images
QSS-Printer software
Input Media
• Image data
Note
• On the FRONTIER-Printer, CMS process, rotation of images, and cropping process are performed
only when instructed by PIC.
G085214
50710 1/1
55000
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram [LASER, iBeam]
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.
LASER, iBeam (dual magazine)
Paper cutter unit
Paper advance unit

Paper supply unit A Arm unit 1
Arm unit 2
Correction value printing
unit
Turn unit
Paper magazine B Paper magazine A

Paper supply unit B
G083196
LASER, iBeam (triple magazine)

Paper magazine B2 Paper cutter unit
Paper advance unit

Paper supply unit A Arm unit 1
Arm unit 2
Correction value printing
unit
Connecting unit Turn unit

Paper magazine A
Paper magazine B
G085131
55000 1/2
55000
Paper path diagram
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor.
LASER, iBeam
Print conveyor unit Dryer rack
No. 1 upper guide
Normal print
Processing tanks and processing racks
Automatic colorimetry of setup print
G083167
55000 2/2
55100
Printer paper advance operation
Paper loading operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam]
• The single paper magazine type system uses only paper magazine A.
• This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the system with the dual magazine unit.
For details about the paper loading operation of the system with the triple magazine unit, see ☞ Paper loading operation (Triple
magazine) [LASER, iBeam].
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper cutter
Paper magazine B
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
Paper end sensor A (SE13)

G074569
1. Paper loading starts.
2. The paper is advanced.

• Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)
• Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
3. Did paper end sensor A or B detect the paper leading end?
When the paper end sensor cannot detect any paper

• If a test print is output
• Error ☞ No. 06012-00001
• Error ☞ No. 06013-00001
• If normal prints are output
• Error ☞ No. 06227-00001
• Error ☞ No. 06228-00001
Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF
4. Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
When the paper loading sensor cannot detect any paper

• Error ☞ No. 06012-00002
55100 1/4
55100

• Error ☞ No. 06013-00002
5. The paper leading end is advanced to just before the cut position.
• After detecting the paper by the paper loading sensor, a specified time has passed:
6. The loading is completed.
55100 2/4
55100
Paper loading operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam]
• This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine B or B2 on the system with the triple magazine unit.
For details about paper loading operation of the dual magazine model or paper magazine A, see ☞ Paper loading operation (Dual
magazine) [LASER, iBeam].
Paper magazine B2

Paper supply motor B2 (PM17)

Guide roller motor (PM15)
Paper cutter unit
Paper supply motor B (PM43)
Paper magazine A
Paper magazine B Paper end sensor B (SE41)
G085132
1. Paper loading starts.

• Paper advance motor B or B2: ON (forward)
• Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
• Guide roller motor: ON (forward)
3. Did paper end sensor B or B2 detect the paper leading end?
When the paper end sensor cannot detect any paper

• If a test print is output
• Error ☞ No. 06225-01
• Error ☞ No. 06217-01
• If normal prints are output
• Error ☞ No. 06233-01
• Error ☞ No. 06232-01
55100 3/4
55100
Guide roller motor, paper advance motor B or B2: OFF

4. Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
When the paper loading sensor cannot detect any paper

• Error ☞ No. 06225-02
• Error ☞ No. 06217-02
5. The paper leading end is advanced to just before the cut position.
• After detecting the paper by the paper loading sensor, a specified time has passed:
6. The loading is completed.
55100 4/4
55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [LASER,

iBeam]
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 384.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [LASER,
iBeam].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit when the advance length of the dual
magazine model is 383.9 mm or less.

Paper cutter
Paper hold position
Paper
Arm unit 1
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper advance motor 2 (PM21)
G085791
55200 1/6
55200
Paper is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position) then paper advance is started.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.

The paper is held with arm unit 1.
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 06101-00001
YES
Paper hold position

Paper Paper cutter
Cut position
Arm unit 1
Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Cut motor (M5)
G085792
55200 2/6
55200
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced

to the paper cut position.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward) /OFF

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)/OFF
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF
NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply motor A or B operate
simultaneously.
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF
Rewind a specified length of paper in the magazine so that

the paper leading end is before the cut position.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)/OFF
Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)/OFF
Cut position
Paper transfer position

Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right) (SE19

CVP unit
and 20)
Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
G085789
55200 3/6
55200
Is the paper advance length not more than 357.0 mm? NO The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure
advance unit.
At the same time, paper advance motor 2 starts to turn.
YES Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)/OFF
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure

advance unit.
This immediately turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear
edge comes to the CVP printing position.

Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 06135-00001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer position.
Paper hold position

Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Zigzag correction sensors (left and
right) (SE19 and 20)
CVP unit Exposure advance roller 1

Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or Exposure advance pressure change

right) motor 1 (PM25)
G085790
55200 4/6
55200
With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance unit, the hold of the arm unit 1 is released.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF

Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
Paper supply arm motors (left or right): ON (reverse)/OFF

NOTE
• The initial operation does not include this operation.
Exposure advance operation starts.

☞ 55300
NO Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
Is the paper advance length 357.0 mm or less?
the CVP printing position.
YES
NO Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
Is the paper advance length 320.0 mm or less?
paper enters the exposure advance unit.
YES
Arm unit 1 is moved to the paper hold position.
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (reverse)
Paper hold position

CVP unit
Arm unit 1
G085793
55200 5/6
55200
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error ☞ No. 06135-00002
LIGHT? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF
After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,

a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
55200 6/6
55210
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [LASER,

iBeam]
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [LASER,
iBeam].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit when the paper advance length of the
dual magazine model is 384.0mm or more.

Paper cutter
Paper hold position
Paper
Arm unit 1
G085791
55210 1/6
55210
Paper is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position) then paper advance is started.

A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.

Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 06101-00001
YES
Paper hold position

Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right) (SE19

and 20)
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20) Arm unit 1
G085789
55210 2/6
55210
The paper is advanced from the paper hold position to the paper transfer position.

NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply motor A or B operate simultaneously.
Arm unit 1 stops at the paper transfer position while the paper is being held by arm unit
1 (paper advance is continued to make a loop)
NOTE
• The advance for the loop varies depending on the paper advance length.
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 420.0 mm, the necessary advance for a loop is a few millimeters (the loop
necessary is as much amount of paper as arm unit 1 advances for adjustment.)
If the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more, the necessary advance for a loop is approximately 30 mm (the loop is necessary in
order to keep the paper from being advanced until it is cut).
Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 06135-00001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer
position.

Paper supply motor B (PM43) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position

Exposure advance
unit
CVP unit Exposure advance roller 1

Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or Exposure advance pressure change

Paper supply motor A (PM42) right) motor 1 (PM25)
G085794
55210 3/6
55210
With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance unit, the hold of the arm unit 1 is released.

Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
Paper supply arm motors (left or right): ON (reverse)/OFF

NOTE
• The initial operation does not include this operation.
Exposure advance operation starts.

☞ 55300
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced

to the paper cut position.

Paper cutter
Exposure advance
unit
CVP unit Arm unit 1
Cut motor (M5)

Paper supply arm motor (left or
Paper supply motor A (PM42) right)
G085795
55210 4/6
55210
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF



Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
the CVP printing position.

Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
paper enters the exposure advance unit.
Paper hold position

Zigzag correction sensors (left and
Exposure advance
unit
Arm unit 1
G085796
55210 5/6
55210
Arm unit 1 is moved to the paper hold position.
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (reverse)
NO Error ☞ No. 06135-00002

Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn
Arm Unit 1 operation error.
LIGHT?
YES
After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,

a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
55210 6/6
55300
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or

less/470.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam]
Exposure advance operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 469.9 mm, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm
to 469.9 mm) [LASER, iBeam].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 (PM27)
G074571
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, rollers 2 and 3 of exposure
advance unit start driving.
Exposure advance motor 2: ON
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from roller 1, pressure is applied by roller 1.

Roller 1: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure
If exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not detect DARK
Error ☞ No. 06136-00001:Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
The pressure of arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is released.

NOTE
• If the paper advance length is 357.1 to 383.9 mm/470.0 mm or more, the motor stops until the laser unit or the iBeam
unit completes exposure arrangement.
55300 1/4
55300

Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Exposure start sensor (SE22)
Exposure advance pressure change motor 2

(PM27)
G074571
The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.
NO Error ☞ No. 06208-00001
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF

YES Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
NOTE
• If the paper advance length is less than 357.0 mm, stop the driving of roller 1 until the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes
exposure arrangement.
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF/ON
Paper leading end position: The position a few millimeter short of roller 2
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from roller 2, pressure is applied by
roller 2.

Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 2: Pressure released→Pressured
55300 2/4
55300

Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure
position
Exposure end sensor (SE24)

(PM27)
G074571
The pressure of roller 1 is released at the position of the paper in front of the exposure
position.

Roller 2: Pressured→Pressure released
Roller 2: Pressured
The drive of roller is stopped.
Exposure starts.
roller 3.

Roller 2: Pressured
NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00002

Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
YES
55300 3/4
55300

Roller 3
Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

G074571
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.

NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00001
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
YES
At the position the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by
several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by several millimeters, the
pressure of roller 3 is released.

Start advancing the paper.

☞ 55400
Process of the next paper

Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Process of the current paper
NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00003

Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
YES
After the paper is rewound, rollers 2, 3 stops their driving.
End
55300 4/4
55310
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm)

[LASER, iBeam]
Exposure advance operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, or 470.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of
383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [LASER, iBeam].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm.

Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
(PM27)
G074571
55310 1/5
55310
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, rollers 2 and 3 of exposure
advance unit start driving.
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from roller 1, pressure is applied by roller 1.

Roller 1: Released pressure→Pressured
The pressure of arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is released.
NOTE
• Stands by until the exposure arrangement of the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes.

Roller 1
Exposure position
G074571
55310 2/5
55310
The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.
Is the paper advance length 420.0 mm or less? NO
YES
The driving of roller 1 is stopped during the paper cutting in front of the exposure start
sensor.
The drive of roller 1 is restarted.
NO Error ☞ No. 06208-00001
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
YES

Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure
position

(PM27)
G074571
55310 3/5
55310
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from roller 2, pressure is applied
by roller 2.
Roller 1: Pressured
Exposure starts.
roller 3.
Then, the pressure of pressure roller 1 is released.

Roller 2: Pressured
Driving of roller 1 is stopped in front of it.
NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00002

Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
YES
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25) Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller 3
Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

G074571
55310 4/5
55310
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.

NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00001

Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
YES
At the position the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by
several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by several millimeters, the pressure of
roller 3 is released.

Start advancing the paper.

☞ 55400
Process of the next paper
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Process of the current paper

NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00003
YES
After the paper is rewound, rollers 2, 3 stops their driving.
End
55310 5/5
55400
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [LASER, iBeam]
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
The paper advance operation is different depending on whether performing the lane selection or not.
If the lane is selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [LP7200/3502 PLUS].
Conditions in which the lane is not selected (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Condition
The paper width is 102.1 mm or more. When the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more
First print in an order Cleaning print (one sheet out of 50 sheets or 82 sheets depending on
the type)
First print after the sorter operates Unexposed paper (leading edge processing paper, fogged paper,
splicing paper)
Test print for system adjustment Setup print (only when measuring color with the colorimeter)
Inserting position
Arm
Arm unit 2 Arm

Standby position
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section
G074572
55400 1/4
55400
Turn unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor
Paper advance pressure change

motor (PM29) Paper advance unit
G085797
When the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by several millimeters,
pressure is applied by the advance roller and then the advance roller starts driving.
Paper advance pressure change motor: ON/OFF

Advance rollers: pressure release → pressure
Paper advance motor 3: ON
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 06144-00003: Paper Advance Pressure
Change Motor operation error. appears.
NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00003

Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.

NOTE
• The stop position of the rear end of the paper is where the length from the front edge of the turn unit guide (lower) to the rear end
of the paper is − 1 to 0 mm.
For details, see Paper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
55400 2/4
55400
Inserting position
Arm
Arm unit 2
Arm
Standby
position
Receiving
position Exposure position Advance roller
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section Turn sensor
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G078385
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

If the turn sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 06147-00003: Turn Motor operation error. appears.
Paper advance arm motor: ON/OFF
If the arm sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 06146-00003: Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
The advance roller starts driving.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.

Advance rollers: pressure → pressure release
Paper leading end: Position where a specified length of paper is advanced from the roller of the arm
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 06144-00002: Paper Advance Pressure Change
Motor operation error. appears.
Arm unit 2 starts going up.
Paper advance arm motor: ON

If the arm sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT even though the arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, ☞ No. 06146-00002:
Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
55400 3/4
55400
Arm
Arm
Inserting
position
Arm unit 2
Paper

Standby Arm sensor
position
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
Paper advance arm motor (PM31)
Turn motor (PM32)
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Arm unit 2 stops going up at the inserting position.
Paper advance arm motor: OFF

NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
Arm unit 2 starts going down.
Arm unit 2 stops going down at the standby position.
End
55400 4/4
55420
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [LP7200/3502 PLUS]
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
The paper advance operation is different depending on whether performing the lane selection or not.
If the lane is not selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [LASER, iBeam].
Conditions in which lane is selected
• The paper width is 102 mm or less.
Inserting
position
Arm
Arm unit 2 Arm
Standby Paper Advance Section

position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
G074572
55420 1/6
55420
Turn unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor

motor (PM29) Paper advance unit
G085797
When the rear end of the paper passes the exposure position by several millimeters,
pressure is applied by the advance roller and then the advance roller starts driving.
Paper advance pressure change motor: ON/OFF

Advance rollers: pressure release → pressure
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 06144-00003: Paper Advance Pressure Change
NO Error ☞ No. 06209-00003


Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.

NOTE
• The stop position of the rear end of the paper is where the length from the front edge of the turn unit guide (lower) to the rear end
of the paper is − 1 to 0 mm.
For details, see Paper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
55420 2/6
55420
Inserting
position
Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2

Standby
position
Exposure position
Advance roller
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section Turn sensor
Turn motor (PM32)
motor (PM29)
G074572
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Paper advance arm motor: ON/OFF
If the arm sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 06146-00003: Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
The advance roller starts driving.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.

Advance rollers: pressure → pressure release
Paper leading end: Position where a specified length of paper is advanced from the roller of the arm
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 06144-0002:Paper Advance Pressure Change
Arm unit 2 starts going up.

If the arm sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT even though the arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, ☞ No. 06146-00002:
Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
55420 3/6
55420
Arm
Inserting Arm
position Lane select motor
Arm unit 2 (PM30)
Lane select
Paper
sensor (SE26)

Standby Arm sensor
position
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
Paper advance arm motor (PM31) Turn motor (PM32)
G074572
After arm unit 2 goes up a specified length, the arm selection operation starts while arm unit 2 continues
going up.
Lane select motor: ON

Even though arm unit is moved from the center lane to the far side lane, the lane select sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK,
☞ No. 06145-00003: Lane Select Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane
is not supervised.
After the paper moves to the selection position, the arm selection operation stops.
Lane select motor: OFF
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Arm unit 2 stops going up at the inserting position.

NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
Arm unit 2 starts going down at the inserting position.
55420 4/6
55420
If the paper advance length is 183 mm or less
Inserting
position
Lane select Paper

sensor (SE26) Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2
Lane select motor
(PM30)
Standby Arm sensor
position
Receiving
position

(PM31)
G074572
After arm unit 2 goes down a specified length, the arm selection operation starts while arm unit 2 continues going down.

Even though arm unit is moved from the far side lane to the center lane, the lane select sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT,
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane is
not supervised.
After the paper moves to the center, the arm selection

operation stops.
End
55420 5/6
55420
If the paper advance length is 183.1 mm or more
Inserting
position
Lane select Paper

sensor (SE26) Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2
Lane select motor
(PM30)
Standby Exposure Advance Arm sensor
position
Receiving
position

(PM31)
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out from arm unit 2, the arm
selection operation starts.

Even though arm unit is moved from the far side lane to the center lane, the lane select sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT,
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane
is not supervised.
After the paper moves to the center, the arm selection

operation stops.
End
55420 6/6
55500
Paper rewind operation (Dual magazine) [LASER, iBeam]
• The single paper magazine type system uses only paper magazine A.
• This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the system with the dual magazine unit.
For the paper rewind operation of the system with the triple magazine unit, see ☞ Paper rewind operation (Triple magazine) [LASER,
iBeam].
Paper rewind conditions

• Paper was rewound in the Printer Mechanical Adjustment→Functions.
• After paper cutting was finished and then 30 seconds passed, the paper was automatically rewound.
• The paper end sensor is DARK when turning on the power supply.
• The error of paper jam occurred on the printer and processor.
• The magazine to be used is changed when the paper is being loaded from the magazine.
• When the paper is end
• ☞ 55700
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper cutter
Paper magazine B Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper end sensor A (SE13)

G074569
1. Paper rewinding is started.

• Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)
• Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)
3. Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT?
If the paper loading sensor did not turn LIGHT

• Error ☞ No. 06014-00001
• Error ☞ No. 06015-01
4. Did paper end sensor A or B turn LIGHT?
If the paper end sensor did not turn LIGHT

• Error ☞ No. 06014-00002
• Error ☞ No. 06015-00002
55500 1/4
55500

5. The paper is rewound into the magazine.

• After paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT, a specified time has passed:
6. Rewinding is completed.
55500 2/4
55500
Paper rewind operation (Triple magazine) [LASER, iBeam]
• This section explains the paper rewind operation of paper magazine B or B2 on the system with the triple magazine unit while printing.
For the paper rewind operation of the dual magazine model or paper magazine A, see ☞ Paper rewind operation (Dual magazine)
[LASER, iBeam].
Paper magazine B2
Paper supply motor B2 (PM17)


Guide roller motor (PM15)
Paper cutter unit
Paper magazine A
Paper magazine B Paper end sensor B (SE41)
G085182
1. Paper rewinding is started.

• Paper advance motor B or B2: ON (reverse)
• Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)
• Guide roller motor: ON (reverse)
3. Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT?
If the paper loading sensor did not turn LIGHT

• Error ☞ No. 06226-00001
• Error ☞ No. 06218-00001
55500 3/4
55500
4. Did paper end sensor B (or B2) turn LIGHT?
If the paper end sensor did not turn LIGHT

• Error ☞ No. 06226-00002
• Error ☞ No. 06218-00002
5. The paper is rewound into the magazine.

• After paper end sensor B or B2 turns LIGHT, a specified time has passed:
6. Rewinding is completed.
55500 4/4
55600
Paper splicing processing operation [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition
Splice hole
Splice section
Paper cutters
Paper
advance
direction
Y X
Cut prohibitive area (253.1 mm) Exposure possible area
G074573
• X = Paper length out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut-forbidden area and the cutter
! Operation outline:
! Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is the print advance length or more (X + Y ≥ Print advance length)
1. Load the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Then load the splice section and cut it, and then feed out the splice section.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)
! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)
X + Y < 82.5 mm
1. Load the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)
X + Y is 82.5 mm or more and the print advance length is from 82.5 to 420.0 mm.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out the unexposed paper to the processor.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
X + Y is 82.5 mm or more, and the print advance length is 420.1 mm or more.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out to the processor after exposure.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
55600 1/1
55700
Paper end processing operation [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the paper end processing operation in printing.

• The paper is rewound into the magazine in paper end.
• Remove the rewound paper when replacing with the new one.
• Except in printing, the paper end processing is also carried out in the following timing.
• Printing was started, and the paper end was detected when the paper leading end was advanced.
• The paper end was detected in processing of the fogged paper.
• When the loading operation was carried out on the Various Adjustment mode (Focus Adjustment, Printer Mechanical
Adjustment, etc.), the paper end was detected.
Paper length that rewound into the magazine with the paper end processing
• For paper magazine A of the single or dual magazine system, the paper end length is about min. 184 mm to max. 1098.4 mm.
(184 + Paper advance length → maximum of 184 + 914.4 = 1098.4 mm )
Advance length of paper leading end

Approx. 184 mm
Paper cutter Exposure advance unit
Paper magazine A Paper end sensor A (SE13)
G074575
• For paper magazine B of the dual magazine model, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 1206.4 mm.
Paper end sensor B (SE41) Paper cutter
Approx. 292 mm
Advance length of paper leading

end
Paper magazine B
G074576
• For paper magazine B of the triple magazine model, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 206.4 mm.
55700 1/4
55700
• For paper magazine B2 of the triple magazine model, the paper end length is about min. 336 mm to max. 1280.4 mm.
Paper magazine B2
Paper cutter
Approx. 366
mm
Approx. 292
mm Advance length of paper leading
end Exposure advance unit
Paper magazine B
G085183
55700 2/4
55700
Did paper end sensor A (or B) turn LIGHT? NO The paper processing is continued.
YES
The CVP printing and paper advancing are stopped.
Is the paper leading end held by arm unit 1? NOTE

(= Is the paper front end advance length 82.5 mm or more?)
• If the advance length of paper leading end from a paper cutter is
82.5 mm or more, the paper is held with Arm unit 1.
NO YES
Cut the paper, and advance the front end to the exposure advance
unit.
NO
Is the paper advance length 384.0 mm or more? Advanced to the processor without being exposed.
UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
YES
Advanced to the processor after exposed.

UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
NOTE
• It is necessary to reprint since the print does not have the
specified advance length.
The paper is rewound into the magazine.

• The paper is slightly ejected from the magazine.
Normal Print Setup/Adjustment Print

Attention message ☞ No. 01000 Attention No. 01109
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
Attention message ☞ No. 01001 Attention No. 01108
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B2
Attention No. 01098 Attention No. 01103
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B2 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
Attention No. 01104
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
55700 3/4
55700
Normal Print Setup/Adjustment Print

Click Forced Output. Do you continue the printing operation?
YES
Attention No. 01119
Which paper magazine would you like to print with?
Attention No. 01120
Which paper magazine would you like to print with? Did you replace the paper magazine with a new one?
NO
YES
Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change
Setup? Click YES.
YES NO YES
The process for the emulsion number change setup is

continued.
Attention message ☞ No. 01002

Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
Attention message ☞ No. 01003, No. 01101
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
Attention No. 01099
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B2
NO
Do you feed out the first piece of paper without exposing
Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
it?
YES
Select YES to eject the first piece of paper without exposing.
The paper processing is continued.
55700 4/4
55800
Fogged paper operation [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the operation of fogged paper caused by opened printer door while the paper is loaded (status of print standby).
Timing when the fogged paper is processed
• When the first print is made after the fogged paper was made
Situation in which the fogged paper is made
Paper magazine A
Y = approx. 210 mm X
Paper cutter

Paper magazine A
Rewinding position
G074577
Paper magazine B of the dual magazine-type or triple magazine-type system
Paper cutter
Rewinding position
X
Y = approx. 318 mm
Paper magazine B
G074578
Paper magazine B2 of the triple magazine-type system
Y = approx. 392 mm Paper cutter
Paper magazine B2
Rewinding position
G085184
55800 1/2
55800
! Operation outline
Condition 1: Paper leading end is at the rewinding position.
Model Operation specification
LASER, iBeam 1. When the paper size of the magazine which is in use changes from narrow to wide: One piece of
paper is advanced by 200 mm advance.
NOTE
• For cleaning of the processing rack, carry out the work above.
2. For iBeam, two pieces of paper are advanced by 200 mm before printing the test print of iBeam
Tuning.
NOTE
• In test printing for iBeam Tuning, the purpose of advancing the paper is the same as that of
advancing the paper when the paper size changes from narrow to wide, because the test prints
are printed on the outer sides than the maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced because the system advances paper to both the left and right
sides along the paper advancing direction.
3. Except for the operation specifications 1 and 2: One piece of paper is advanced by 82.5 mm.
Condition 2: Paper leading end is before the paper cutter or at the position less than 52.5 mm away from the
paper cutter.
LASER, iBeam 1. Cut the paper at 117 mm from the paper leading end and then at every 117 mm advance, then feed
the pieces out. Feed out the paper of which the total length of Y is shown in the figure above.
NOTE
• If the paper leading end is 200 mm away from the rewinding position, 234 mm (117 mm x 2) is
to be advanced.
Condition 3: Paper leading end is at the position 52.5 mm away from the paper cutter.
LASER, iBeam 1. The paper that passes the paper cutter position is to be cut in the initial operation after the printer
doors are closed.
Take the cut paper out of the printer.
Cut the paper left to be cut by 117 mm and the cut papers are fed out including the rewinding
position.
55800 2/2
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
iBeam Tuning test print operation [iBeam]
This section describes the test print operation at iBeam Tuning.

NOTE
• If performing iBeam Tuning, the two unexposed prints (advance length: 200 mm) and the two test prints (advance length: 89 mm) are
printed.
To confirm the exposure condition with the paper width up to ±3.5 mm, move paper advance roller 2 to the paper width direction and
select the lane.
This selecting operation is not performed for normal print operation. Paper advance roller 2 is held at home position (rear).
• The two unexposed prints (advance length: 200 mm) are printed to remove the dirt of the processing racks.
The advance position of test print has not been used for normal print. So the unexposed prints are printed without the confirmation
message.
Unexposed prints are output when performing iBeam Tuning for the first time or changing the paper size from narrow to wide.
Paper cutter Roller position sensor

Roller move motor (PM33)
Paper
Arm unit 1
Test Print
(89 mm)
Unexposed prints
(200 mm)
Paper advance roller 1 Paper advance roller 2

Rear: Home position
Front: Information of paper lane
G082074
55900 1/6
55900
Paper hold position

Paper cutter
Paper

Arm unit 1
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Cut motor (M5)

G074570
Paper is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut

position) then paper advance is started.
A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped

where the paper end comes to the hold position.

The paper is advanced to the cut position.

Unexposed print: paper advance length 200 mm
Test print: paper advance length 89 mm

NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply
motor A or B operate simultaneously.
55900 2/6
55900
Paper hold position

Paper feed position
Paper cutter Refuge position against sliding of paper
advance roller 2
Paper Paper
Arm unit 1
G082077
Arm unit 1 releases pressure.
Arm unit 1 moves to the direction of the exposure advance
section.
NOTE
• When paper advance roller 2 slides, arm unit 1 moves to
the position where the front ends of guide do not
contact the paper, while holding the paper edge.
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF
Arm unit 1 releases pressure.
55900 3/6
55900

Arm unit 1
Paper advance roller 1
G082074


Paper advance roller 2 moves to the front.
Roller move motor: ON/OFF

Roller position sensor: DARK → LIGHT
Did the roller position sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error ☞ No. 06185-00002
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
Moves the arm unit 1 to the direction of the paper advance

roller 2.
NOTE
• The unit returns from the refuge position to the paper
holding position.
55900 4/6
55900

Arm unit 1
G082074
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the

exposure advance section, and feed the first print.
NOTE
• The following operations are same as normal print
operation.

Paper advance motor 2: ON/OFF
Perform the same operation for the second test print which is
before paper advance unit 2 slides.
NOTE
• Be sure to keep paper advance roller 2 in the position
which is just after completing processing the first test
print (front).
55900 5/6
55900

Arm unit 1
G082074
Paper advance roller 2 moves to the rear.
Roller move motor: ON/OFF

Roller position sensor: LIGHT → DARK
Did the roller position sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 06185-00001
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
The following operations are same as the first test print

operation. The second test print is advanced to the exposure
advance section.
End
For the unexposed print, process the next test print in same
way.
NOTE
• Operation for the unexposed prints and the test prints
are same. Only the advance length differ.
55900 6/6
55910
iBeam Tuning operation [iBeam]
This section explains iBeam Tuning Operation by describing test prints and the flatbed scanner operation.
1. Output the test print of iBeam Tuning.

• Two test prints are printed, one shifted to the front side and the other to the rear side by 3.5 mm each from the Exposure
Center.
Exposure Center
Paper advance
direction
Test print 2
(Rear)
Test print 1
(Front)
Paper width direction

G082776
2. Confirm the flatbed scanner connection.

• Confirm the flatbed scanner connection after outputting test prints and before scanning.
• Even if the flatbed scanner lamp is turned OFF, the lamp turns on when operating iBeam Tuning.
IMPORTANT
• The lamp turns off automatically if the flatbed scanner does not operate for 15 minutes.
• It takes about 4 minutes to stabilize the lamp of flatbed scanner since the lamp turns ON.
If the flatbed scanner cannot be recognized
• ☞ No. − Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner.
3. Place the test print ejected from the processor to the flatbed scanner.
• Place the test print face down with the arrow up (pointing the far side).
NOTE
• The position of test prints does not affect on the measurement.
55910 1/4
55910
Flatbed scanner
Arrow
Glass surface Test prints

G082692
4. Prescanning
Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
line
Measurement
section
Coordinate check
line
Paper type check

line
Paper type Date and time Direction

G082775
• Detect the test prints first.
Compare the length of two blocks in image judgment line to judge test print 1 (front) and test print 2 (rear).
Test print 1 (front) If the left block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date can
be read correctly. (see the illustration above)
Test print 2 (rear) If the right block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date
can be read correctly.
NOTE
• The blocks are detected from the center to the end of paper without image.
If the line is on the longer block, the system may recognize the line as the paper edge and judge the block as the shorter
one.
• The data on the shorter block is not used for correction.
• Confirm the test print tilt with the image check line.
Measure the test print if its tilt is less than 30 degrees.
55910 2/4
55910
• Confirm the paper type with the number of blocks at the center of paper type check line.
4 Paper Type 1
6 Paper Type 2
8 Paper Type 3
• Decides the scanning area referring to the image check line and the paper type check line.
If the two test prints are not detected or the test print in same side is detected
• ☞ No. − Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.
If the test print tilt is 30 degrees or more
If the paper type is different
• ☞ No. − Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print.
5. Scanning
Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
Measurement
section
Coordinate check
Paper type check

line

G082775
• Calculates each dot coordinate with the coordinate check line.
Measure the amount of light for each dot with the calculated coordinate.
If no dots can be detected with the coordinate check line
55910 3/4
55910
6. Calculates the correction value of iBeam Tuning.

Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
Measurement
section
Coordinate check
Paper type check

line
G082775
• Calculates the correction value with the amount of light for each dot in the measurement part.
If the measured dots is below the specified number
If dust is detected on the flatbed scanner.
• ☞ No. − Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass surface
or test print and measure again.
7. The result is displayed and confirm the print quality.

• Confirm the quality with the sample print and perform iBeam Tuning if necessary.
☞ 32511
55910 4/4
56100
Processor paper advance operation
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the operation from entering of normal print paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit. It is a
precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Paper advance operation of setup print varies normal print operation.
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• For•normal print, start the paper loading after the dryer section temperature reached to 50C.
2. Load paper, and start exposure advance operation.
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
Exposure end sensor
Normal Print
Setup print
G083167
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.
Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice
5. The paper leading edge passes through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
If the print sensor fails to detect the paper consecutive six times, the next message is displayed.
• ☞ No. 05535
56100 1/3
56100
Print sensor (left): SE30

Print sensor (right): SE29
Print conveyor unit
G084586
IMPORTANT
• The print sensor (left) or the print sensor (right) detects paper.
When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
Print sensor (left)
3 5
2 4 6
Dryer rack
Print sensor (right)
G078449
• The LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and the 3501 PLUS are not equipped with the print sensor (right) because they
do not select lanes.
When not performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (LP7000, LP7100, LP7200/3501 PLUS, 3501i PLUS, 3502 PLUS)
Print sensor (left)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dryer rack

G078450
6. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

• For the details of print conveyor unit operation, refer to the following.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped system] [LASER, iBeam]
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam]
56100 2/3
56100
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was ejected to the print conveyor unit;
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 3/3
56200
Processor paper advance operation (setup print) [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the operation from entering of setup print paper into the processor to ejecting of the setup print paper from the
colorimeter unit. It is a precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Normal print paper advance operation is different from the setup operation.
NOTE
• Print to measure color with the colorimeter will be explained.
The following prints that do not measure color with colorimeter unit are same as normal print operation.
• iBeam Tuning print (only for iBeam)
• iBeam engine check print (only for iBeam)
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• For•the setup print, start the paper loading after the Dryer Temperature or Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) reached Waiting
Time.
☞ 33505
2. Load paper, and start exposure advance operation.
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
Exposure end sensor
Normal Print
Setup print
G085799
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
5. Calibrate the colorimeter automatically.

• For the details of colorimeter unit operation, refer to the following.
☞ 56600
56200 1/2
56200
Print sensor
Dryer selection guide

Colorimeter unit
Dryer lane select motor
Dryer selection home sensor

Normal Print Paper sensor 1
Setup print
G085798
6. Switch the dryer selection guide to the colorimeter unit.

• Dryer select motor: ON/OFF
• Dryer selection home sensor: Dark to LIGHT
If the dryer selection guide was not operated normally
• ☞ No. 05552-00001
If the paper is detected by the print sensor before print was detected by the paper sensor 1
• ☞ No. 05552-00004
If there are something like fogged parts in the previous process, the selection guide is switched to the colorimeter unit after they are
ejected from the processor.
7. The prints are advanced to the colorimeter unit, and the prints are ejected after measured.
• For the details of setup print color measuring operation, refer to the following.
☞ 56610
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.
• Processor drive motor: OFF
• Dryer fan: OFF
• Dryer heater: OFF
8. Switch the dryer selection guide to the belt conveyor.

• Dryer select motor: ON/OFF
• Dryer selection home sensor: LIGHT to Dark
If the dryer selection guide was not operated normally
• ☞ No. 05552-00002
56200 2/2
56300
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped system]

[LASER, iBeam]
The print conveyer unit operation is different between with and without the print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100.
2. Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the print sensor.
3. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (forward/reverse rotation)
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print conveyor moves.
Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• When the condition 2 is not fulfilled, the print conveyor waits for a specified time before it starts to work.
Dryer rack Paper advance direction
A specified time A specified time
Order Order Order
Conveyor motor: ON Conveyor motor: ON
Conveyor motor: OFF

Longer than the Shorter than the specified
specified time time
G084536
56300 1/4
56300
• The print conveyor operation varies according to each print size.
Print size condition Print conveyor operation Operatio

n pattern
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm The print conveyor moves 130 mm each to the print receiving 1
or less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 305 box by each order. (Normal rotation) *1
mm or less When the paper width is under 130 mm
Dryer rack
Print conveyor unit
When the paper width is 130 mm or more
Dryer rack
Print conveyor unit
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm Move to the receiving tray on the back side (Reverse rotation) 2
or less × the paper advance length over 305 mm to 420
mm or less
Paper with the paper width over 82.5 mm to 210 mm or
less × the paper advance length from 420 mm to 610
mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
Spliced paper
Paper with the paper width over 82.5 mm to 210 mm or The print conveyor is not moved. (collecting on the print 3
less × the paper advance length from 420.1 mm to 610 conveyor) *2
mm or less
Paper with the paper width over 127.1 mm to 210 mm The print conveyor is not moved. (collecting on the print 4
or less × the paper advance length from 610.1 mm to conveyor)
914.4 mm or less
(only for LASER)
*1. If the print width is 130 mm or more, it is collected to overlap the next order. It is possible to collect until 3-order specification.
*2. If the print sensor detects the print rear end with the advance length 420.1 mm or more, ☞ No. 00519Remove the prints from the
Print Conveyor Unit. displays with the following conditions.
56300 2/4
56300
The advance length of the next print is under 420 mm

The next print is not processed
The next print is the first print in an order
20 prints with the advance length over 420.1 mm are accumulated on the print conveyor.
• The print conveyor operation varies according to previous print type.

IMPORTANT
• When mixing the print of the operation 1 to 3 in the same order, the print conveyor is operated as the following
table.
The print type in the previous The first print type in the next Print conveyor operation pattern
order order
The print type of the operation The print type of the operation Operate with the pattern 1 in the above table
pattern 1 in the above table pattern 1 in the above table
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 2 after removing all
pattern 2 in the above table print to the print receiving box on the print conveyor
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 3 after removing all
pattern 3 in the above table print to the print receiving box on the print conveyor
The print type of the operation The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 1 after moved the
pattern 2 in the above table pattern 1 in the above table previous order print to receiving tray on the back side
The print type of the operation Operate with the pattern 2 in the above table
pattern 2 in the above table
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 3 after moved the
pattern 3 in the above table previous order print to receiving tray on the back side
The print type of the operation All print type Operate with the pattern 3 in the above table When the
pattern 3 in the above table additional order is received to be operated with that operation
pattern, the print is also moved if the long print was not
removed.
The print type of the operation All print type The print conveyor is not moved. (collecting on the print
pattern 4 in the above table conveyor)
(only for LASER) For the long length print (36inch), you are required to remove
the print fed out of the dryer immediately. Therefore, the
attention message occurs every time when the print is fed out.
Receiving tray
Reverse rotation Normal rotation

Print receiving box
Print conveyor unit
G084533
4. The number of received prints on the conveyor unit exceeds 50.

• Conveyor motor: ON (after the fixed time has passed: OFF)
NOTE
• The conveyor motor is operated when the next print leading end is detected after the number of prints on the conveyor
unit exceeds 50.
56300 3/4
56300
However, Control strip processing, splicing paper, Paper Leading Edge Advance, fogged paper, paper end and cleaning
paper are not counted.
• The operation condition of the conveyor motor is same as ☞ Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the
print sensor..
Print sensor (left): SE30

Print sensor (right): SE29
Print conveyor unit
G084586
5. Conveyor belt stops moving after the fixed time.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
56300 4/4
56400
Print conveyor unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit]
[LASER, iBeam]
The print conveyer unit operation is different between with and without the print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped system] [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100.
2. The print sensor detects the paper trailing edge.
3. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

Dryer rack
A specified time Conveyor motor: ON (reverse rotation)
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
G080228
IMPORTANT
• The LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and the 3501 PLUS are not equipped with the print sensor (right) because they
do not select lanes.
In case of a control strip:
• Conveyor motor: does not operate
4. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (forward/reverse rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper trailing edge.
Condition The direction of the conveyor motor

operation
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
length from 82.5 mm to 305 mm or less unit)
56400 1/3
56400

operation
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
length over 305 mm to 420 mm or less the back side)
Paper with the paper width over 82.5 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance
length from 420 mm to 610 mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
Paper with the paper width over 82.5 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance Not rotated (collecting on the print
length from 420.1 mm to 610 mm or less conveyor) *1
Paper with the paper width over 127.1 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance Not rotated (collecting on the print
length from 610.1 mm to 914.4 mm or less conveyor)
(only for LASER)
*1. If the print sensor detects the print rear end with the advance length 420.1 mm or more, ☞ No. 00519Remove the prints from the Print
Conveyor Unit. displays with the following conditions.
The advance length of the next print is under 420 mm
The next print is not processed
The next print is the first print in an order
20 prints with the advance length over 420.1 mm are accumulated on the print conveyor.
NOTE
• Printer judges the direction of conveyor motor rotation and instruction is send to the processor.
Receiving tray
Print sorter unit
Reverse rotation
Normal rotation
Print conveyor
G084534
5. The conveyer belt operates. (The operating direction differs depending on the detection status of the print
sorter unit print full sensor.)
NOTE
• The description of Rotation in regular direction may be varied according to the print size to Reverse rotation by print size.
When the print full sensor is LIGHT
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, and changes to LIGHT before the next order is
ejecting
• ☞ No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor is LIGHT for a specified time
• ☞ No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
56400 2/3
56400

operation
The order that is ejected from the dryer rack when the messages is appeared Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
unit)
The order that is ejected to the next time Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
the back side) *1
*1. Though the print full sensor is turned to LIGHT while ejecting, all print of that order is ejected to the receiving tray on the back side.
6. Paper is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit or the receiving tray on the back side.
7. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
8. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, refer to ☞ 56500.
56400 3/3
56500
Print sorter unit operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER,
iBeam]
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move after paper is ejected to the print sorter unit.
! Basic operation of the print receiving tray
1. The last piece of paper of an order is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.
2. The print receiving tray moves.

• Sorter motor: ON (rotates)
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• When the condition 2 is not fulfilled, the print receiving tray waits for a specified time before it starts to work.
When the sorter home sensor does not turn LIGHT within a specified time:
• No.5534-01
Print sorter unit operation error
Sorter motor: DM4
Sorter home sensor: SE31
G084532
56500 1/3
56500
Dryer rack Paper advance direction
A specified time A specified time
Order Order Order
Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON
Sorter motor: OFF

Longer than the Shorter than the specified
Print sensor (right) specified time time
G080229
IMPORTANT
• The LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS and the 3501 PLUS are not equipped with the print sensor (right) because
they do not select lanes.
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.
• Sorter motor: OFF (stops)
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
When the sorter home sensor does not turn DARK within a specified time:
• No.5534-02
Print sorter unit operation error
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 00505Remove the prints from the
Print Sorter Unit. appears.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message is canceled.
• The print conveyor operation varies according to the detected status of the print full sensor. ☞ Print conveyor unit
operation [system equipped with print sorter unit] [LASER, iBeam]
Print full sensor
G084535
56500 2/3
56500
! Condition that affects the operation of print receiving tray which changes depending
on the paper size and number of prints and so on
IMPORTANT
• The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on it is limited. Therefore, prints may be received by more
than one tray even the prints are within the same order.
Basic paper size The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on
it
Paper width Advance length 12-order specification 10-order specification
From 82.5 mm to 102 mm or From 82.5 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 102 mm to 152 mm or From 82.5 mm to 254 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 254 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 50 prints
less
*1. If there is a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is
on the same print receiving tray, the number of prints that the tray can keep is 50.
If a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is ejected
on the print receiving tray after 50 or more prints with the basic paper size are ejected, the print receiving tray moves immediately and the
following prints are received by the next tray.
56500 3/3
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
The calibration operation of the colorimeter [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the paper advance operation of colorimeter.

NOTE
• The calibrate operation of the colorimeter starts a minute before the setup print paper reaches to the colorimeter unit.
• To measure again, the calibration operation starts when YES is selected after the attention message ☞ No. −The measurement
failed. Measure it again. appears.
Measuring position
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
Calibration plate advance motor
Paper sensor 2 Paper sensor 1
Pressure solenoid
G085133
1. Release the pressure of the measuring position, start to move Black of the calibration plate to the
measuring position.
• Pressure solenoid: ON
• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)
2. After the calibration plate detects the paper sensor 2, it moves for a specified length and stops at the
measuring position of Black.
• Paper sensor 1: LIGHT to DARK

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When paper sensor 2 does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06554-00001
When paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06554-00002
3. Apply pressure to the Black of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
56600 1/3
56600
Measuring position
Calibration plate
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensor 2
Pressure solenoid
G084567
4. Shift the calibration plate for a specified length and stop it at the measuring position White of the
calibration plate.
• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF

• ☞ No. 06554-00004
5. Pressure the White of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
6. The calibration plate starts to move to the standby position.

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (reverse)
Measuring position
Calibration plate
Pressure solenoid
G084568
7. After the paper sensor 1 detects that the calibration plate passed, moves for a specified length, the
calibration plate stops at the standby position.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
• ☞ No. 06554-00006
56600 2/3
56600
8. Apply pressure to the measuring position without the calibration plate.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
9. Judge and register the result of the calibration plate, calibrate the colorimeter.
For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ Judgment operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam].
56600 3/3
56610
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the colorimetry of the setup print in the colorimeter unit.
NOTE
• When attention messages or error messages appear after failed to measure the setup print, the setup print is ejected without registering
the result.
• When the measurement would be failed and the attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed. Measure it again. appears, you
can measure the setup print again if inputted to the colorimeter unit manually.
1. The print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.
Paper advance motor Measuring position
Remeasurement inlet
Colorimeter Paper
Pressure solenoid
G084569
2. Detects the paper leading end by paper sensor 1, and releases the pressure of the measurement position.
• ☞ No. 05535
3. Starts to advance the paper after detected the paper leading end by paper sensor 1.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
• ☞ No. 01552-00001
56610 1/3
56610
Measuring position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
4. After detected the paper leading end by paper sensor 2, advances a specified length of paper and stops.
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
• ☞ No. 06551-00001
5. Applies pressure to the paper at the measuring position, and measures the density.
6. Moves the paper for a specified pitch of each measuring format.

• ☞ No. 01552-00002
• ☞ No. 06551-00002
7. Repeats from Step 5 to Step 6 for reaching to the final measurement position, and measures the density
of each step.
• For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ 56620.
8. When the density measurement of each step is completed, releases the pressure of the measurement
position and ejects the paper.
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
56610 2/3
56610
Measuring position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
9. After detected the paper rear end by paper sensor 2, advances a specified length of paper and stop.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT to DARK
• Paper sensor 2: DARK to LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06551-00003
10. Applies pressure at the measuring position without paper.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
11. After judged the result, registers the correction value.
56610 3/3
56620
Judgment operation of setup print [LASER, iBeam]
This section describes the judgment operation to measure the setup print at the daily setup.
NOTE
• When the daily setup is automatically performed after the startup of the program timer, the measurement is stopped to eject the paper
when attention messages or error messages appear.
• When the daily setup is performed from the Menu or Start Up Checks, all the papers are ejected after the measurement even though
attention messages or error messages appear.
Performing a setup print

After attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed. Measure it
again. appears, select YES to measure again.
(Input the print failed to measure or the print with the correct paper
type to the colorimeter unit.)
Performing a colorimeter calibration
NO
Measurement value difference of between Black and White Attention message ☞ No. 01555
of the calibration plate is above the specified value. The calibration plate data is out of range.
YES YES
A
Measurement of print density
NO Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed.

Paper type is correct.
Measure it again.
YES
Density between each step is consecutively increasing. NO
YES NO
All three colors of C, M and Y have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2001
Setup error.
YES
Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed. Measure

it again.
56620 1/3
56620
NO A
Dmax is above 0.9.
YES NO
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed.
Measure it again.
YES
NO
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed.
Measure it again.
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3001 A

Setup error.
NO
Dmax is below 3.8.
NO
YES
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2002
Setup error.
YES
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2003

Setup error.
YES NO
Error ☞ No. 06205-#4001

Setup error.
Calculation of the correction value.
The correction value is within 10 fold of the previous NO

value.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES
Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed. Measure

it again. A
56620 2/3
56620
NO
The correction value is below 3 key of the previous value.
NO
YES
Error ☞ No. 06203-#2005
All three colors of C, M and Y have the similar tendency. Setup error.
YES
NO Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed.

Requires plus correction. (Print density has been Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3002 A

Setup error.
The correction value is within 2 times of the value at Initial

NO
Setup or paper specification registration setup.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES
NO
Attention message ☞ No. −The measurement failed.
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3003 A

Setup error.
Correction value registration
56620 3/3
57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F]
Replenishment operation sequence [F] [LASER, iBeam]
Piping diagram
Reprenishment
cartridge
SE60
SE61 P1R P2RA P2RB

MV7 MV8
MV6 MV9
SE62
MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
Replenisher tank LSE7
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4
Processing tank
P1 P2 PS-1 PS-2 PS-3 PS-4
G085080
Symbol Name Symbol Name

SE60 Cartridge sensor MV4 P1R cartridge flushing valve
SE61 Cartridge position sensor (upper) MV5 P2RA cartridge flushing valve
SE62 Cartridge position sensor (lower) MV6 P2RB cartridge flushing valve
SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor MV7 P1R agitation solenoid valve
SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor MV8 P1 automated cleaning valve
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level MV9 P2 automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level MV10 PS automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level P17 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Sensor
SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP1 P1R Replenisher Pump
Sensor
LSE7 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor RP2 P2RA Replenisher Pump
LSE8 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP3 P2RB Replenisher Pump
Sensor
- - RP4 PSR Replenisher Pump
• This section explains the replenishment operation flow.
57010 1/8
57010
1. Mixing Replenisher is performed.
2. The system checks if PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is on.
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: ON
If PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off
• ☞ No. 00904[F] Replenish PSR.
3. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF.

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7
Replenisher tank P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE64): OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE66): OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE68): OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
4. The replenishment cartridge is set.

• Replenisher cartridge set sensor: on
When the replenishment cartridge is set
• Automatically goes to Step 5.
If the replenishment cartridge is not set
• ☞ No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge.
5. The system confirms if the replenisher section door is closed.

• Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
When the replenisher section door is closed
• Automatically goes to Step 7.
If the replenisher section door is not closed
• ☞ No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door.
57010 2/8
57010
6. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF.
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE64): OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE66): OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE68): OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank.
7. The replenishment cartridge is moved to lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) (SE61): DARK → LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 05900[F]−00001Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
8. The replenishment cartridge is stopped at lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) (SE62): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
9. The system waits until the replenishment solution falls.
57010 3/8
57010
10. The replenishment solution level sensor (lower) detects the replenishment solution.
SE60
SE61 MV7 MV8

Reprenishment
cartridge P1R P2RA P2RB MV9
MV6
SE62 MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
Replenisher tank PSR

P1R P2RA P2RB
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085082
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE64): OFF → ON
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE66): OFF → ON
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE68): OFF → ON
If any of replenishment solution level sensors (lower) does not turn ON
• ☞ No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
If no replenishment solution level sensors (lower) turn ON
• ☞ No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge.
11. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump (P17): OFF → ON
• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump keeps moving until Step 16 is complete.

• Cleans the cartridges starting from P1R→P2RA→P2RB.
They are not cleaned at the same time.
57010 4/8
57010
12. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.
SE60
SE61
MV7 MV8
P1R P2RA P2RB MV9

MV6
Reprenishment
cartridge SE62
MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

P1R P2RA P2RB
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

G085083
• P1R cartridge flushing valve (MV4): ON/OFF
13. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve (MV5): ON/OFF
• P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE65): OFF → ON
If P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn ON
• ☞ No. 05910[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
NOTE
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Standard Setting→Processor
Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher mode.
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Setting→Pump Output
Amount Setting→Mixing Replenisher mode.
14. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve (MV6): ON/OFF

• P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor(SE67): OFF → ON
If P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn ON
• ☞ No. 05911[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
NOTE
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Standard Setting→Processor
Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher mode.
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Setting→Pump Output
Amount Setting→Mixing Replenisher mode.
57010 5/8
57010
15. The system opens the P1R agitation solenoid valve, agitates P1R replenishment solution for a certain
period of time, and closes the valve.
SE60
SE61 MV7 MV8

Reprenishment P1R P2RA P2RB
MV6 MV9
cartridge
SE62 MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

P1R P2RA P2RB
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4
G085084
• P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor (SE63): OFF → ON
If P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn ON
• ☞ No. 05909[F]Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
16. Stop the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump (P17): ON → OFF
17. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (upper) replenishment solution level sensors detect all replenishment solution.
• If creating the replenishment solution with the replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment solution is not filled
up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn
on.
Therefore, no error message appears if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Upper) Replenishment
Solution Level Sensor does not turn ON on the condition that the replenishment solution is created in the Processor
Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher or Processor Setting→Pump Output Amount
Setting→Mixing Replenisher mode.
57010 6/8
57010
18. The replenish cartridge moves to the cap cleaning position (upper position).
SE61
P1R P2RA P2RB MV7 MV8
MV6 MV9
Reprenishment
SE62
cartridge MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
G085134
• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) (SE62): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) (SE61): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
19. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump (P17): ON
20. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.
21. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve (MV5): ON/OFF
22. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve (MV6): ON/OFF
23. Stop the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump (P17): OFF
24. The replenishment cartridge moves from the cap cleaning position (upper position) to the lower position to
discharge washing water.

• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) (SE61): DARK → LIGHT
57010 7/8
57010
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) (SE62): LIGHT → DARK

If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
25. The replenisher cartridge is moved from the lower position to the upper position.
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) (SE62): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) (SE61): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
26. End
57010 8/8
57020
Replenishment operation [F] [LASER, iBeam]
• Only for F specification, the error message may appear when the condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled.
Condition 1 Condition 2
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is 1. The processor control PCB is replaced.
3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB 2. A data is initialized.
replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
3. ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor occurs.
NOTE
• The error occurs if both condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled, because the number of replenishment pump revolution is stored in the
processor control PCB.
• When initializing a data or replacing the processor control PCB, the number of pump revolution stored in the processor control PCB is
initialized.
• The number of pump revolution is not backed up in Reading and Writing Data. Therefore, the error may occur only when both
condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled.
Countermeasure
1. Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank (P1R/P2RA/P2RB). ☞ 27550
2. Carry out Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
Example:
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is • When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is
3034.9 ml to 3756 ml or more, or the remaining amount of 3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB
P2RA/P2RB replenishment solution is 1168.9 ml to 1461 ml replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
or more.
• The mixing replenisher is correctly completed. Error
• ☞ No. 05905[F]−00002 P1R replenishment solution output
amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F]−00002 P2RA replenishment solution output
• ☞ No. 05907[F]−00002 P2RA replenishment solution output
Example 1: When the mixing replenisher is correctly completed. Example 2: If the mixing replenisher is not correctly completed
The replenisher tank when the condition 2 occurs. The replenisher tank when the condition 1 or 2 occurs.
P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm
18.7mm
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
22.4mm
SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
SE64 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68

SE66
3756ml 1461ml 1461ml 3000ml 1000ml 1000ml
P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm
18.7mm
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
22.4mm
SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
SE64 SE66 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68
The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out
57020 1/3
57020
SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor
57020 2/3
57020
57020 3/3
6000
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ........................................................................... 60100

Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) .......................................................................... 61000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................61000
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ................................................61050
Paper supply unit A/B (position of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................61200
Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2 (positions of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ..................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER] ..........................................61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [iBeam] .............................................61310
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ....................................61400
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER] ....................................................................61450
Position of PCBs (processor section) .................................................................................. 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................63200
Control strip auto loading unit (position of PCBs and electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] ................................63250
Communication unit (position of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................63260
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................. 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................63310
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] [LASER, iBeam] .......................63312
6 Electrical parts
Processor section (fan operation specification) ................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) [LASER, iBeam] ....................................................................63321
Positions of PCBs and electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ....... 63510
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [LASER,
iBeam] ...............................................................................................................................................................63510
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................63520
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 64101
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................64101
Capacity booster PCB (J391451) [LASER, iBeam] ..........................................................................................64102
Operation key PCB (J391400) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................................64110
Printer control PCB (J391434) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................64140
Laser control PCB (J391435) [LASER] ............................................................................................................64150
iBeam Control PCB (J391409) [iBeam] ............................................................................................................64151
Dual magazine PCB (J391184) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................64190
Triple magazine PCB (J391399) [LASER, iBeam] ...........................................................................................64200
G laser driver (J391231) [LASER] ....................................................................................................................64210
G-AOM driver (Z025645) [LASER] .................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J391182) [LASER, iBeam] .............................................................................................................64240
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section) ............................................................... 64250
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section) [LASER, iBeam] .................................................................64250
6000 1/2
6000
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) ............................................................................ 66200

Processor control PCB (J391437) [LASER, iBeam] .........................................................................................66200
Processor relay PCB (J391339) [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................66220
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................66400
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] [LASER, iBeam] ...................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391378) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ...............................................................................................66600
Control strip drive PCB (J391422) [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................66710
Control strip communication PCB (J391404) [LASER, iBeam] ......................................................................66720
Infrared communication unit [LASER, iBeam] ................................................................................................66730
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423) [LASER, iBeam] ..............................................................................66740
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions in handling the cables [LASER, iBeam] ........................................................................................68100
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [LASER, iBeam] .........................................68550
6 Electrical parts
6000 2/2
60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts [LASER, iBeam]
Reference
☞ Control PCB ☞ PCB (other parts) ☞ Power supply PCB ☞ Exposure engine
! Explanation
• The PCB and the parts No. used in the PCB installed on the system varies depending on the machine type.
• The corrective actions after replacing the PCBs may differ depending on system model though the parts No. of PCB is the same in
the list. Be sure to confirm the explanation of each PCB when replacing the parts.
NOTE
• % is used and − is unused.
• (J# # # # # #) in the list stands for that the part is no more available.
! Control PCB
Name Part No. Manual No. LASER iBeam Remarks
Printer control PCB J391434 ☞ 64140 % %
Laser control PCB J391435 ☞ 64150 % −
iBeam control PCB J391409 ☞ 64151 − %
Processor control PCB J391437 ☞ 66200 % % Equipped with the control
function of the colorimeter.
Printer I/F main PCB J391391 ☞ 64101 % %
Capacity booster PCB J391451 ☞ 64102 % % Necessary for the LP7200/3502
PLUS
! PCB (other parts)
6. Electrical parts
G-AOM driver Z025645 ☞ 64230 % −
G laser driver J391231 ☞ 64210 % −
Operation key PCB J391400 ☞ 64110 % % Option
Processor relay PCB J391339 ☞ 66220 % %
CVP PCB J391182 ☞ 64240 % % Option
Dual magazine PCB J391184 ☞ 64190 % %
Triple magazine PCB J391399 ☞ 64200 % %
Transistor PCB J490339 − % %
F replenishment I/O PCB J391322 ☞ 66400 % % Only for [F]
Temperature and humidity sensor I096003 ☞ 61050 % %
SM I/O PCB J391191 ☞ 66600 % % Only for [SM]
J391378
Tablet replenishment driver PCB J391351 ☞ 66500 % % Only for [J]
Control strip driver PCB J391422 ☞ 66710 % % Option
Control strip communication PCB J391404 ☞ 66720 % %
Infrared communication unit W413078 ☞ 66730 % %
W413080
Order specifying LED PCB 1 J490423 ☞ 66740 % %
60100 1/2
60100
! Power supply PCB

Printer power supply 1 I038404 ☞ 64250 % %
Printer power supply 2 I038405 % %
Printer power supply 3 I038406 % %
Printer power supply 4 I038403 − %
I038405 % %
Laser power supply I038408 % −
Processor power supply I038401 % %
Control power supply I038404 % %
! Exposure engine
Laser unit (Type hB) Z026241 ☞ 61450 % −
iBeam unit Z026626 − − %
6. Electrical parts
60100 2/2
61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.
iBeam LASER 9
12
7 13
10
11
6. Electrical parts
8 16
17
15 14
Printer door side
5 3 4 2
1
G085120
61000 1/2
61000
NOTE
! Printer section
No. Name Symbol Model Manual No. Remarks
LASER iBeam
1 Printer control PCB % % ☞ 64140
2 Printer power supply 1 PS3 % % ☞ 64250
3 Printer power supply 2 PS10 % %
6 Laser power supply PS16 % −
7 iBeam power supply PS16 − %
8 Control power supply PS20 % %
9 G-AOM driver % − ☞ 64230
10 Laser control PCB % − ☞ 64150
11 Printer I/F main PCB % % ☞ 64101
12 G laser driver % − ☞ 64210
13 iBeam control PCB − % ☞ 64151
14 CVP PCB % % ☞ 64240 Option
15 Dual magazine PCB % % ☞ 64190 Option
16 Capacity booster PCB % % ☞ 64102 Option
17 Triple magazine PCB % % ☞ 64200 Option
18 Operation key PCB % % ☞ 64110 Option
In the display module unit
6. Electrical parts
19 Display module
19
18
NOTE
• For details about the parts No. for each PCB, see ☞ 60100.
61000 2/2
61050
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER,

iBeam]
Position (front side)
Dual magazine
4
14
11
5 6
6
8
F3
F4
F5
F6
20
19
6. Electrical parts
18
17
9 10
13
14
2 3
16 3
↑Triple magazine
↑Dual magazine
7 1 12
G085121
61050 1/3
61050
NOTE
! Printer main body (front side)

No. Name Symbol Model Remarks
LASER iBeam
1 Printer control box cooling fan FAN24 % - Intake (The fan is always ON.)
2 Paper magazine code sensor B SE40 % % Dual magazine
3 Printer door 3 sensor LS10 % % Dual magazine/ Triple magazine
4 Inner cooling fan FAN23 % % Intake (The fan is always ON.)
5 Paper magazine code sensor A SE12 % %
6 Interlock switch (printer door 1) LS6 % %
7 Interlock switch (printer door 2) LS7 % %
8 Counter C % %
9 Interlock relay X37 % %
10 Inner thermosensor TH5 % %
11 Buzzer BZ1 % %
12 Temperature and humidity sensor SE69 % %
13 Paper magazine lamp A L1 % % Dual magazine/ Triple magazine
14 Paper Magazine lamp B L2 % %
14 Paper magazine lamp B/C L3 % % Triple magazine
15 Paper magazine code sensor B SE40 % % Triple magazine
16 paper magazine code sensor B2 SE4 % % Triple magazine
17 Fuse (5 A/ 200 V) F3 % % 200 V power supply protection
18 Fuse (5 A/ 200 V) F4 % % See the illustration.
6. Electrical parts
19 Fuse (5 A/ 200 V) F5 % %
20 Fuse (3.15 A/ 5 V) F6 % % 5 V power supply protection
See the illustration.
! Position (back side)
G083189
61050 2/3
61050
! Printer main body (back side)

No. Name Symbol Model Remarks
LASER iBeam
1 Laser control box cooling fan FAN17 % − Exhaust (The fan is always ON.)
2 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN15 % − • When the laser unit temperature
3 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN14 % − sensor exceeds 30°C, the laser
unit cooling fans 1 and 2 turn on.
• When the laser unit temperature
sensor is 27°C or lower, the laser
unit cooling fans 1 and 2 turn
off.
6. Electrical parts
61050 3/3
61200
Paper supply unit A/B (position of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the paper supply unit of the optional dual magazine specification. For the optional triple magazine specification, see
the reference below.
☞ Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2 (positions of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
Paper supply unit A
17
16
Paper supply unit B 8
12 14
7
2 9
6. Electrical parts
5
6
11
13 10 15
G083185
Paper supply unit A/B

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper end sensor A SE13
2 Paper loading sensor SE14
3 Cut home sensor SE15
4 Cut end sensor SE16
5 Paper hold sensor SE17
61200 1/3
61200

6 Paper end sensor B SE41 Option (dual magazine)
7 Paper advance motor 1 PM20 When one of the interlock switches (printer
8 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM22 doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not
operate.
9 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM23
10 Paper advance motor 2 PM21 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not
operate.
11 Paper supply motor A PM42 Option (dual magazine)
12 Paper Supply Motor B PM43 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2, and printer door 3 sensor) is
off, this motor does not operate.
13 Cut motor M5 When one of the interlock switches (printer
14 Paper hold motor M7 doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not
operate.
15 Ribbon advance motor M6
16 Roller move motor (only for iBeam) PM44
17 Roller position sensor (only for iBeam) SE43
6. Electrical parts
61200 2/3
61200
Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2 (positions of electrical parts)

[LASER, iBeam]
This section explains the optional triple magazine specification. For the paper supply unit of the optional dual magazine specification, see
the reference below.
☞ Paper supply unit A/B (position of electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
Connecting unit
6. Electrical parts
2
G085122
Connecting unit, paper supply unit B2

1 Paper end sensor B SE41
2 Paper end sensor B2 SE5
3 Paper supply motor A PM42 When one of the interlock switches (printer
4 Guide roller motor PM15 doors 1 and 2, and printer door 3 sensor) is
off, this motor does not operate.
5 Paper supply motor B2 PM17
6 Paper Supply Motor B PM43
61200 3/3
61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

[LASER]
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differs between LASER and iBeam.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [iBeam]
! Layout diagram
4 7 10
6. Electrical parts
2 9 3 8
6
5
G083183

*1
1 Zigzag correction sensor (left) SE19
2 Zigzag correction sensor (right) SE20
3 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE21
4 Exposure start sensor SE22
6 Exposure end sensor SE24
7 Exposure advance motor 1 PM24 When one of the interlock switches (printer
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM25 doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not
operate. *1
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM27
operate. *1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810
61300 1/1
61310
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

[iBeam]
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differs between LASER and iBeam.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER]
! Layout diagram
1 4
6. Electrical parts
8 2
7 10 9
G084444

*1
1 Zigzag correction sensor (left) SE19
2 Zigzag correction sensor (right) SE20
4 Exposure start sensor SE22
6 Exposure end sensor SE24
61310 1/2
61310

8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM25 doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not
operate. *1
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM27
operate. *1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810
6. Electrical parts
61310 2/2
61400
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

[LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS LP7200/3502 PLUS
9
3
3
7
4
6 6
5 5 1
8
6. Electrical parts
2
2
G084447

1 Lane select sensor SE26 (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
2 Paper advance pressure change sensor SE25
3 Arm sensor SE27
4 Turn sensor SE28
5 Turn motor*1 PM32
6 Paper advance arm motor*1 PM31
7 Paper advance motor 3*1 PM28
8 Paper advance pressure change motor*1 PM29
9 Lane select motor *1 PM30 (LP7200/3502 PLUS)
*1. When one of the interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2) is off, this motor does not operate.
61400 1/1
61450
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [LASER]
! Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are the following types of laser units. There is no difference in functions and quality.
Laser unit (Type # # #) Laser unit (# #) #-Laser driver #-AOM driver

Type HhB (Z026452) hB Z026241 G J391231 G Z025645
Label: first five digits No.
03800
Serial No.: the first three
digits B41
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, see ☞ 26710.
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display. ☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.
G laser driver
Serial No.: the first three digits
B41
Laser unit
G-AOM driver
6. Electrical parts
03800 Label: first five digits
G085123
! Layout diagram
Laser unit
1 Back view of laser unit
G084482
61450 1/2
61450
Laser unit
1 Laser unit heater H5 • When the laser unit temperature sensor is 19°C or lower, the laser
unit heater turns on.
• When the laser unit temperature sensor exceeds 20°C, the laser unit
heater turns off.
6. Electrical parts
61450 2/2
63200
Position of PCBs (processor section)
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam]

Some PCBs are additionally installed depending on the system specification. See below for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] ☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
[N], [SM] and [J]
8
2
6. Electrical parts
F specification
4 1
G083182
Processor section
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
2 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
3 Processor power supply PS1 ☞ 64250
4 Transistor PCB Cooling water solenoid valve
(option)
5 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66400 only for F
NOTE
63200 1/2
63200
! Processor section (positions of PCBs) [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
1
G070039
SM replenishment unit
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
! Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
6. Electrical parts
1
G083231
Tablet replenishment unit

1 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
63200 2/2
63250
Control strip auto loading unit (position of PCBs and electrical parts)
[LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
1 2 3
G085189
(Position of PCBs)
6. Electrical parts
No. Name Manual No. Remarks
1 Control strip driver PCB ☞ 66710
2 Infrared communication unit ☞ 66730
(Position of electrical parts)

3 Control strip feed motor M1
4 Control strip holder detection switch LM1
5 Status lamp LED1
! (Checking of the status lamp)

When the auto loading unit is inserted, the green and red lights, as show in the figure, turn on from off.
When inserted in ten seconds after
Green: lighting Green: lighting Green: not

Red: Lighting Red: not lighting lighting
Red: not lighting
G088042
If the light blinked

If an error occurs, the light blinks for about 60 seconds.
• If the red light blinked
63250 1/2
63250
Not communicating normally.

Start over the process following the procedure below.
1. Confirm that nothing is placed between the auto loading holder unit and the communication unit.
2. Remove the auto loading holder unit from the processor.
3. After five seconds or later, attach the auto loading holder unit to the processor again.
Communication starts again.
• If the green light blinked
Remaining battery level is low.
Though you can continue the process, replace batteries (four AA batteries) as soon as possible.
G087963
NOTE
• When automatic control strip processing starts, the red light turns on.
6. Electrical parts
63250 2/2
63260
Communication unit (position of PCBs) [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
Front side
Backside
Communication unit
G085191
(Position of PCBs)
6. Electrical parts
1 Control strip communication PCB ☞ 66720
2 Infrared communication unit ☞ 66730
63260 1/1
63280
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] [LASER, iBeam]

This section is only for [F].
For the [N], [SM] and [J], see the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam] parts) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] parts) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
14 13
From 15 to 20
22
23 to 26 21
27
28
6. Electrical parts
From 1 to 12
G085855
Processor section (front face)

1 P1 processing solution float switch FS1
P1 processable level
P1 processing solution level
P1 safety thermostat
2 P2 processing solution float switch FS2
P2 processable level
P2 processing solution level
P2 safety thermostat
3 PS1 processing solution float switch FS3
PS1 processable level
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
63280 1/4
63280

10 P1 Heater H1
11 P2 Heater H2
12 PS Heater H3
13 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS2
14 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *1
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
23 P1R Replenisher Pump RP1 *2
24 P2RA Replenisher Pump RP2

25 P2RB Replenisher Pump RP3
26 PSR Replenisher Pump RP4
27 Minute Meter CO Option
28 Processor control box cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust*1
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. After replacing each electrical part, see Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
6. Electrical parts
63280 2/4
63280
! Layout diagram
2 1
14 12
3
33 27
7
10
34
11
4
5 35
28
6 29
30
8
11
25 24 23 22
17 16 15
6. Electrical parts
26
31
32
18 19 20 21
G085089
Processor section (back face)

1 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
2 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 Exhaust*1
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
4 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB1
7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) LS8
8 Terminal strip 2 TA2
12 CD effluent float switch FS7
13 − −
14 STB effluent float switch FS9
63280 3/4
63280

*3
15 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV1
16 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV2
17 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV3
18 P1R cartridge flushing valve MV4
19 P2RA cartridge flushing valve MV5
20 P2RB cartridge flushing valve MV6
21 P1R agitation solenoid valve MV7
22 P1 automated cleaning valve MV8
23 P2 automated cleaning valve MV9
24 PS automated cleaning valve MV10
25 Automated cleaning valve - Unused
*3
26 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump P17
*3
27 Replenishment cartridge opening motor DM5
*2*3
28 P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE63
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE64
29 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE65
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE66
30 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE67
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE68
31 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE7
32 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE8
*3
33 Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor SE60
34 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) SE61
35 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
6. Electrical parts
*2. The # # # replenishment solution level sensors are different depending on the model to which they are attached. For details, see the illustration
below.
For the replacement of the replenishment solution level sensor, see ☞ 27530.
Type 1
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level

# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
Type 2
G085363
*3. After replacing each electrical part, see Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
63280 4/4
63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER,

iBeam]

This section describes only the common sections among [N], [SM] and [J]. For sections differ on each specification, refer to the section
below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [F] [LASER, iBeam] parts) [SM] [LASER, iBeam] parts) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
The appearance of the system varies depending on the Process Specification.
13
14
From 1 to 12
From 15 to 20
6. Electrical parts
21
22
From 23 to 25 From 29 to 35 36 From 26 to 28

G083192

1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level *3
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
*3
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
*3
STB1 refilling water level
4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4 Except for J
STB2 refilling water level *3 Except for J
63290 1/4
63290

5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5 Except for J
STB3 refilling water level *3 Except for J
6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level *3
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 CD heater H1
11 BF heater H2
12 STB heater H3
13 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS2
14 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *2
The installation position differs for J.

22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
6. Electrical parts
The installation position differs for J.
23 CD replenisher pump RP1 Except for [J] *1
24 BF replenisher pump RP2 Except for [SM] or the mounting
position differs.
25 STB replenisher pump RP3
☞ 63300Reference*1
26 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
27 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
28 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
*3
29 CD-W refilling water pump P9
30 BF-W refilling water pump *3 P10
31 STB1-W refilling water pump *3 P11
*3
33 STB3-W refilling water pump P13
*3
35 Cleaning pump 1 P15
36 Refilling water tank level sensor *3 LSE4
*1. It is different from [N] for other processor specifications.
*3. Optional for iBeam
63290 2/4
63290
! Layout diagram
1
2 3
15 14 13
4
5
6
7
10
9
11
12
6. Electrical parts
16 17 18
G085090
NOTE
• Processor sections (back side) are all same for [N], [SM] and [J].
Processor section (back face)
1 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
7 Minute Meter CO Option
10 Processor control box cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust*1
13 CD effluent float switch FS7
14 BF effluent float switch FS8
15 STB effluent float switch FS9
16 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3
17 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2
63290 3/4
63290

18 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1
6. Electrical parts
63290 4/4
63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] [LASER, iBeam]

This section only gives descriptions specific to [SM] specification. For the common section with [N], see the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Positions of electrical parts (SM replenishment unit)

25 2 26 3 21 13 22 23
29
24 6
4 28
27
19
6. Electrical parts
12
18
10
17
20
9 16
14
15 11
8 7
G070041
SM replenishment unit
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
63300 1/2
63300

11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
16 Replenishment package sensor P-2 LS7
20 Cleaning pump 1 P15
21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
29 STB replenisher pump RP10
6. Electrical parts
63300 2/2
63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] [LASER, iBeam]

This section only gives descriptions specific to [J] specification. For the common section with [N], see the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] [LASER, iBeam]
! Position (front side)
From 1 to 3
5 6
6. Electrical parts
4
G085887

1 CD water supply pump RP1
2 BF water supply pump RP2
3 STB water supply pump RP3
4 Cleaning pump 1 P15 Option
5 SW/DW Tank Level Sensor LSE3
6 SW Tank Level Sensor LSE4
7 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4
63310 1/2
63310
! Position (Tablet replenishment unit section)
11 10
7 8 9
18
19 3 20
1
5
2
6
6. Electrical parts
14 17
15 4 12 16
G085848
Tablet replenishment unit section

1 CD Tablet Sensor 1 SE48
2 CD Tablet Sensor 2 SE49
3 BF Tablet Sensor 1 SE50
4 BF Tablet Sensor 2 SE51
5 STB Tablet Sensor 1 SE52
6 STB Tablet Sensor 2 SE53
7 CD Cartridge Sensor SE54
8 BF Cartridge Sensor SE55
9 STB Cartridge Sensor SE56
10 Upper sensor for elevator SE57
11 Middle sensor for elevator SE58
12 Lower sensor for elevator SE59
13 CD Drum motor M4
14 BF Drum motor M5
15 STB Drum motor M6
16 Elevator motor M7
17 CD Operation Lamp L5
18 BF Operation Lamp L6
19 STB Operation Lamp L7
63310 2/2
63312
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F]

[LASER, iBeam]
Item Adjustment option after replacement Reference

P1R Replenisher Pump Replacing • Perform Pump Output Amount Measurement. ☞ 33003
PSR Replenisher Pump
P1R cartridge flushing valve*1 Replacing • Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output ☞ 33004
P2RA cartridge flushing valve*1 Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P2RB cartridge flushing valve*1
P1R agitation solenoid valve*1 • If necessary, perform Output Check for the ☞ 27540
P1 automated cleaning valve*2 cartridge flushing valve and replenishment
cartridge cleaning pump.
P2 automated cleaning valve*2
PS automated cleaning valve*2
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump Replacing • Perform Initial Replenishment Operation of Auto ☞ 33004
Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.
• Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Replacing • Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 27530
Sensor*3 • If necessary, perform Recovery procedure from the ☞ 4610
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level replenishment error 1 or Recovery procedure ☞ 4620
Sensor*3 from the replenishment error 2.
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
6. Electrical parts
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
Replenishment cartridge opening motor Replacing • If necessary, perform Replenishment cartridge ☞ 4600
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor installation section troubleshooting flow.
(Upper)
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower)
*1. P1R, P2RA, P2RB and P1R cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*2. P1, P2 and P3 cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*3. # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor and # # #(lower) replenishment solution level sensor are to be replaced as a set.
63312 1/1
63321
Processor section (fan operation specification)
Processor section (fan operation specification)
Processor section (fan operation specification) [LASER, iBeam]
! Operation specification of the fan

Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 If the P1 or P2 processing solution temperature is higher than the setting temperature
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 for 30 seconds, the fan turns on. If the P1 or P2 processing solution temperature is
lower than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan turns off.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN6
Tank cooling fan 4 FAN7
Processor control box FAN29 The fan is always on.
cooling fan
Exhaust fan FAN3 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always on.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is off.
Dryer fan FAN2 While printing (heater is operated): Fan is on
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are off while the program timer activates.
6. Electrical parts
63321 1/1
63510
Positions of PCBs and electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions

of PCBs and electrical parts) [LASER, iBeam]
! Layout diagram
13
14
12 15
10 16
11
6 7 1 2
8 3
6. Electrical parts
5
G085088
NOTE
• Dryer section and order classification section are all the same for [F], [N], [SM] and [J].
For positions of interlock switch (dryer cover), see ☞ 63290.
Dryer section, order classification section (electrical parts)
1 Processor condition lamp
2 Sorter Motor DM4
3 Sorter Home Sensor SE31
63510 1/2
63510

4 Manual Sorter Switch (Manual replenishment switch) SW1
5 Print Full Sensor SE32
6 Print Sensor (Left) (LP7200/3502 PLUS) SE30
Printer Sensor (LP7000, LP7100/3501i PLUS, 3501 PLUS) SE29
7 Print Sensor (Right) (LP7200/3502 PLUS) SE29
8 Dryer Lane Select Motor PM53
9 Lane Select Home Sensor SE46
10 Dryer thermosensor TH4
11 Dryer Safety Thermostat STH1
12 Dryer heater H4
13 Dryer fan FAN2 For details about fan operation
specification, see ☞ 63321.
Order classification section (PCBs)

14 Order specifying LED PCB 1 ☞ 66740
15 Order specifying LED PCB 2 ☞ 66750 Print sorter unit (12 orders)
16 Order specifying LED PCB 3 ☞ 66760 Print sorter unit (10 orders)
6. Electrical parts
63510 2/2
63520
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [LASER,

iBeam]
! Layout diagram
5
6
6. Electrical parts
5
2
G085059
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (electrical parts)

1 Conveyor motor PM51
2 Colorimeter cooling fan FAN8
3 Colorimeter - Colorimeter unit
*1
4 Paper sensor 1 SE75
5 Paper sensor 2 *1 SE76
*1
6 Paper advance motor PM52
7 Pressure change solenoid *1 SOL1
8 Calibration plate advance motor*1 PM54
*1. To check these electrical parts, the colorimeter unit needs to be removed.
☞ 27100
63520 1/1
64101
Description of PCB (printer section)
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391) [LASER, iBeam]
P1204 P1205
P1202 P1203
TP30 TP29
P1206
TP25
TP22 TP21
P455
TP31 TP24
TP18
TP6 TP1 P1207
TP7 TP2 TP9 TP10
TP4 TP8 TP11 JP1 P1208
TP5 TP13 TP14
TP12 TP15 TP17
LED3 LED5
TP16
TP20 LED4 LED6
TP3 TP19
LED2 + TP23 TP26

P1200 TP28
LED1
TP27 P1212
P1214 P1213 P1211 P1210
G084988
! Function
• LAN interface
• Enlarges received RAW images.
• Transfers images to the Exposure Engine Section.
• Controls LCD displays and optional keyboard unit.
• ARCNET communication
6. Electrical parts
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• The default setting of the printer I/F main PCB is IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224.
• Write down the IP address, Subnet mask, shipping date and serial number of the system before replacing the PCB. ☞ 35800
• Back up the system data before replacing the PCB. ☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• For precautions when handling optical fiber cables and LVPECL cables, see ☞ 68100.
! 3. Adjustment after replacement

Procedure
If the display module is installed 1. If several printers are connected, temporarily set the environment so that the PC can connect to the
printer I/F main PCB one on one.
2. Configure the IP Address and Subnet mask setting in the Machine Specification on display
module.
NOTE
• It is not necessary to configure the setting when IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask
: 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 are not changed.
3. Perform the procedure Step 5 of ☞ 37610 in the service manual .
If the display module is not ☞ 37610
installed
64101 1/2
64101
! Unused connector
• Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1204, P1205, Unused
P1210, P1212
P1202, P1203
P1210 Capacity booster Only for LP7200/QSS-3502 PLUS
P1213, P1214 Keyboard PCB Option
! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 For checking the • OFF: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB does not communicate.
(Red LED) connection • ON: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB normally communicates.
LED2 For checking data transfer • OFF: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB does not communicate.
(Red LED) • Blinking: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB normally communicates.
• Quickly blinking: The data is being transferred from the PC to the printer
I/F main PCB.
LED3 Unused
LED4 Unused
LED5 Unused
LED6 Unused
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP27 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
NOTE
• There are other types of TP for the printer I/F main PCB than described above, but they are not used for service.
Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
64101 2/2
64102
Capacity booster PCB (J391451) [LASER, iBeam]
J39145#
TP1 LED5
J861 CN1
J860
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
Booster
G084989
! Function
• The processing capacity of the system can be changed by installing capacity booster PCB and Capacity Booster Software.
NOTE
• The Capacity Booster Software and capacity booster PCB cannot be ordered separately.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None
6. Electrical parts
• Install Capacity Booster Software.
• After installing the Capacity Booster Software, click OK on the Machine Specification display.
! Unused connector
• None
Connector No. Purpose Remarks

CN1 Unused
P861 Unused

LED1 For checking the detection status of the capacity On when the power supply is turned on.*1
LED2 booster OFF*1
LED3 OFF*1
LED4 OFF*1
LED5 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
*1. When the capacity booster PCB is normally detected

TP1 Ground Possible Not mounted
64102 1/1
64110
Operation key PCB (J391400) [LASER, iBeam]
SW8
SW2
SW5
P850 SW6 P851

SW3
SW4
SW1 SW7
G085073
! Function
• Operation keyboard of the display module unit
• Relays the signal to the display module from the printer I/F main PCB
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
64110 1/1
64140
Printer control PCB (J391434) [LASER, iBeam]
LED1
P208 P229 P209 P206 P211 P212 P222 TP7
TP1
P207
P226
TP12
P210
LED4
TP4 TP9
P225
TP16
P202
F37
LED3 TP3
F36
TP15 P213
P224 F33 TP5
F34 TP6 TP8 P214

TP2
P223 TP17
LED2 F35
TP14 P200
P221
F32
P220
TP13
P203 P233
P219 P218 P215
P217 P216 P205 P232
P201 P204 P234
6. Electrical parts
P228 TP11
TP10
G084982
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the paper advance unit, exposure advance unit, and paper supply unit A.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB (for LASER models).
• Communicates with the iBeam Control PCB (for iBeam models).
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Turns the power supply on/off with the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Controls the buzzer and counter.
• Supplies power to the counter, printer power supply cooling fan, inner cooling fan and the printer control box cooling fan.
• Supplies power (5 V, 24 V, 36 V) to the dual magazine PCB and triple magazine PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Back up the system data.

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
64140 1/2
64140
• Perform paper sensor adjustment.

☞ 36000
! 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
☞ 4200
! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
P200 • Controls the dual magazine unit.
• Controls the triple magazine unit.
P202 LASER: Not in use iBeam: Used (Roller Position Sensor)
P204 Paper magazine code sensor B
P215 Unused
P228 Unused
P229 LASER: Not in use iBeam: Used (Roller Move Motor)
P234 Unused

6. Electrical parts
LED3 IL24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 IL36 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP2 DC+24 V voltage measurement
TP3 IL24 V voltage measurement
TP4 IL36 V voltage measurement
TP5 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement
TP6 DC+1.5 V voltage measurement
TP7 to TP13 Ground Possible Not mounted except TP11.
TP14 to TP17 Unused Impossible Not mounted
NOTE
• There are other types of TP for the printer control PCB than described above, but they are not used for service.
Fuse No. Rating Purpose

F32 T2.0 A/125 V DC24 V power supply protection
F33 T3.15A/125 V IL24 V − 1 power supply protection
F36 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−1 power supply protection
F37 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−2 power supply protection
64140 2/2
64150
Laser control PCB (J391435) [LASER]
TP7
TP6 P1515
P1508
P1513
P1517 P1516 P1501 P1502 P1503
LED2
P1527 LED7 P1551
P1528 TP17
P1523 TP2 F1
TP22 TP23 F2
CN1 P1541
P1524 TP16
TP3 F3
P1545 LED3
P1546
P1533
P1547
P1535
P1548
P1534
TP12
P1521 TP9
LED4
TP10 TP11 TP8

CN5 CN6 P1543
P1520
TP 15 TP13
TP21
TP20
TP19 P1505
P1519
CN7
TP 4 TP 1 TP18
TP5 P1509 P1510 LED1 P1506 P1532 P1522 P1504
6. Electrical parts
G084984
! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives image data from the printer I/F main PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Controls the interlock of the G-AOM driver.
• Controls laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 and laser control box cooling fans 1 and 2.
• Relays the control signal of the polygon mirror driver, R laser and B laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
IMPORTANT

☞ 35600
64150 1/4
64150

☞ 4200
☞ 4252
! Unused connector
CN1, CN5, CN6*1, and CN7*1 Unused Not installed depending on the
PCB.
P1510, P1521, P1533, P1535 Unused
*1. Not installed depending on the PCB.

LED1 Input check of DC+5 V from the laser power supply On when the power supply is
turned on.
LED2 Input check of DC+24 V -1 from printer power supply 4 On when the power supply is
turned on.
turned on.
LED4*1 Unused
turned on.
6. Electrical parts
*1. Not installed depending on the PCB.
• Although test pins except T5 and T7 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
TP Purpose When the normal value (# V) is not detected Symptom

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
• Power supply for digital circuits such printer power supply 5 and laser control communication error.
as ARCNET, FPGA, memory, and PCB. occurs.
CPU • Failure in the printer power supply 5 and
laser control PCB.
• It shorted out between the laser control PCB
and the laser. (J/P1509, J/P1515, J/P1519)
TP2 DC+24 V−1 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser power supply, failure in The polygon mirror does not
• Power supply for the polygon mirror the cable connection between the laser power operate.
driver supply and laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser power supply and laser
control PCB.
and the laser. (J/P1515)
TP3 DC+24 V−2 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser power supply and laser • The temperature of the B
• Power supply for the B laser heater control PCB. laser heater and R laser
and R laser heater • Failure in the laser power supply, failure in heater cannot be adjusted.
• Power supply for the laser unit the cable connection between the laser power • The laser does not emit
supply and laser control PCB light.
and the AOM driver. (J/P1543)
TP4 Ground − −
64150 2/4
64150
TP Purpose When the normal value (# V) is not detected Symptom

TP5 Ground − −
TP6 Ground − −
TP7 Ground − −
TP8 Ground − −
TP9 DC+24 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for the laser unit laser control PCB and the F-AOM driver
• Failure in the interlock switch (printer top
cover)
TP10 DC-12 V voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Power supply for the laser unit
TP11 DC+-12 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for the laser unit laser control PCB and the F-AOM driver
• Failure in the interlock switch (printer top
cover)
TP12 DC+12 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Power supply for the laser unit
TP13 DC A5 V voltage measurement • The temperature of the laser
• Power supply for analog circuits unit heater, B laser heater,
(temperature adjustment) and R laser heater cannot be
adjusted.
TP14 DC A3.3 V voltage measurement
• Power supply for analog circuits
(temperature adjustment)
TP15 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
6. Electrical parts
• Power supply for digital circuits such communication error.
as FPGA, memory and CPU occurs.
TP16 DC+1.2 V voltage measurement The laser control PCB does not
• FPGA power supply operate.
TP17 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement Cannot receive image data from
• LVPECL power supply the printer I/F main PCB.
TP18 DC LD9 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The B laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for B laser laser control PCB and laser unit PCB
TP19 DC LD5 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB The R laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for R laser • It shorted out between the laser control PCB
TP20 DC LAS5 V-IL voltage measurement The B and R lasers do not emit
• Control power for B and R lasers light.
TP21 DC LAS-5 V-IL voltage measurement
• Control power for B and R lasers
TP22 DC A5 V2 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for image analog
circuits
TP23 DC+24 V−3 voltage measurement • Failure in printer power supply 4 • The temperature of the laser
• Power supply for laser unit cooling • Failure in the cable connection between the unit heater cannot be
fans 1 and 2 and paper advance laser control PCB and printer power supply 4 adjusted.
section cooling fan 2 • It shorted out between the laser control PCB • Laser unit cooling fans 1
• Power supply for the laser unit heater and the laser. (J/P1551) and 2 and laser control box
cooling fan 2 do not
operate.

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V-1 power supply protection
64150 3/4
64150

6. Electrical parts
64150 4/4
64151
iBeam Control PCB (J391409) [iBeam]
P1101 P1541 TP12

P1102
TP11 TP14 TP15

P1506
LED3
TP10
TP7
LED4
TP13
CN3
P181
TP4
TP5
TP3
P1522
TP6
P1513 TP1 TP2
TP8 TP9
P1516
P1517
P1527
P1528
P1523
P1524
P1545
P1546
P1547
P1548
P1520 P1509 P1510
G084986
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls the iBeam unit.
• Receives image data from the printer I/F main PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• ARCNET communication
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
IMPORTANT

☞ 35600
☞ 4200
64151 1/2
64151
! Unused connector
P1509, P1510, P181, Unused
CN3

LED3 For checking the input DC+5 V from the iBeam On when the power supply is turned on.
power supply.
LED4 For checking the input converted from DC+24 V Loghts when power + 24 V is supplied from
to DC+12 V with iBeam control PCB. printer power supply 4.
• Though test pins except TP9 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
• TP1 and TP2 cannot be measured with a voltmeter.
Test point No. Purpose Remarks

TP1, TP2 Unused
TP3 Ground (analog)
TP4 DC+5 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam power supply For confirming the
(analog) if the normal value (+5 V) is not detected. standard voltage of the
inner temperature
adjustment sensor.
TP5 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement FPGA, memory, CPU power supply For ARCNET
communication
TP6 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam control PCB Cannot receive image data
if the normal value (+2.5 V) is not detected. from the printer I/F main
6. Electrical parts
LVPECL power supply PCB.
TP7 DC+1.5 V voltage measurement FPGA power supply For ARCNET
communication
TP8 to TP10 Ground
TP11 Measures DC+5 V−3 V from the When the normal value (+5 V) is not For ARCNET
iBeam power supply. detected: communication
• Failure in the cable connection
between the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB.
• Failure of the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB
TP12 Unused
TP13 DC+12 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam control PCB The iBeam unit does not
if the normal value (+12 V) is not detected. operate.
For confirming the
standard voltage of the
inner temperature
adjustment sensor.
TP14, TP15 Ground
64151 2/2
64190
Dual magazine PCB (J391184) [LASER, iBeam]
P277
P279
P278 P281 P282

P280
G083177
! Function
• Drive function of the paper supply motor B
• Relays the sensor output signal of paper end sensor 3 and the printer door 3 sensor.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None

• None

Model Reference
LASER, iBeam ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 Ground Possible
64190 1/1
64200
Triple magazine PCB (J391399) [LASER, iBeam]
P825
TP4
P826 P827
F22 F21
TP5
TP3 TP2 TP1
P278
P833
P347 P832 P831 P830 P829 P828
G085040
! Function
• Drives paper supply motors A, B and B2.
• Relays the sensor output signal of paper end sensor 3 and the printer door 3 sensor.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None

• Perform the paper sensor standard adjustment.

Model Reference
LASER, iBeam ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
P828 Unused

TP1 DC+36 V-1 power supply check Possible
TP2 DC+36 V-2 power supply check Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply check Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
64200 1/2
64200

TP5 Ground Possible
• Though the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

F21 T5.0 A/ 125 V DC+36 V power supply protection
F22 T5.0 A/ 125 V DC+36 V power supply protection
6. Electrical parts
64200 2/2
64210
G laser driver (J391231) [LASER]
Unused
G085145
! Function
• Controls the G laser
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
G laser driver P1666 Unused

• None
64210 1/1
64230
G-AOM driver (Z025645) [LASER]
J1639
J1636
J1638
J1637
G085042
! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None
6. Electrical parts
• Perform the daily setup for each paper type.
• If the daily setup is completed normally, the work has finished.
• If the daily setup is not completed normally, perform the initial setup.

Model Reference
LASER ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
• None

• None
64230 1/1
64240
CVP PCB (J391182) [LASER, iBeam]
Not mounted depending on conditions
G066110
! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 61000
• None

• None

☞ 4200
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible
64240 1/2
64240
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F25 T3.15A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is off.
protection
6. Electrical parts
64240 2/2
64250
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section)
Power supply (Printer section/Processor section) [LASER, iBeam]
Common for LASER and iBeam (Printer)
TB2(P310)
TB1(P313) CON1(P317) CON1(P318)
PS20
PS3 PS10 PS12
TB1(P328) CON2(P326) CON3(P327) CON2(P324) CON3(P325)

TB1(P319)
LASER, iBeam (Processor)

LASER (Printer) iBeam (Printer)
TB1(P306) CON1(P314) TB1(P309) CP1(P314)

CN1(P793)
PS16 PS17 PS16 PS17 PS1
VR
6. Electrical parts
VR
TB2(P412) CON2(P315) CON3(P316) TB2(P412) CP2(P1614)

CN2(P794)
G083176
! Function
Compatible Symbo Name Part No. Function
model l
LASER PS3 Printer power supply 1 I038404 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+5 V
iBeam PS10 Printer power supply 2 I038405 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+24 V
PS12 Printer power supply 3 I038406 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and DC+36 V
the CVP PCB.
LASER PS17 Printer power supply 4 I038405 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and DC+24 V
laser control PCB.
iBeam I038403 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and
iBeam control PCB.
LASER PS16 Laser power supply I038408 Supplies power to the laser control PCB and G DC+5 V
laser driver
iBeam PS16 iBeam power supply I038404 Supplies the power to the iBeam control PCB DC+5 V
and the printhead module.
LASER PS1 Processor power supply I038401 Supplies power to the processor control PCB. DC+5 V
iBeam DC+24 V
LASER PS20 Control power supply I038404 Supplies power to the printer I/F main PCB and DC+5 V
iBeam optional MD-2.
64250 1/2
64250
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
☞ 63200
Do not touch each potentiometer of power supply PCB which has been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

• None

Model Reference
LASER ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
Only CN4 unused which is for Laser power supply 2 (PS16).
6. Electrical parts
Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Power supply PCB F1 AC 200 V power supply −
protection
64250 2/2
66200
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)
Processor control PCB (J391437) [LASER, iBeam]
LED5
TP12
P704 P702 P700 P699 P698 P697 P692 P691 P690 TP5
P707 LED10
P706 P669 LED13 P694 P689
P703
P705
F17
P670
TP11
TP3 P693 F15
P708
TP4 TP9
TP14 F16
LED12
LED17 F18
P671 P688
P673 P696 TP8

TP10 TP13 F14
JP1 LED9
P672
LED4 LED15 LED2

LED14 P687
LED3 LED1
LED16
TP2
P674 TP1 LED6
LED11 P686
P675 TP7
LED8 LED7
TP6
P667 P676 P679

P677 P684 P685
P681
P680 P682 P683 G084985
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
• Controls the colorimeter unit.
• Communicates between the colorimeter and processor control PCB
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• Backup the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the jumper connector.
• Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F] , or ☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in specific
condition.
IMPORTANT
•

☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
66200 1/4
66200

• ☞ 4203
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
P668 Order recognition LED PCB Option
P672 [F]: connecting to F replenishment driver PCB
[N]: unused
[SM]: connecting to SM I/O PCB
[J]: connecting to tablet replenishment driver PCB
P673 Digital flowmeter Option
P678 Unused
P679 [J]: connecting to SW/DW tank level sensor and SW tank level sensor
P684 LASER [F]: unused
[N]: cleaning pump and refilling water pump
[SM]: unused
[J]: cleaning pump and refilling water pump
iBeam [F]: unused Option
[N]: cleaning pump and refilling water pump
[SM]: unused
[J]: cleaning pump and refilling water pump
P685 [F]: connecting to F replenishment driver PCB
[N]: unused
[SM]: connecting to SM I/O PCB
6. Electrical parts
[J]: unused
P686 [F]: unused
[N]]: replenisher pump
[SM]: unused
[J]: replenisher pump
P689 For chilling unit Option
P690 Unused
P691 Print sorter unit Option
P693 Print sorter unit Option
P695 Unused
P697
P698 For cooling water unit Option
P699 Hour meter Option
P700 Unused
P707 [F]: connecting to the temperature and humidity sensor
[N][SM][J]: The connector is connected but is not used.
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED1 Refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown in the
LED2 operation check table.*1
LASER: (Standard) [F]: unused
LED3
iBeam: (Option) [SM]: unused
LED4 CD circulation amount check ([SM] only) ON when CD circulation amount has decreased.
66200 2/4
66200

LED5 Relay X2 operation check (program timer) ON during operation, OFF during the program
timer activation
LED6 SSR3 operation check (CD replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED7 SSR2 operation check (BF replenisher pump) [F]: unused
[SM]: unused
LED8 SSR1 operation check (STB replenisher pump)
LED9 Relay X1 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED12 DC+12-1 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED13 Unused
LED14 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED15 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED16 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED17 DC+12-2 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED1, 2 and 3.)
[J]: Cleaning pump only
CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
LED3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
Cleaning
pump
6. Electrical parts
LED1 ON
LED2 OFF
LED3 OFF

TP1, P2 Unused Possible Not mounted
TP3 For A2.5 V voltage
measurement
TP4 DC+12-2 V voltage
measurement
TP7, TP8 Ground
TP9 DC+12-1 V voltage
measurement
TP10 Ground Mounted
TP11, TP12 Ground Not mounted
TP13 +3.3 V voltage measurement
TP14 A5 V voltage measurement
Jumper No. Settings Remarks

JP1 Open Be sure to set to open.
66200 3/4
66200

F14 T3.15A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection
F15 DC+24 V-2 power voltage
protection
protection
protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
66200 4/4
66220
Processor relay PCB (J391339) [LASER, iBeam]
P655 P646 P654 P650 P658 P657 P656

P660
TP2
F51
P642 P648
F52
X6 X5
F53
P659
LED14
TP1 LED7 LED11

P643
P649
LED13
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
P644 F49 F50 LED6 P652
X8
LED10 LED12
P651
LED8
X7
LED9
X1 X3 X4
TP3 P647
X2
FL1 FL2 FL3 FL4
P641
P645
6. Electrical parts
TA3 L1 P640
P653
G083174
! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, drive motor and printer section
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.
• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• P655 connector is connected according to the voltage used.

• None
66220 1/2
66220

• ☞ 4203
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.
P660 Unused

LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater)
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater)
LED4 SSR4 and 6 operation check (dryer heater)
LED5 SSR5 and 7 operation check (dryer heater)
LED6 SSR8 operation check (dryer heater)
LED7 Relays X6 and X7 operation check (processing solution float switch)
LED8 Relay X1 operation check (processing solution float switch safety
thermostat)
LED9 Relay X2 operation check (printer main relay)
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover)
6. Electrical parts
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover)
LED12 Relay X3, X4 operation check (dryer safety thermostat)
LED13 TR7 operation check (dryer fan)
LED14 DC24 V power supply check On when the power supply is
turned on.

TP1 DC24 V input check Possible
P2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T5A/250 V: power supply surge protecting circuit) −
F41 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F42 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F43 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F44 T3.15 A/250 V STB heater
F45, F50 (T10A/250 V: dryer heater)
F46, F47, F48, F49 (T6.3A/250 V: dryer heater)
F51 T3.15 A/250 V Circulation pump (STB2, STB1, CD)
F52 T3.15 A/250 V Circulation pump (STB4, STB3, BF)
F53 T6.3 A/250 V DC24 V power supply protection (dryer fan, drive
motor, etc)
Printer main relay X2 does not operate.
66220 2/2
66400
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [LASER, iBeam]
P601 P596 P604 P603

P609
P600
TP5 TP3
LED3
P599
LED2 LED7 P605

P606
TP4 LED6 LED5 LED4

TP2
LED1
TP1
F60 P607 P602 P608 P597 P598

G085854
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Drives motor, each solenoid valve, replenisher pump and water supply pump of the F replenishment section, and relays the output
signal.
• Detects the solution level of the replenishment tank and controls the interlock switch (replenisher section door).
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P608, P609 Unused

LED1 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher ON
Pump performance check OFF
66400 1/2
66400

LED5, LED6 Unused
LED7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
ON/OFF check OFF

TP1 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP2 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TP4G Ground Possible
TP5G DC+5 V Ground Possible

F60 T5 A/250 V PCB protection
6. Electrical parts
66400 2/2
66500
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] [LASER, iBeam]
G050714
! Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the tablet replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Lights LEDs, drives motors and relays output signals on the tablet replenishment section
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

LED3 Relay X22 operation check On when the power supply is turned on.

G Ground Possible

F25 T3.15A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
66500 1/1
66600
SM I/O PCB (J391378) [SM] [LASER, iBeam]
Unused
G070013
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB.
☞ 27830
• Adjustment methods after replacement are different between SM I/O PCBs J391191 and J391378.
! Unused connector
P606 Unused

LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
66600 1/2
66600

LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
TPG2 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
VR No. Purpose Remarks
VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
66600 2/2
66710
Control strip drive PCB (J391422) [LASER, iBeam]
P3 CN1
P5
P1 P4 DS1
P2
G085070
! Function
• Communicates with the processor control PCB and processes control strips.

• None
! 1. Position
☞ 63250
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
P4, CN1 Unused

2 OFF Unused
66710 1/1
66720
Control strip communication PCB (J391404) [LASER, iBeam]
P823
CN1
P824
DS1
P822
G085071
! Function
• Relays communication between the auto insertion holder unit and the processor control PCB

• None
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
• Control strip auto loading unit: ☞ 63250
• Communication unit: ☞ 63260

• None

• None
! Unused connector
P824, CN1 Unused

2 OFF Unused
66720 1/1
66730
Infrared communication unit [LASER, iBeam]
Control strip auto loading unit Communication unit
Infrared communication unit: W413078 Infrared communication unit: W413080
without sticker with sticker: J/P823
G085190
! Function
• Communicate by the infrared rays with control strip auto loading unit and communication unit
! 1. Position
• Control strip auto loading unit: ☞ 63250
• Communication unit: ☞ 63260

• Infrared communication unit can be used both for the control strip auto loading unit and communication unit.
6. Electrical parts
NOTE
• The part number of the infrared communication unit depends on a sticker.
• The infrared communication unit contains a infrared communication PCB and the cable as a set.

• None
! Unused connector
None
66730 1/1
66740
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423) [LASER, iBeam]
P870 LED1
G085074
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order on the top rack
! 1. Position
☞ 63510
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None

LED1 Indication of prioritized order on the top rack Prioritized order being
output: blinks in orange
After prioritized order
ejection: lights in orange
66740 1/1
66750
Front
LED12 LED72 LED24 LED84 LED36 LED96 LED48 LED108 LED60 LED120
Back
P869 P868
G085075
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order from the second rack through the eleventh rack
6. Electrical parts
• Indication of split order from the second rack through the eleventh rack
NOTE
• The order specifying LED PCB 2 is only for the print sorter unit (12 orders type).
! 1. Position
☞ 63510
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None
66750 1/2
66750

LED1 to 6 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Prioritized order being
LED7 to 12 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack output: blinks in orange
Prioritized order ejection
LED13 to 18 Indication of prioritized order on the fourth rack
complete: lights in orange
LED19 to 24 Indication of prioritized order on the fifth rack
LED25 to 30 Indication of prioritized order on the sixth rack
LED31 to 36 Indication of prioritized order on the seventh rack
LED37 to 42 Indication of prioritized order on the eighth rack
LED43 to 48 Indication of prioritized order on the ninth rack
LED49 to 54 Indication of prioritized order on the tenth rack
LED55 to 60 Indication of prioritized order on the eleventh rack
LED61 to 66 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Output of split order: lights
LED67 to 72 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack in blue
LED109 to 114 Indication of prioritized order on the tenth rack
LED115 to 120 Indication of prioritized order on the eleventh rack
6. Electrical parts
66750 2/2
66760
Front
LED12 LED60 LED24 LED72 LED36 LED84 LED48 LED96


Back
P869 P868
G085076
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order from the second rack through the ninth rack
6. Electrical parts
• Indication of split order from the second rack through the ninth rack
NOTE
• The order specifying LED PCB 3 is only for the print sorter unit (ten orders type).
! 1. Position
☞ 63510
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None
66760 1/2
66760

LED1 to 6 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Prioritized order being
LED7 to 12 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack output: blinks in orange
Prioritized order ejection
complete: lights in orange
LED49 to 54 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Output of split order: lights
LED55 to 60 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack in blue
6. Electrical parts
66760 2/2
68100
Cables
Cables
Precautions in handling the cables [LASER, iBeam]
! PCBs which connect to the LVPECL cable

PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVPECL cable
Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 64101 Do not bend the LVPECL cable by R25.4 mm or less.
Laser control PCB (LASER) ☞ 64150 Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
LVPECL cable
R25.4mm
! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB Name Manual No. Precautions in handling the cable
Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 64101 • Do not bend the ARCNET cable by R25 mm or less.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 • Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 ARCNET cable
6. Electrical parts
! To safely remove the optical fiber cable
IMPORTANT
• Evenly pressing the link section of the connector will slightly release the stopper that holds ARCNET cable inside.
If the stopper is released, the ARCNET cable can be safely removed.
Link section
Stoppers
G082810
• Removing the ARCNET cable while the stopper inside the connector is tightened may shave the cable sheath or
damage the stopper.
68100 1/5
68100
Cables
In removing the optical fiber cable, be familiar with the structure of the optical fiber connector, and remove the cable
while using the optical fiber cable pushing bar so that the cable and the connector will not get damaged.
ARCNET cable
Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath
G082809
! How to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar
For precautions for disconnecting the optical fiber cable, see ☞ To safely remove the optical fiber cable.
1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

Check point
6. Electrical parts
(1) Press the retainer in the ARCNET Connecter with the optical fiber cable pushing bar.
Retainers
Optical fiber cable pushing bars

G083085
68100 2/5
68100
Cables
(2) slightly push in the ARCNET cable in the arrow direction.

ARCNET cables
Optical fiber cable pushing bars

G082811
(3) Pull slightly the ARCNET cable to confirm it can be removed, then Remove the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• If the retainer in the connecter is pressed evenly but still the cable cannot be removed smoothly, keep shifting
the optical fiber cable pushing angle to find the best angle to push cable by the bar so that the cable can be
removed smoothly.
2. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
See ☞ How to use the aspirator.
3. Connect the ARCNET cable.
6. Electrical parts
! How to use the fiber cutter

2. Cut the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Cut the ARCNET cable at 15 mm from the end.
• To keep the quality of cutting surface, cut the ARCNET cable only once with each hole of the fiber cutter.
Cutting holes
Before cutting (abnormal)

After cutting (normal)
G081991
IMPORTANT
• If the end of ARCNET cable is in the following condition, cut it.
68100 3/5
68100
Cables
List of ARCNET tools

No. Condition of ARCNET cable Illustration
1 The cable surface is sticky. -
2 The cable surface is thick and soft.
NOTE
• If the cable surface is thick and soft, it may not be inserted into the hole of
fiber cutter.
In this case, cut the ARCNET cable using a nipper or the like, and then cut
the end of the cable with the fiber cutter.
3 The cable surface is shaved.
3. Check the condition of the end of ARCNET cable and that no dust is attached on it.
4. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
See ☞ How to use the aspirator.
6. Electrical parts
! How to use the aspirator

2. Attach the front end of aspirator to the connector on ARCNET PCB to suck out the dust.
Dust
Front end of aspirator
Aspirator
G081992
68100 4/5
68100
Cables

List of ARCNET tools
Tool Part No. Explanation
Optical fiber cable A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
pushing bar For details about how to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar, see ☞ How to use
the optical fiber cable pushing bar.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, see ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 To suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to the ARCNET cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, see ☞ How to use the aspirator.
Cable unit*1 W406859-01 To use the ARCNET cable to diagnose the ARCNET PCB (cable length: four
meters)
*1. The ARCNET cable used here is the ARCNET cable that is included in the External PC connecting kit.
6. Electrical parts
68100 5/5
68550
Cables
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [LASER,
iBeam]
! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied during operation.
! Status
• Power supply (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased, pressing the manual sorter switch for two seconds or
longer does not supply the power (from 200 V to 240 V ).
! Position of the starter jumper

[N], [SM] and [J] F specification
Starter jumper Starter jumper
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB Processor relay PCB
G083184
68550 1/3
68550
Cables
! Diagnosis
Are the personal computer, monitor, and each unit operating?
Not operating Operating
No problem.
Is LED9 on the processor relay PCB ON?
ON OFF
Repair or
replace Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables
are not disconnected.
J/P641 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P431 (relay) ↔
J/P432 (relay)
There is a
problem. Check the Processor relay PCB.
No problem.
Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables are not disconnected.

J/P654 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P794 (processor power)
There is a Check if there is blown fuse.

problem. F53 (125 V/6.3 A) (processor relay PCB)
Check the Processor relay PCB.
6. Electrical parts
No problem.
Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of the
processor relay PCB. Make the processor relay PCB between 200 V and 240 V turn on
forcibly.
Check the version of processor via System Version Check.
Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.
Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the processor relay PCB is on.
ON
OFF
Processor control PCB failure
68550 2/3
68550
Cables
6. Electrical parts
68550 3/3
7000
Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation [LASER, iBeam] .......................................................................................................70010
7 Setup for service personnel
7000 1/1
70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup for service personnel
Setup during installation [LASER, iBeam]
! Procedures
For confirmation and adjustment procedures during installation, see ☞ Installation Manual.
70010 1/1
8000
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................. 80110

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts [LASER, iBeam] ...................................80110
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [LASER, iBeam] .....................................................................................................80310
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89000
Wiring diagram table [LASER, iBeam] ............................................................................................................89000
8 Appendix
8000 1/1
80110
Periodically replaced parts
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

[LASER, iBeam]
The list below shows maintenance items and parts required to be performed or replaced by user or service personnel to keep the system
quality.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, regularly check them and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need to be replaced according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement
timing varies depending on the operating condition of the system.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you need not necessarily replace the parts on the specified timing.
• For the periodically replaced parts, replace them when the processing time or the number of prints processed reaches the
specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values below do not show any warranty period.
NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the systems which are to be shipped outside Japan.
! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.
Parts or checking items Description for maintenance Part No. Timing/Standard Quantity
replacement
timing
Paper supply unit A Check if it cuts well and replace it if dull. Z020657 LP7000/LP7100/3 1
Paper cutter unit Maintenance parts 501i/3501
Replace it approx. every 1,500,000 prints 4 years
by the print counter. LP7200/3502
2 years
CVP unit Check the imprinting condition and I086167 4 years 1
Dot head unit replace it if any dots are missing. (One of
the maintenance parts. Replace it when
the print counter reaches 2,700,000
approximately.)
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A086571 3 years • [F]: 0
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 2 damaged or worn, replace it with a new • [N]: 2
upper guide) one.
• [SM][J]: 2
Check it every six months after three
8. Appendix
years has passed. If necessary, replace it A086568 • [F]: 0
with a new one. • [N]: 2
• [SM][J]: 2
B023917 • [F]: 2
• [N]: 0
• [SM][J]: 0
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A086570 3 years • [F][N][SM][J]: 2
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new
one.
years has passed. If necessary, replace it
with a new one.
Replenisher pump Check its damage. If it is damaged, I091040 3 years • [F]: 2
Poppet valve (fluoro rubber) replace it with a new one. • [N]: 6
• [SM]: 8
with a new one. • EPDMCP-47L, VPII,
QLII, ACPII: 2
80110 1/2
80110
Parts or checking items Description for maintenance Part No. Timing/Standard Quantity
replacement
timing
Replenisher pump Check its damage. If it is damaged, I091003 3 years • [F]: 6
Poppet valve (EPDM) replace it with a new one. • [N]: 6
• [SM]: 2
with a new one. • [J]: 6
• EPDMCP-47L, VPII,
QLII, ACPII: 4
! List of periodically replaced parts

Part name Part No. Quantit Recommended timing of replacement
y
Calibration plate unit B Z026559 1 2 years (When the performance of calibration plate
falls due to the storage status, it is necessary to
replace the plate even if it is before from the
recommended timing of replacement)
Cleaning sheet H089041 1 If the surface of cleaning sheet becomes dirty and
adhesive power is lost, change it with a new sheet.
Replenisher section [SM] A054659 1 1 year
Probe (2) assembly (CD-C only)
Replenisher section [SM] A054658 5 1 year
Probe (1) assembly (CD-C only)
Replenishment pump [SM] I091040 2 1 year
Poppet valve (STB only)
! List of consumable parts
! CVP unit (option)

Part name Part No. Quantity Reference Reason for maintenance/replacement
value of
consumption
Ink ribbon cassette H086044 1 100,000 prints If it runs out of ink, back print may not be
printed normally.
8. Appendix
80110 2/2
80310
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list [LASER, iBeam]
NOTE
• For details about service personnel tools related to film carrier like scanner adjustment chart, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Tool Part No. Explanation

Colorimeter height adjustment jig A076430-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Head adjusting jig A037410-01 Used to adjust the CVP printing pressure.
Socket wrench unit (13 mm) Z022421-01 This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit. (LASER)
Positioning pin A063588-01 Used to position when replacing the laser unit. Two positioning pins
are necessary. (LASER)
Used to position the iBeam unit mount. Two positioning pins are
necessary. (iBeam)
Loupe H099047-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
For details about how to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar, see
☞ How to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar in 68100
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, refer to 68100 ☞ How
to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 To suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to the
ARCNET cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, refer to ☞ How to use
the aspirator in 68100.
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM systems)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM systems)
Hose H121232 Use this to operate each automated flushing valve and auto cleaning
pump at input check. (only F)
8. Appendix
80310 1/1
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram table [LASER, iBeam]
• Wiring diagrams
• IPP means LP7000/3501i PLUS.
• LPP means LP7100, LP7200/3501 PLUS, 3502 PLUS.
Block No. Item Diagram No.
- System connection diagram J310450
! Printer section/Processor section

IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) [F] J310391
IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) J310424
IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan 1P2W J310392
specification) [F]
specification)
specification) [F]
specification)
LPP 1-2 AC power supply circuit diagram J310337
IPP 1-2 AC power supply circuit diagram J310356
IPP/LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram [F] J310399
IPP/LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram [N] J310426
IPP/LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram [SM] J310427
IPP/LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram [J] J310526
IPP/LPP 1-4 DC power supply circuit diagram J310334
LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram J310336
IPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram J310357
LPP 2-1 System diagram J310338
IPP 2-1 System diagram J310358
LPP 2-2 Around paper supply unit A J310361
8. Appendix
IPP 2-2 Around paper supply unit A J310453
IPP/LPP 2-3 Around paper advance unit J310339
IPP 2-3 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit J310359
IPP/LPP 2-4 Around paper advance unit J310519
LPP 2-4 Around paper advance unit J310521
LPP 2-5 Around laser unit (type HB) J310340
IPP 2-5 Around printhead module J310452
IPP/LPP 2-6 Around correction value printing unit J310520
IPP/LPP 2-7 Around triple magazine unit J310341
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-01 Frame section SEQ0026
LPP-PRINTER-02 Interlock circuit SEQ0027
IPP-PRINTER-03 Interlock circuit SEQ0028
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-04 Paper supply unit SEQ0029
LPP-PRINTER-05 Exposure advance unit SEQ0030
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-07 Paper advance unit SEQ0032
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-08 Dual magazine unit SEQ0033
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-09 Triple magazine unit SEQ0034
IPP-PRINTER-10 Around printhead module SEQ0035
89000 1/2
89000

LPP-PRINTER-11 Laser unit (1) SEQ0036
LPP/IPP-PRINTER-14 Correction value printing unit SEQ0039
IPP/LPP 3-1 Around processor relay PCB [F] J310394
IPP/LPP 3-1 Around processor relay PCB [N] [SM] J310428
IPP/LPP 3-1 Around processor relay PCB [J] J310528
IPP/LPP 3-2 Around processor control PCB (1) [F] J310395
IPP/LPP 3-2 Around processor control PCB (1) J310429
IPP/LPP 3-3 Around processor control PCB (2) [F] J310396
IPP/LPP 3-3 Around processor control PCB (2) J310430
IPP/LPP 3-3 Around processor control PCB (2) [SM] J310431
IPP/LPP 3-3 Around processor control PCB (2) [J] J310527
IPP/LPP 3-4 Around F replenishment I/O PCB [F] J310397
IPP/LPP 3-4 Around SM I/O PCB [SM] J310351
IPP/LPP 3-4 Around J unit [J] J310525
IPP/LPP 3-5 Control strip auto loading unit J310367
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-01 Temperature control block (1) SEQ0041

LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-03 Processor section SEQ0044
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-04 Replenisher section (1) SEQ0045
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-04 Water supply section (1) SEQ0046
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-05 Replenisher section (2) SEQ0047
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-05 Water supply section (2) SEQ0048
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-06 Effluent block SEQ0049
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-07 Drive section SEQ0050
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-08 Dryer section (1) SEQ0051
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit SEQ0054
8. Appendix
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] SEQ0055
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-16 Tablet replenishment section (1) [J] SEQ0059
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-17 Tablet replenishment section (2) [J] SEQ0060
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-18 F Replenisher section (1) [F] SEQ0061
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-21 Cooling water plumbing unit SEQ0064
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-22 Around colorimeter unit SEQ0065
LPP/IPP-PROCESSOR-23 Control strip auto loading unit SEQ0066
89000 2/2

En35ser 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

En35ser 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En35ser 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QSS-35 PLUS series

Issued in April, 2007

– for service personnel only –

1.Cautions for Work

2.Replacement and adjustment of parts

7.Setup for service personnel

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work

Symbols used in this manual

This is called the alert symbol.

The Note symbol indicates useful information on functions and instructions.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

1. Cautions for Work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

7. Setup for service personnel

1. Cautions for Work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

1 Cautions for Work

Description of warnings (signal words)

1. Cautions for Work

Example of warning label

Symbol (warning indication)

Warning text (warning

Location of warning labels

1. Cautions for Work

Optional dual magazine unit

1. Cautions for Work

1. Cautions for Work

1. Cautions for Work

For safe operation

1. Cautions for Work

! Precautions for processing solutions

! Precautions against electric shock

1. Cautions for Work

! Precautions for operating rotary section

! Precautions for operating heating section

! Precautions for movable units

1. Cautions for Work

! Precautions around cutting parts

• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts.

Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

1. Cautions for Work

1. Cautions for Work

5 QSS-3501 PLUS/3502 PLUS series LP7100 / 7200

1. Cautions for Work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Space dimension between units .......................................................................................... 26910

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Model list [LASER, iBeam]

*1. In the Service Manual, some sections describe as (LASER, iBeam).

Model Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

QSS-3502 PLUS • Capacity booster E is necessary.